advertisement
Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a
.pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly.
Programming Manual
A50-031167-003 NA
ISSUE 3.01
Copyright
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time without notice.
NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright 2011 - 2012
NEC Corporation
Printed in Japan
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
Section 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING.......................................................... 1-1
Section 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE...................................................... 1-2
Section 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS................................ 1-3
Section 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES......................................... 1-4
Section 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING...................................................... 1-4
Section 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN........................................ 1-5
Chapter 2 Programming the SL1100
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup...................................................... 2-11
10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection........................................................ 2-21
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment...................................................... 2-22
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup...................................................... 2-24
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup.................................................. 2-32
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup...................................... 2-34
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup........................................... 2-35
10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup......................................................... 2-41
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup......................................... 2-43
Programming Manual i
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
ii
10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package............................................. 2-49
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers........................................................ 2-65
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator).................................. 2-68
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)................................. 2-71
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)............................................ 2-75
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)................... 2-83
11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup............................................. 2-87
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions.................................... 2-94
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks........................................... 2-95
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions.............................. 2-100
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name..................................................... 2-101
13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name.......................................................... 2-104
13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name........................................................... 2-105
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks....................................................... 2-119
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks................................ 2-120
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk.................................................... 2-122
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup............................................... 2-125
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup.......................................... 2-131
Programming Manual
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup.......................................... 2-134
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions..................................................... 2-137
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys............................................................ 2-138
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup.................................... 2-145
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment.................................................... 2-147
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup.......................... 2-148
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment...................................... 2-149
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions.......................... 2-150
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys ...................................................... 2-152
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension.................................................. 2-153
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication......................................................... 2-154
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options.......................................... 2-155
15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal.............................................. 2-158
15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup................................. 2-159
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup................................................ 2-160
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions.................................. 2-162
16-03 : Secondary Department Group........................................................... 2-163
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups................................... 2-164
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones.......................................... 2-167
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones...................................... 2-170
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions............................................... 2-172
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)................................. 2-174
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)............................. 2-176
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)............................. 2-178
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)....................................... 2-180
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)............................. 2-182
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)............................ 2-184
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)........................... 2-185
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M............................................ 2-189
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data............................................. 2-198
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation............................................. 2-199
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment.......................................................... 2-207
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup..................................................... 2-210
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup....................................................... 2-213
Programming Manual iii
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
iv
20-43 : Power supply for each package......................................................... 2-216
20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode................................................. 2-220
20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor............................................ 2-221
20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup......................................... 2-222
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls.................................................... 2-224
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions.................................................. 2-227
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks........................................................ 2-228
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions................................................. 2-229
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup......................................... 2-234
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension........................................ 2-237
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment........................................ 2-238
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks.................................... 2-239
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions............................. 2-240
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup.......................................... 2-241
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions................................. 2-242
21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking................................................. 2-243
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk....................... 2-244
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension................. 2-245
21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension.............................. 2-246
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)................... 2-247
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings........................ 2-248
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls.................................................... 2-249
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment.................................... 2-254
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment........................................... 2-255
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode............................................................. 2-256
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination........................................................ 2-258
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion................................................. 2-262
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment........................... 2-266
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG......................................................... 2-267
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group.................................. 2-268
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup.............................................. 2-269
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern...................... 2-270
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup................................................... 2-272
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer.......................................................... 2-274
Programming Manual
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions................................. 2-275
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup.............................. 2-280
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup......................................... 2-281
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup...................................................... 2-284
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing..................... 2-286
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy..................... 2-287
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment.............................................. 2-288
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup...................................... 2-289
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA............................................................ 2-291
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA........................................... 2-297
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service........................... 2-300
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS....................................... 2-305
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode........................................................... 2-306
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment................................................. 2-307
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment.......................................................... 2-308
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer......................................................... 2-313
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging..................................... 2-316
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment.................................................... 2-318
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page........................................... 2-322
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments......................................................... 2-324
31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting................................................. 2-326
Programming Manual v
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
vi
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines............................................ 2-333
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class................................................... 2-334
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line..................................................... 2-336
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines............................................. 2-338
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group........................................... 2-347
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups............................... 2-348
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS................................... 2-353
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option................................................ 2-354
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment........................................................ 2-356
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments................................................. 2-357
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group............................ 2-358
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules.............................................................. 2-359
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup............................................................ 2-361
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement................................................................ 2-365
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement.............................. 2-368
41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement.............................................. 2-372
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel).............................................. 2-376
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes................................................ 2-378
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route...................................................... 2-381
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access.................................... 2-382
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule........................................ 2-386
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access................................................. 2-390
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route....................................................... 2-391
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route.................................................... 2-393
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route................................................... 2-394
Programming Manual
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment....................................................... 2-398
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits................ 2-399
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options.................................................... 2-409
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options........................................................ 2-417
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options.................................................... 2-431
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options................................................. 2-432
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options................................... 2-435
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options..................................... 2-437
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options.................................... 2-438
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options...................................... 2-440
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup.............................................................. 2-447
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup................................................... 2-449
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System.................................................. 2-451
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup................................. 2-452
81-05 : ISDN PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup................................... 2-461
81-06 : ISDN PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup........................................... 2-462
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port....................................... 2-464
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting................................................. 2-468
82-05 : ISDN PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup.................................... 2-473
82-06 : ISDN PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup............................................ 2-474
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port..................................... 2-476
82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup......................................................... 2-478
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone..................... 2-483
Programming Manual vii
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
viii
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup......................................... 2-485
84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup.................................... 2-490
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup...................................... 2-492
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup.................................................... 2-496
84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup................................................... 2-499
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup............................... 2-501
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup............................................. 2-504
84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup......................................... 2-505
84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup.......................................... 2-506
84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup............................ 2-508
84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup............................................. 2-514
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup.............................. 2-515
84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup.......................................................... 2-516
90-02 : Programming Password Setup.......................................................... 2-522
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup................................................ 2-530
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones............................................. 2-548
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup................................... 2-549
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup................................................. 2-550
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup.................................................. 2-552
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup..................................................... 2-572
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting.......................................................... 2-573
90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup................................................ 2-575
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data.................................. 2-578
90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information.................................. 2-579
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700................................................. 2-580
Programming Manual
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface...................................... 2-581
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone...................... 2-582
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange........................................... 2-584
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information..................................................... 2-593
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup................................... 2-596
90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set......................................... 2-598
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number.......................................................... 2-604
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password........................................................ 2-607
93-05 : Department Group Information.......................................................... 2-615
Programming Manual ix
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-4 Program 15-08 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns.................................. 2-145
Table 2-6 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................. 2-252
x Programming Manual
Introduction
S
ECTION
1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING
Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first.
This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory.
This Manual is created for System : SL1100
S
ECTION
2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into the following headings :
Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program.
The program access level is just above the Description heading. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to
for a list of the system access levels and passwords.
Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did not intend.
Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into system memory.
For example :
1.
Enter the programming mode.
2.
15-07-01
1
tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you will see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for the extension. The second row of the display “KY01 = * 01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of
* 01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is
Programming Manual 1-1
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, refer to
How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1-2 .
S
ECTION
3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE
To enter programming mode :
1.
Go to any working display telephone.
In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).
2.
Do not lift the handset.
3.
Press Speaker.
4.
# * # * .
5.
Dial the system password + Hold.
Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the passwords, use
90-02 : Programming Password Setup on page 2-522 .
Password User Name
******
necam
12345678
0000
9999
sltech
ADMIN1
ADMIN2
Level Programs at this Level
1 (MF) Manufacture Level (MF) :
80-02, 80-03, 80-04, 80-05, 80-07, 80-10, 81-04, 81-05, 82-01, 82-04,
82-05, 82-08
2 (IN) Installation (IN) :
All programs in this section not listed for MF, SA, & SB
3 (SA) System Administrator - Level 1 (SA) :
10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-23,
10-24, 10-25, 10-28, 10-29, 10-45, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 12-08, 15-01,
15-07, 15-09, 15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 20-34, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11,
22-17, 25-08, 30-03, 30-04, 32-02, 45-02, 84-22, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06,
90-07, 90-19, 90-57, 90-58, 90-59, 90-65
4 (SB) System Administrator - Level 2 (SB) :
13-04, 13-05, 13-06, 13-11, 15-14, 21-20
S
ECTION
4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
To-exit the programming mode :
When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit (pressing the Mute key will exit the program option).
1.
Press Mute key to exit the program options, if needed.
2.
Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System Data" is displayed.
1-2 Introduction
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
3.
The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the telephone to an idle mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank Compact Flash (CF) Card is required. Insert the CF Card into the
CPU and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the CF Card. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a CF Card can only hold one customer database. Each database to be saved requires a separate drive.
CF card
CPU card
CF Slot (CN2)
VMDB-C1
S
ECTION
5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS
Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and move around in the menus.
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data
When you want to ...
Enter Data into program
Next Index
Prior Index
Select Data
All Clear
Register
Go Back to Prior Screen
Move Cursor Jump Up/Down
Delete single character
Next Page
Toggle between Number/Character
While in a Entering Number
Prior Page
Quit the programming
Move Cursor to Left
Change Program Number
Change Index Number
Telephone Programming
0 ~ 9, * , # Line Key (1 ~ 6)
Cursor Key (Up)
Cursor Key (Down)
Line Key (1 ~ 6)
Flash
Hold
Enter
Mute
Clear / Back
DND
Clear / Back
Help
Transfer
Speaker
Exit
Cursor Key (Left)
Soft Key1
Soft Key2
Programming Manual 1-3
SL1100
When you want to ...
Change Program Number
Change Index Number
Move Cursor to Right
Telephone Programming
Soft Key3
Cursor Key (Right)
Soft Key4
ISSUE 3.01
S
ECTION
6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES
Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit ...
5
6
7
8
9
0
3
4
1
2
*
#
Clear/Back
Flash
When you want to ...
Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
Enter characters :
* + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
S
ECTION
7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING
Each Display telephone with Softkeys provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system programming. Simply press the Softkey located below the option you wish and the display will change accordingly.
Pressing the Cursor key Up or Down will scroll between the menus.
1-4 Introduction
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
S
ECTION
8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN
When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are displayed. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the programs.
Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts
If you press this Softkey ...
back select
- 1
+ 1
Softkey Display Prompts
The system will ...
Go back one step in the program display.
You can press Cursor Key (UP) or Cursor Key (Down) to scroll forward or backward through a list of programs.
Scroll down through the available programs.
Scroll up through the available programs.
Select the currently displayed program.
Move the cursor to the left.
Move the cursor to the right.
Move back through the available program options.
Move forward through the available program options.
S
ECTION
9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES
The following table provides the capacities for the SL1100 system.
System Type
System
Analog Caller ID Detector (detected by DSP)
Classes of Service
Day/Night Mode Numbers
Day/Night Service Patterns
Dial Tone Detector
DTMF Receiver
Toll Restriction Classes
Verifiable Account Code Table
Trunk
Trunk Port Number
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities
System Number Plan/Capacities
Number Plan/Capacities
96 channels
Related Program
15
800
84
15
8
4
96
20–06
12–07
12–07
35–06
Note
Programming Manual 1-5
SL1100
System Type
Trunk Ports (Total) :
• Analog Trunks
• T1/PRI Trunk Ports
• VoIPDB Trunk Ports
(VoIPDB & MEMDB is required. Need license to be
Max.)
DID Translation Tables
DID Translation Table Entries
DISA :
• Classes of Service
• Users
Ring Groups
Trunk Access Maps
Trunk Group Numbers
Trunk Routes
Extension
Telephone Extension Ports
• Multiline Terminals
• Single Line Phones/Analog
Devices
• VoIPDB Extensions (SIP-MLT/
Std)
(VoIPDB & MEMDB is required. Need license to be
Max. (SIP-Std))
Digital Extension Ports
• Physical Ports
Telephone Extension Number
Range
Virtual Extension Ports
Virtual Extension Number Range
Door Boxes
Door Box Numbers
DSS Consoles Numbers :
• 60 Button DSS Console
Operator Access Number
Operator Extension
Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing Groups
Speed Dialing Bins
Speed Dialing Table-Common
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers
Conference
System Number Plan/Capacities
Number Plan/Capacities
76
36
48
16
01 ~ 08
1 ~ 89999999 *
( * Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
50
1 ~ 89999999 *
( * Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
6
1 ~ 6
12
0 (Default)
15
32
0 ~ 999
900
1 ~ 100
84
72
60
25
84
25
25
20
800
15
15
32
1-6
22–10
22–10
20–14
25–09
22–04
14–07
14–05
14–06
ISSUE 3.01
Related Program
Note
11–04
11–04
32–02
32–02
30–01
13–02
13–02
13–01–03
25–06
Introduction
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
System Type
System Number Plan/Capacities
Number Plan/Capacities Related Program
Note
Conference Circuits 32 : maximum
(16 Parties Per Conference)
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group
Numbers
Call Pickup Group Numbers
Hotline
Internal Hotline
External Hotline
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers
External Page Group Numbers
External Speakers
Park Group Numbers
Park Orbits
SMDR
SMDR Ports
VRS/VM InMail
VRS/VM InMail
VRS/VM Ports
(Need license and MEMDB)
VRS Port
(Need MEMDB)
1 ~ 32
1 ~ 32
84
84
0, 01 ~ 32
1 ~ 3
1 ~ 3
1 ~ 64
1 ~ 64
1 ~ 2
1
16
16
16–01
23–02
31–02
31–04
31–04
24–03
24–03
35–03
VRS Attendant Messages
VRS Recordable Messages
VRS Ports
VoIPDB
RTP Ports
RTCP Ports
DSP Resources
Passwords
Programming Passwords :
Level 1 (MF)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
3
100
16
0 ~ 65534
0 ~ 65535
16
***** necam
40–10–02
Level 2 (IN)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
Level 3 (SA)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
Level 4 (SB)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
12345678 sltech
0000
ADMIN1
9999
ADMIN2
Programming Password Users 8
Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual.
Programming Manual 1-7
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
S
ECTION
10 CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER
Each unit installed to the system has a slot number assigned. Some of slot number are fixed to a unit that be installed. Other slots are not fixed to unit but fixed to location where it is installed. Below chart shows the slot and its number :
Main KSU Expansion KSU 1-2
Slot 0 Base Unit
Slot 10 4th Unit*
Slot 3 3rd Unit
Slot 2 2nd Unit
Slot 1 Base Unit
C
P
U
Slot 11/12 4th Unit*
Slot 6/9 3rd Unit
Slot 5/8 2nd Unit
Slot 4/7 Base Unit
I
F
E
X
E
* Note: 4th Unit is available for V1.5 or higher. Only limited for PRI unit with limitation.
Please see the hardware manual for further information.
1-8 Introduction
Programming the SL1100
S
ECTION
1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM
The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to properly program your system.
The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes.
Program Number : Program Name
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup on page 2-3
Program 11 : System Numbering on page 2-56
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup on page 2-89
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing on page 2-98
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup on page 2-106
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup on page 2-123
Program 16 : Department Group Setup on page 2-160
Program 20 : System Option Setup on page 2-165
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup on page 2-224
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup on page 2-249
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup on page 2-273
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup on page 2-276
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup on page 2-284
Program 26 : ARS Service on page 2-300
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup on page 2-306
Program 31 : Paging Setup on page 2-316
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup on page 2-327
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup on page 2-331
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup on page 2-343
Program 40 : Voice Recording System on page 2-352
Program 41 : ACD Setup on page 2-357
Program 42 : Hotel Setup on page 2-374
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup on page 2-381
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration on page 2-395
Program 47 : InMail on page 2-400
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System on page 2-441
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk on page 2-459
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension on page 2-470
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP on page 2-485
Program 90 : Maintenance Program on page 2-521
Program 92 : Copy Program on page 2-600
Programming Manual 2-1
2
SL1100
Program Number : Program Name
Program 93 : System Information on page 2-610
ISSUE 3.01
2-2 Programming the SL1100
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728 to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Year
Month
Day
Week
Item
05
06
07
Hour
Minute
Second
Input Data
07 ~ 96
01 ~ 12
01 ~ 31
1 ~ 7 (Sun ~ Sat)
00 ~ 23
00 ~ 59
00 ~ 59
Description
Enter 2 digits for year (07 ~ 96).
Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 12) for the month.
Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 31) for the day.
Enter digit for the day of the week (1 =
Sunday, 7 = Saturday).
Enter 2 digits for the hour (00 ~ 23).
Enter 2 digits for the minute (00 ~ 59).
Enter 2 digits for the second (00 ~ 59).
Default
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-3
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-02 : Location Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description
Country Code
International Access
Code
Other Area Access
Code
Area Code
Trunk Access Code
Dial (up to four digits) :
0 ~ 9, * , #
Dial (up to four digits) :
0 ~ 9, * , #
Dial (up to two digits) :
0 ~ 9, * , #
Dial (up to six digits) :
0 ~ 9,
*
, #
Dial (up to eight dig-
its) : 0 ~ 9, * , #
Enter the country code.
Enter the international access code.
Enter the other area access code.
Enter the local area code.
Enter the trunk access code digits required to place an outgoing call.
Default
1
No Setting
9
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-4 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : ETU Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each unit.
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the unit.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
10
Input Data
Slot No.
00 ~ 12
For ESIU PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Terminal Type (B1)
02
Logical Port Number
10
12
Bottom option information
Multi-Line Telephone Line
01 ~ 08
Input Data
0 = No setting
1 = Multi-Line Telephone
10 = DSS Console
0 = No setting
1 = Multi-Line Telephone (1 ~
72)
10 = DSS Console (1 ~ 12)
0 = None
4 = WHA
0 = None
12 = 12 Line
Terminal Type (B1)
24 = 24 Line
Description
This program can only be change by using PC Programming.
Default
0
0
0
0
For SLIU PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01
03
04
05
Item
Logical Port Number
Transmit Gain Level (S-Level)
Receive Gain Level (R-Level)
Select port type
Input Data
0 ~ 84
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB)
0 = SLT
1 = Door Phone
01 ~ 08
Default
0
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
0
Programming Manual 2-5
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
For COIU Unit Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01
Item
Logical Port Number
1 ~ 36
Input Data
1 ~ 4
Default
0
Program
10
For PRIU PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
Item No.
01
02
03
Item
ISDN Line Mode
Logical Port Number
CRC Multi-frame (CRC4)
(Only for 2M = 30ch Mode)
Input Data
0 = No setting
1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point
6 = S-Point (Leased Line)
[0 : No setting] = 0
[1 : T-Point] = 1 ~ 84
[2 : S-Point] = 1 ~ 84
[6 : S-Point (Leased Line)] = 1 ~ 84
0 = off
1 = on
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
1 ~ 5
05
CLIP Information
0 = No
1 = Yes
06
07
08
09
Length of Cable
S-point DDI digits
Dial Sending Mode
Dial Information Element
0 = Level 1
1 = Level 2
2 = Level 3
3 = Level 4
4 = Level 5
0 - 4
0 = Enbloc Sending
1 = Overlap Sending
0 = Keypad Facility
1 = Called Party Number
13
Loss-Of-Signal Detection
Limit
0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity)
1 = Level 1
2 = Level 2
3 = Level 3
4 = Level 4
5 = Level 5
6 = Level 6
7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity)
01 ~ 24
Description
The start port number of a PRI line is displayed.
Each timer value of
Layer 3 is set up for each type in Program
81-06 (T-Bus)
Based on this setting, the system includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted
(0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.
ISDN Protocol definition
ISDN Protocol definition
Only when Dial Sending
Mode (10-03-08) is set for
1 (Overlap Sending).
If the transmit/receive voltage is less than the setting in 10-03-13, the system considers this as
Loss-Of-Signal and the
PRI does not come up.
Note that there are different values based on the setting in 10-03-12 for the
PRI.
Default
1
0
1
1
1
2
0
0
0
2
2-6 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item No.
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
Item Input Data
Service Protocol for S-point 0 = Keypad facility
1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire system
Call Busy Mode for S-point
0 = Alerting
1 = Disconnect
Two B-Channel Transfer for
PRI Service
Type of Number
0 = off
1 = on
0 = Unknown
1 = International number
2 = National number
3 = Network Specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number
Numbering Plan Identification
Network Exchange Selection
Number of Ports
0 = Unknown
1 = ISDN numbering plan
2 = Data numbering plan
3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan
0 = Standard (same as NI-2)
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = DMS (A211)
4 = 5ESS
5 = DMS (A233)
6 = 4ESS
7 = NI-2
0 = Auto
1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports
Description
ISDN Protocol definition.
Select the number type for the ISDN circuit.
ISDN Protocol definition.
Select the Numbering
Plan used for the ISDN circuit.
Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit
Default
0
1
7
0
0
0
2
Program
10
For PRI (T1) PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Logical Port Number
1 ~ 84
Input Data
02
03
04
T1 Signal Format Selection
Zero Code Suppression
Line Length Selection
05
T1 Clock Source
0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame)
1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)
0 = B8ZS
1 = AMI/ZCS
0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet
1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet
0 = Internal
1 = External
01 ~ 24
Description
The start port number of a
T1 line is displayed, and
24 logic ports are automatically assigned to a
DTI (T1) line.
Default
0
0
0
0
1
Programming Manual 2-7
SL1100
Item
No.
06
Item
Number of Ports
Input Data
0 = Auto
1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports
Description
ISSUE 3.01
Default
0
Program
10
For VoIPDB PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01
02
Item
Trunk Logical Port Number
Trunk Type
Input Data
01 ~ 32
1 ~ 84
1 = SIP
Default
0
1
Conditions
• When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type manually.
• The system must have a unit installed to view/change the options for that type of unit.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-8 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source. For internal
Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or one of eleven synthesized selections.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data Description
Music on Hold Source
Selection
0 = Internal MOH (Tone set by PRG 10-04-02)
1 = External MOH (Tone set by PRG 10-60-01:
Audio Port No.2)
2 = Service Tone (Tone set by PRG 80-01, tone
64)
3 = VMDB (Tone set by
PRG 10-04-02)
Music on Hold Tone
Selection
Audio Gain Setup
[In case Item 1 is 0.]
1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[In case Item 1 is 1, 2, or
3.]
1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Number
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5
dB)
• Internal Music Tune - The tune is set by
Program 10-04-02.
• External Source - ACI input via audio connector (J421) (Program10-60-01).
• Silence - Callers on hold hear silence.
Download File1 : Farewell Song (by Chopin)
Download File2 : Die Forelle (by F. Schubert)
Download File3 : Plaisir d’amour (by
J.P.E.Martini
Default
1 (V1.5
Changed)
1
32 (0 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Background Music
• Music on Hold
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-9
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk
LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Pre-Ringing
Item Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0
Conditions
• Used with Analog Trunks only.
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
2-10 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CPU for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CPU has 16 circuits initially, and an additional 16 circuits are added when a VMDB is installed. By Adding EXIFE system can have up to 96. These are used as follows:
• Extension: DTMF receiver for single line telephone
• Trunk: DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection for analog trunks
Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number
Item
No.
01
Item
DTMF Dial Tone Detection
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Input Data
01 ~ 96
Default
Resource 01 - 96 = 0
(Common)
Resource 01 - 16 are
Baic resource (only use
Basic Board)
Resource 17 - 32 are vmdb resource (only use Basic Board)
Resource 33 - 64 are
EXIFE1 resource (only use Expansion 1)
Resource 65 - 96 are
EXIFE2 resource (only use Expansion 2)
Program
10
Conditions
• CPU has 16 Channel DSP resources (receivers) only for basic CPU Unit. VMDB has additional 16
DSP resources which you can add to CPU. Addition to that EXIFE also each has 32 DSP resource
(receivers) only for expand unit.
• In case of 0 (= Common) is selected, and if 14-02-10 (Caller ID receive ability) is set to “Yes”, DSP resources are always allocated to analog trunk only, not for analog extension. If 14-02-10 is set to
“No”, the DSP resources can be used for both analog trunk and analog extension commonly.
Feature Cross Reference
• Caller ID
• Central Office Calls, Placing
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual 2-11
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-12 : CPU Network Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-12 : CPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default
Gateway addresses.
Caution!
If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed, the system must be reset for the changes to take affect.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
IP Address
02
Subnet Mask
03
Default Gateway
Input Data Description Default
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 |
224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 |
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 |
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0 |
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 |
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Set for CPU.
The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all Host Addresses are 0.
If the network section is:
0,
127,
128.0,
191.255,
192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid.
Assign the default gateway IP address.
192.168.0.10
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
2-12 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Time Zone
NIC Interface
0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and
24 = +12 Hours)
Determine the offset from Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT) time.
Then enter its respective value.
For example,
Eastern Time (US and Canada) has a
GMT offset of -5.
The program data would then be 7
(0 = - 12,
1 = - 11,
2 = - 10,
3 = - 9,
4 = - 8,
5 = - 7,
6 = - 6,
7 = - 5,
:
24 = + 12)
0 = Auto Detect
1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
NIC Auto Negotiate
(CPU)
If using an external NAPT Router or not.
Network Address Port
Translation (NAPT)
Router Setup
0 = No (Disable)
1 = Yes (Enable)
NAPT Router IP Address(Default Gateway [WAN])
ICMP Redirect
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0= NO, Signaling packets will follow the ICMP redirect message.
1= YES, Signaling packets will NOT follow the
ICMP redirect message.
Set the IP address on the WAN side of router.
When receiving ICMP redirect message, this determines if the IP Routing Table updates automatically or not.
IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Assign the IP Address for the VoIPDB.
If a VoIPDB is installed in the system it is recommended to set PRG 10-12-01 to
0.0.0.0 and all connections to the system will be made through the VoIPDB.
Default
07
0
0
0.0.0.0
0
172.16.0.10
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-13
Program
10
SL1100
Item
No.
10
Item
Subnet Mask
11
NIC Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Input Data Description
128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 |
224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 |
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 |
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0 |
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 |
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
Assign the subnet mask for the VoIPDB card.
0 = Auto Detect
1 = 100 Mbps, Full Duplex
3 = 10 Mbps, Full Duplex
5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex
Set for VoIPDB.
Default
255.255.0.0
0
Conditions
• The system must be reset for these changes to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-14 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CPU.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
DHCP Server Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
02
05
Lease Time
Last DHCP Data
Days 0 ~ 255
Hour 0 ~ 23
Minutes 0 ~ 59
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Enable or disable the use of the built-in
DHCP Server. This program cannot be enabled if PRG10-63-01 is enabled.
Lease Time of the IP address to a client.
Pressing the Hold Key increments to the next setting data.
If 10–13–01 is enabled, this setting determines if DHCP resource is enabled or disabled.
Default
0
0 day
0 hour
30 minutes
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-15
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the
DHCP Server leases to a client.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
The Range of the IP address to Lease.
Input Data Description
Minimum :
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Maximum :
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
When Maximum has not been entered, the maximum value equals the minimum value.
Default
172.16.0.100
172.16.5.254
Related Program
10-13-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-16 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.
Input Data
Client Number
Item No.
01
MAC Address
Item
IP Address
1 ~ 16
Input Data
MAC :
00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
1.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Description
The IP address should be assigned out of the scope range set up in Program
10-14.
Default
00-00-00-00-00-00
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-17
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to each client.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Router
Item Description
Set the Router IP address.
Default
3 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
02
DNS Server
03
TFTP Server
05
MGC
06
Client Host Name
07
DNS Domain Name
08
Download Protocol
09
Encryption Information
Input Data
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 64 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 64 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 20 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
1 = FTP
2 = HTTP
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
Maximum 128 character strings
Set IP address of DNS
Server.
Set the name for the
TFTP Server.
6 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
66 (Fixed)
No setting
129 (Fixed)
172.16.0.10
Set the Client Host
Name.
Set the DNS Domain
Name.
Set Download Protocol used for AutoConfig (for
DR700 Series).
Set an Encryption Information used for Auto-
Config (for DR700 series).
12 (Fixed)
No setting
15 (Fixed)
No setting
43 (Fixed)
163 (Fixed)
1
43 (Fixed)
164 (Fixed)
No setting
2-18 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
14
POP3 Server
18
FTP Server
Item
10
FTP Server Address
11
Config File Name
12
Vender Class ID
13
SNMP Server
16
SIP Server (IP Address)
17
SIP Server (Domain Name)
19
Config File Name
20
LDS Server 1
21
LDS Server 2
22
LDS Server 3
Input Data
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
Maximum 15 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 256 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 20 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 15 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Description
Set a FTP Server Address used for AutoConfig.
Default
43 (Fixed)
141
0.0.0.0
Set a File Name used for
AutoConfig.
43 (Fixed)
151
No setting
60 (Fixed)
NEC DR700
69 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
70 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
120 (Fixed)
172.16.0.10
If there is setting in
10-16-16 this setting will be ignored
120 (Fixed)
No setting
141 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
151 (Fixed)
No setting
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-19
SL1100
Item
No.
23
LDS Server 4
Item
24
Next Server IP Address
27
SIP Server Receive Port
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Input Data
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Port: 1 ~ 65535
Description
ISSUE 3.01
Default
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
168 (Fixed)
5080
2-20 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource on the VoIPDB unit.
Input Data
DSP Resource Number
Item
No.
01
Item
VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
01 ~ 32
Input Data Description Default
0 = Common use for both IP extensions and trunks
1 = Use for IP extensions
2 = Use for SIP trunks
3 = User for Networking
(V1.5 Added)
5 = Blocked
6 = Common without unicast paging
7 = Multicast paging
8 = Unicast paging
This program is used to assign the 16 or
32 resources of the VoIPDB.
NEC recommends leaving the default settings as system default.
Resource 1 = 1
Resource 2 ~ 32
= 0
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-21
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.
Input Data
Type of External Equipment
Item
No.
01
TCP Port
Item
1 = CTI Server
4 = Networking System (V1.5 Added)
5 = SMDR Output
6 = DIM Output
9 = 1st Party CTI
11 = O&M Server
12 = Traffic Report Output
13 = Room Data Output for Hotel Service
14 = IP-DECT Directory Access (V3.0 Added)
Input Data
0 ~ 65535
1 ~ 255 seconds
Default
External Device 1 (CTI
Server) = 8181 (V3.0
Changed)
External Device 4 (Networking System) =
30000 (V1.5 Added)
External Device 5
(SMDR Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM
Output) = 0
External Device 9 (1st
Party CTI ) = 8282
(V3.0 Changed)
External Device 11
(O&M Server) = 8080
External Device 12
(Traffic Report Output)
= 0
External Device 13
(Room Data Output for
Hotel Service) = 0
External Device 14 (IP-
DECT Directory Access) = 0 (V3.0 Added)
30 03
Keep Alive Time
Conditions
None
2-22 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-23
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is interconnected and define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for SL1100 system interconnection.
Input Data
System Number
Item
No.
01
Item
System Interconnection
02
IP Address
03
04
Call Control Port
Dial Number
Input Data
0 = No (Disable)
1 = Yes (Enable)
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Read Only:
1 ~ 65535
Up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9)
001 ~ 1000
Default
0
0.0.0.0
1720
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-24 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
Daylight Savings
Mode
Time for Daylight
Savings
Start of Month (Summer Time)
Start of Week
Start of Week Day
End of Month
End of Week
End of Week Day
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
00:00 ~ 23:59
1 ~ 12
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
0 = Last Week of Month
0 ~ 5
1 ~ 7
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
1 ~ 12
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
0 = Last Week of Month
0 ~ 5
1 ~ 7
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to adjust the time for daylight savings/ standard time.
Enter the time of day when the system should adjust for daylight savings time.
Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 ~ 12).
Enter the week of the month when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time. The week will start on the day listed in 10-24-05.
Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
Enter the month when the system should adjust the time for standard time (01 ~ 12).
Enter the week of the month when the system should adjust the time for standard time.
The week will start on the Day listed in
10-24-08.
Enter the day of the week when the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
Default
1
02:00
3
2
1
11
1
1
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date
Programming Manual 2-25
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to Peer feature for
SIP MLT and SIP IP stations.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
RTP Forwarding Mode
03
04
SIP Peer to Peer Mode
DR700 Peer to Peer Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data Default
0
1
1
Conditions
• Disabling 10-26-04 results in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls using a DSP resource.
• SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in using a DSP resource.
• Disabling 10-26-03 results in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls using a DSP resource.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-26 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-27 : IP System ID
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 10-27 : IP System ID to set the IP address of the networked IP systems.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
IP Address
Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
02
Call Procedure Port
1 ~ 65535
Description
System ID is related with the System ID in the Numbering Plan (Program 11-01-03).
When the digits are analyzed and the system ID is determined from the System data set in the Numbering Plan, the networking call is sent to the IP Address set in this
Program.
The IP Address should be the IP Address of the peer CPU (Program 10-12-01).
The Port Number should be set with the same value as the H.225 setup port in Program 84-02-33.
Default
0.0.0.0
1730
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-27
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Input Data Description
Domain Name
Host Name
Transport Protocol
Up to 64 Characters
(ex. : UserID@Host-
Name.DomainName)
Up to 48 Characters
(ex. : UserID@Host-
Name.DomainName)
0 = UDP
1 = TCP
Set the domain name of the SIP-URL.
Set the host name of the SIP-URL.
Set the protocol for the connection.
UserID
Up to 32 Characters
When assigning the
User ID, the ID may contain only alpha characters. (A space and/or special characters are not allowed in the User
ID field).
(ex. : UserID@Host-
Name.DomainName)
Domain Assignment
0 = IP Address
1 = Domain Name
IP Trunk Port Binding 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
User ID in the SIP Invite Setup message.
Use it for outbound caller ID information if no information is assigned in commands
21-17, 21-19, 15-16, 14-12 and 10-36. A call cannot be completed across the span if there is no outbound CID info. The reason for this is: the from and display portion of the invite message would be blank, and it would not know where the call originated from.
If the information from Telco was a domain name ([email protected]) then set to domain. If the information for Telco was a IP address then set to IP Address.
Trunk port binding is only used for SIP trunks to the provider in Non-Registration
Mode only. When this is disabled, an inbound call comes in and follows your DID routing but it comes in on the first available trunk. When enabled, the inbound call comes in and follows your normal DID routing but maps to that specified trunk. If that trunk is busy, it sends back a busy unless you build a hunt group. To build the hunt group, it references command
14-12-02 (pilot register ID). This then points you to command 10-36-02. All the numbers with the same pilot are in the same hunt group.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
0
No Setting
0
0
Conditions
None
2-28 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-29
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for outbound/ inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode.
If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or not used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if 10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the system still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
10
11
07
08
04
05
06
09
Item
Default Proxy (Outbound)
Default Proxy (Inbound)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
Default Proxy IP Address
Default Proxy Port
Number
Registrar Mode
Registrar Port Number
DNS Server Mode
0 ~ 65535
0 = None
1 = Manual
Registrar IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0 ~ 65535
0 = Off
1 = On
DNS Server IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
DNS Port Number
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0 ~ 65535
Registrar Domain
Name
Up to 128 Characters
Description
This sets whether the SIP message is always sent through the Default Proxy.
Need to be registered in registration mode.
This sets whether the SIP message is always received through the Default Proxy.
This is optional and used if the provider gives you a proxy address that is different than the registration address. If the provider is using domain names instead of IP addresses, leave this at default.
The port number of the Default Proxy is set.
The mode registered in the registration server is set.
IP address of the SIP registration server is set.
The port number of the SIP registration server is set.
This setting determines if the DNS server is used.
If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets the IP address of the DNS server.
If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets the port number of the DNS server.
This sets the domain name of the registration server.
Default
0
0
0.0.0.0
5060
0
0.0.0.0
5060
0
0.0.0.0
53
No Setting
2-30 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
Item
Domain Name
Proxy Host Name
SIP Carrier Choice
(V1.5 Changed)
Registration Expiry
(Expire) Time
Register Sub Mode
DNS Source Port
Input Data Description
Up to 64 Characters
Up to 48 Characters
0 ~ 26
1 = Carrier A
2 = Carrier B
:
7 = Carrier G
8 = Carrier H
:
26 = Carrier Z
120 ~ 65535 seconds
This specifies the domain name of the SIP server.
This specifies the host name of the SIP server.
This selects the carrier type of the SIP server.
When Carrier A, B, or C is selected in
PRG10-29-14, PRG10-29-16 Register Sub
Mode is set "On" automatically.
0 = Off (Allow invalid Invite message)
1 = On (Deny invalid Invite message)
0 ~ 65535
This sets the expiration time when the SIP trunk registers to the Sip server. When half the time set here passes, the registration update is automatically done.
Prevents an invalid Invite message. If the
"register information that system send to
SIP server" and the "Invite information that system receive" are different, system sends "404 Not Found" message. If
PRG10-29-05 Register Mode is 0; Off, it is necessary to set 0; Off in PRG10-29-16.
(10-29-08 must be On)
This sets the DNS source port number.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
0
3600
0
53
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-31
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the authentication options for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
03
04
Item
User Name
Password
Authentication Trial
Input Data
Up to 64 Characters
Up to 32 Characters
0 ~ 9
Description
This sets the user name of the SIP trunk.
This sets the SIP trunk password.
This is how many times it will try an authenticate before timing out and not registering.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-32 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry count of the AspireNet networking keep alive message. The keep alive is used for ISDN and IP networking.
The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination system, if the response is not received the retry count will start. If a response is not received within the number of retries, the networking link will be taken out of service.
When the link is taken out of service:
• Any calls that are in progress will be released.
• Park Hold orbits will be released.
• No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active.
The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is received.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Keep Alive Interval
Input Data
0 ~ 65535 seconds
02
Keep Alive Retry Timer
1 ~ 255
Description
This program is used to set the interval of the Keep Alive timer.
The system does not send Keep Alive when this item is set to 0.
Set how many times the system resends
Keep Alive.
Default
0
5
Program
10
Conditions
• The Keep Alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count, for the link to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold ordits to be released.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-33
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the registrar/proxy options for SIP extensions.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Registration Expire
Time
Input Data
60 ~ 65535
02
Authentication Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
03
04
Registrar/Proxy Domain Name
Registrar/Proxy Host
Name
Up to 64 Characters
Up to 48 Characters
Description
After this time expires, the UA’s are forced to reregister with the CPU. This allows the
CPU to keep a current location of the entire end UA’s.
Check here if a password is desired for the
IP SIP phones to register. When checked,
15-05-16 must have a password entered and also the SIP phone must have the same password. When using Authentication, the station number is the authorization name.
Set the domain name of the SIP proxy.
Set the domain name of the SIP proxy.
Default
3600
0
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-34 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration information.
Input Data
Register ID
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data
Registration
User ID
Authentication User
ID
Authentication Password
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Up to 32 Characters
Up to 64 Characters
Up to 32 Characters
1 ~ 31
Description
This setting determines if the SIP trunk information is registered.
This sets the SIP trunk User ID.
This sets the SIP trunk Authentication
User ID.
This sets the SIP trunk authentication password.
Default
0
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-35
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
UPnP Mode
02
Retry Time
Input Data Description
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0, 60 ~ 3600
(1 ~ 59 cannot be input)
Router must support UPnP.
Set interval time to re-check the Router for the WAN IP address.
When this set as 0 it will not retry.
Default
0
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-36 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Fractional
Input Data Description
0 = Disable (when disabled the system will assign the PRI as a full PRI trunks.)
1 = Enable (when enabled the system will not assign any trunks to the
PRI, the trunks must be manually configured.)
This program is used to enable/disable the system's ability to use a fractional PRI or
T1.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-37
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP trunks and assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled.
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
01
Item
IP Trunk Availability
02
Number of Ports
0
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 32 (Port)
SIP trunks are assigned in increments of two.
Please note that if odd port number is set it will use 1 extra port. (V2.0 Changed)
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-38 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Number of Loop Back Ports
Logical Trunk Port Number
03
04
05
06
07
Logical Station Port Number
Layer 3 Timer Type
Calling Party Number
S-point DDI digits
Call Busy Mode for S-point
Input Data
0 ~ 30 (0 = No Setting)
Read Only:
1 ~ 84
Read Only:
1 ~ 84
1 ~ 5
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 ~ 4
0 = Alerting Message
1 = Disconnect Message
Default
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-39
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
Level:
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table.
Input Data
Routing Table Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Network Address
02
Subnet Mask
03
Default Gateway
001 ~ 100
Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 |
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 | 254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0 | 255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 | 255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0 | 255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 | 255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0 | 255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 | 255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 | 255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 | 255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 | 255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Default
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
2-40 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup to set up the information of DR700 Server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Item Input Data Description
Register Mode
Server Name
Register Port
0 = Normal
1 = Auto
2 = Manual
Encryption Mode 0 = Off
1 = On
Encryption Type
Read Only:
0 = Mode 1
One Time Password
Start Port
Up to 10 characters (0
~ 9, * , #)
1 ~ 84
Multicast IP Address
224.0.0.0 ~
239.255.255.255
Multicast Port
Up to 32 characters
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
Normal:
When the phone boots up, it reports the ext. assigned in the phone or chooses the next available extension in the system. Password is not required.
Auto:
If set to Auto, the SIP user name and password must be entered on the actual IP phone. These settings must match 84-22/15-05-27, or the phone does not come on-line.
Manual:
When the phone boots up, it prompts user to enter a user ID and password before logging in. It checks this user ID/password against 84-22/15-05-27. If there is no match, the phone does not come online.
Assign the Server name to be used in the SIP URL.
Assign the port number in which the
SIP messages are sent to on the
VoIPDB.
This same port number must be assigned in the SIP Multiline terminals.
If this command is changed, it requires a CPU reset.
This sets the Multicast IP address so that two or more main devices don’t overlap on the same network, or if Multicast is used by other IP services.
Default
0 sipphd
5080
0
0
No Setting
1
224.0.0.10
30000
Related
Program
10-46-07
10-46-01
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-41
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
13
14
Item
Subscribe Session Port
NAT Mode
Input Data
0 ~ 65535
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
When the system controls the SIP multiline terminal via the NAT router, this system data is set to On.
Default
5081
0
Related
Program
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-42 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the information of
Terminal License Server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Register Port of TCP
I/F
0 ~ 65535
TCP Keep Alive Time
1~255 seconds
Description
This set the register port number of TCP
I/F.
This set the TCP keep alive time.
Default
6080
5
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-43
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-48 : License Activation
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Software Key Code
Activation Code
Feature Code
Input Data
20-digit character
8-digit hexadecimal number
7-digit number
Default
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
The Key Operation for input item 03 is as follows;
Hold Key
Soft Key2 (Back)
Soft Key3 (Submit)
Edit next feature code
• Up to 10 feature code is possible to input at once.
• Register the license when 10th feature code is edited.
Edit previous feature code
Register the license
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-44 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-49 : License File Activation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via CF
Card which is issued from the license server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Save License File on CF Card
Input Data
Dial 1 + Hold (Press Hold to cancel.)
Default
-
Program
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-45
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-50 : License Information
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system.
Input Data
Feature Code Number
Item
No.
01
License Name
Item
02
03
04
License Quantity
Campaign License Quantity
Campaign License Remaining
Days
Read Only:
Character
Read Only:
0 ~ 32767
Read Only:
0 ~ 32767
Read Only:
0 ~ 9999
Input Data
000 ~ 9999
Default
-
-
-
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-46 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of PRI
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of PRI to select whether the unit works as PRI or T1.
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
01
Item
PRI/T1 Selection
Input Data
0 = PRI
1 = T1
01 ~ 12 (V1.5 Changed)
Description
Chose whether the unit works as PRI or
T1.
Default
0 = PRI
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-47
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free of charge/Demo license.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Remaining days of Free/Demo License
Read Only:
0 ~ 9999
Input Data Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-48 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package to set the license information for each unit.
Input Data
Slot Number
License Index Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item
License Code
License Quantity
0000 ~ 9999
0 ~ 255
Input Data
0 ~ 9
1 ~ 32
Default
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-49
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-58 : Network Address
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-58 : Network Address to set the local network address when the SIP multiline terminal connects the system via a local router.
Input Data
Area Table
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data Description
Network Address 0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254 |
128.0.0.1
~191.255.255.254 |
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Subnet Mask
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 |
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254
Sets local network address.
Sets local subnet mask.
1 ~ 8
Default
0.0.0.0
Related
Program
10-46-14
0.0.0.0
10-46-14
Conditions
None
2-50 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-51
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-60 : Audio Port Setup
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-60 : Audio Port Setup to defines which audio port on the 084M packages are used for BGM/External MOH.
Input Data
Audio Port Number
Item
No.
01
Slot No.
Item Input Data
0 = No Used
1 = 1st KSU
4 = 2nd KSU
7 = 3rd KSU
1 = BGM
2 = External MOH
Description Default
Select which audio port on the 084M packages are used for BGM/External MOH.
Audio Port Number 1 = BGM
Audio Port Number 2 = External MOH
Audio Port1
(BGM) : 0 (V1.5
Changed)
Audio Port2 (External MOH) : 1
(V1.5 Changed)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-52 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-61 : Relay Port Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-61 : Relay Port Setup to defines the relay port type on the 084M.
Input Data
Relay Port No.
Item
No.
01
Relay Type
Item
02
Destination Selection
1 ~ 6
Input Data
0 = No Setting
1 = External MOH
2 = BGM resource
3 = External Speaker
4 = Door Phone
10-61-01 = 1 or 2 : Not Use
10-61-01 = 3 : 1 ~ 3 External Speaker Message
No.
10-61-01 = 4 : 1 ~ 6 Door Phone No.
Default
0
0 (Not Used)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-53
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-62 : NetBIOS Setting
Level:
IN
Program
10
Description
Use 10-62 : NetBIOS Setting to set the data of NetBIOS.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
NetBIOS Mode
02
NetBIOS Name
Input Data
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Maximum 15 characters
Description
Please avoid using Space between the words. Also when you create name please use all upper letters.
Default
1
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-54 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-63 : DHCP Client Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use 10-63 : DHCP Client Setting to set the data of DHCP Client.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
DHCP Client Mode
Input Data
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Description
If you are using IP phones/trunks it is recommended to not use the DHCP client function, a static IP address would be preferred. If you are going to still use the
DHCP client function then the DHCP server should be setup so that the same IP address is always provided to the system.
When changing this program a system reset is required.
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual 2-55
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Level:
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.
Caution!
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the chart for
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-57
to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your system data.
Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:
Step 1 : Enter the digit (s) you want to change
You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the
Numbering Default Settings on page 2-57
, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes.
• Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step
3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected are 600 ~ 699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected are 6000 ~
6999.)
• Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program, only
*
and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undefined.
Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (Program 11-20) to define the codes.
Step 2 : Specify the length of the code you want to change
After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the
code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-1 System Numbering Default
.
Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected
After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type column in the
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-57
. The choices are:
Dial Types Dial Type Description
0
--- Not Used ---
Related Program Note
2-56 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Dial Types Dial Type Description
1
2
5
6
3
4
8
9
Related Program
Service Code
Extension Number
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) on page 2-68
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) on page 2-71
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) on page 2-75
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) on page 2-81
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup on page 2-85
11-02 : Extension Numbering on page 2-63
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering on page 2-64
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers on page 2-65
Trunk Access Code
11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
Special Trunk Access 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code
Operator Access
F-Route Access
20-17 : Operator Extension on page 2-195
44-xx
Networking Access
(Network ID : 0 ~ 4)
Dial Extension Analyze
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table on page 2-88
Note
(V1.5 Added)
Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates.
Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100 ~ 399. To make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10
~ 11-16.)
Default
See the following tables for default settings.
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings
Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Number of Digits Required
Default New Default
Dial Type
New
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
1X
11
12
13
1 *
1#
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-57
ISSUE 3.01
Program
11
SL1100
2-58
30
3 *
3#
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
5 *
5#
6 *
6#
Programming Manual 2-59
SL1100
Program
11
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program
11
8 *
8#
2-60
9 *
9#
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Dial Type
00
0
*
0#
* X
* 1
* 2
* 3
*
4
*
5
* 6
* 7
* 8
* 9
* 0
**
* #
#6
#7
#8
#9
#X
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
07
08
09
#0
#
*
##
Number of Digits Required
Default
0
New
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
Default
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
New
Program
11
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-61
Program
11
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Flexible System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
2-62 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number.
Input Data
Extension Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
001 ~ 100 (V2.0 Changed)
Description Default
Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones, single line telephones and IP telephones.
Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, and
11-07.
Extension Port
Number : Extension Number
001 ~ 084 : 101
~ 184
Program
11
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Calling
• Flexible System Numbering
• Intercom
Programming Manual 2-63
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.
Input Data
Virtual Extension Numbers
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
001 ~ 050
Description Default
Set up Virtual Extension numbers.
The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02 and 11-07.
Virtual Port Number : Extension
Number
1 ~ 50 : No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Flexible System Numbering
2-64 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each
Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department
Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Extension Group
Pilot Number
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
01 ~ 32
Description
Use this program to assign department group pilot numbers.
The number set up by Program
11-02 (Extension Numbering) cannot be used.
The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02 and
11-07.
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
• 16-01 :
Department
(Extension)
Group
Basic
Data
Setup
• 16-02 :
Department
Group
Assignment for
Extensions
• 16-03 :
Secondary Department
Group
Program
11
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Calling
• Department Step Calling
Programming Manual 2-65
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level:
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code. The trunk access code can be set from 1 ~ 4 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). The Individual Trunk
Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.
Caution!
The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type ( ) with the Number of Digits Required set to ( ). If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Access
Code
Input Data Description
Dial (Up to four digits) Use this program to assign the trunk access code. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic
Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
Default
9
Related
Program
• 11-01 :
System
Numbering
• 14-01 ~
07 : Basic
Trunk
Data
Setup
• 14-05 :
Trunk
Group
• 14-06 :
Trunk
Group
Routing
• 21-02 :
Trunk
Group
Routing for Extensions
2-66 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
02
Item Input Data Description
2nd Trunk Route
Access Code
Dial (Up to four digits) Use this program to define additional trunk access codes.
When a user dials the Alternate
Trunk Route Access Code, the system routes their call to the Alternate
Trunk Route.
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
• 11-01 :
System
Numbering
• 14-01 ~
07: Basic
Trunk
Data
Setup
• 14-05 :
Trunk
Group
• 14-06 :
Trunk
Group
Routing
• 21-02 :
Trunk
Group
Routing for Extensions
• 21-15 :
Individual Trunk
Group
Routing for Extensions
Program
11
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
• Central Office Calls, Placing
• Trunk Group Routing
Programming Manual 2-67
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service
Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11
~ 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 50).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, dialing item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
Item Input Data
Night Mode
Switching
Setting the System Time
Storing Common
Speed Dialing
Numbers
Storing Group
Speed Dialing
Numbers
Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk
Line
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
*
, # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
Canceling the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Charging Cost
Display by the
Supervisor
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Entry Credit for
Toll Restriction
Night Mode
Switching for
Other Group
0~9,
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Default
718
728
753
Related
Program
12-xx
20-07-01
754
733
734
735
No Setting
24-04-01
24-04-01
24-04-01
No Setting
618 12-xx
20-07-01
2-68 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
16
17
18
20
Item Input Data
Leaving Message
Waiting (Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel/Motel)
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Dial Block by Supervisor
Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door
Box
VRS - Record/
Erase Message
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
32
33
34
35
41
42
43
44
Description
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
VRS - General
Message Playback
VRS - Record or
Erase General
Message
SMDR - Extension Accumulated Printout
Code
SMDR - Group
Accumulated
Printout Code
Account Code
Accumulated
Printout Code
Forced Trunk
Disconnect
Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing
Calls
Set Private Call
Refuse
Entry Caller ID
Refuse
Set Caller ID Refuse
Dial-In Mode
Switching
Date Setting
Maintenance
Service
VRS Incoming
Cutting the telephone power
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Define Service Code for VRS message recording or erasing.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Sets the Service Code for power cutting. (for Administrator)
PRG11-10-44 Input dial is Max 8 digits.
Default
626
601
722
616
611
612
621
622
623
No Setting
645
20-07-11
20-07-12
646
647
748
609
789
643
778
731
Related
Program
11-11-09
90-19
13-05
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
14-01-27
20-07-24
20-07-25
14-01-27
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-30
13-04
15-02-55
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-69
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
11
Item
No.
45
Item
Room Monitor
Permit
46
47
48
49
50
Watch Message
Setting
Warning Message Setting
Auto Dial Setting for Security Sensor
Auto Dial Setting for Remote Inspection
Night-mode Skip
(Own Group)
0~9,
8 digit
Input Data
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Sets Service Code (SC) for Room monitor on/off to terminal.
SC+1+Extension Number ; Room
Monitor enable
SC+0+Extension Number ; Room
Monitor disable
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code setting for Watching message recording to VRS.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code setting for Warning message recording to VRS.
Terminal: MLT
Service Code setting for destination number when Warning mode detected.
Terminal: MLT
Service Code setting for destination number when remote inspection detects no answer.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Default
610
Related
Program
614
615
617
619
787
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-70 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service
Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.
The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 72).
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, users to turn on or turn off Background Music by dialing the number set at item 18.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Item Input Data
Call Forward - All 0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Call Forward -
Busy
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Call Forward - No
Answer
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Call Forward -
Busy/No Answer
Call Forward -
Both Ring
Call Forwarding -
Follow-Me
Do Not Disturb
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
*
, # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
Answer Message
Waiting
Cancel All Messages Waiting
Cancel Message
Waiting
Alarm Clock
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal
Text Message
Setting
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT No Setting
746
747
* 0
773
771
727
678
Default
741
742
743
744
745
Related
Program
11-10-16
20-01-06
15-02
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-71
Program
11
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
Item Input Data Description Default
Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls
Force Ringing of
Incoming Intercom Calls
Programmable
Function Key
Programming (3-
Digit Service Codes)
BGM On/Off
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Key Touch Tone
On/Off
Change Incoming CO and ICM
Ring Tones
Check Incoming
Ring Tones
Extension Name
Programming
Second Call for
DID/DISA/DIL
Change Station
Class of Service
0~9,
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
*
, # Maximum of
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Automatic Transfer Setup for
Each Extension
Group
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Destination of
Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Delayed Transfer
Cancellation for
Each Extension
Group
DND Setup for
Each Extension
Group
DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group
Dial Block
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
Temporary Toll
Restriction Override
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT
Allows an extension user to change the COS of another extension. Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
721
723
751
No Setting (V1.5
Changed)
724
720
711
700
679
677
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
600
775
Related
Program
20-09-05
20-02-12
20-09-05
20-02-12
15-07
11-11-38
15-02
15-01
20-13-28
20-11-17
24-05
20-11-17
24-05
20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08
20-11-17
21-07
2-72 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Item Input Data
Pilot Group Withdrawing
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Toll Restriction
Override
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Ring Volume Set
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Programmable
Function Key
Programming (2-
Digit Service Codes)
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Station Speed Dial Number Entry
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Tandem Ringing
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Transfer Dial Setting for Out of
Range
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Headset Mode
Switching
Set/Cancel Call
Forward All
(Split)
0~9,
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Busy
(Split)
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Set/Cancel Call
Forward No Answer (Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Busy No
Answer (Split)
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Both
Ring (Split)
Set Message
Waiting Indication
Cancel Message
Waiting Indication
Set/Cancel Call
Forward All Destination (No
Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Busy
Destination (No
Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward No Answer Destination
(No Split)
Call Forward
Busy No Answer
Destination (No
Split)
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
*
, # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
-
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Programming Manual
791
792
793
SL1100
Default
650
663
729
752
Related
Program
21-14
15-07
11-11-17
24-09
24-09
24-09
24-09
15-07
30-03
13-06
24-09
24-09
683
684
685
686
755
No Setting
689
688
682
No Setting
No Setting
790
Program
11
24-09
24-09
24-09
2-73
SL1100
Item
No.
58
59
60
62
Item Input Data
Call Forward with Personal
Greeting
Call Forward to
Attendant except
Busy
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
Call Forward to
Attendant/No Answer
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Adjust of Headset Ring Volume
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Program
11
65
68
69
70
71
72
73
Headset Mode
Switching
IntraMail Language Selection for own extension
IntraMail Language Selection for specific extension
Backlight Brightness
Auto Backlight
Headset V.Announce
Select Incoming
Ring Tones at
trunk (V1.5 Added)
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT,SLT
Terminal: MLT,SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
ISSUE 3.01
Default
713
Related
Program
696 15-01-08
697 15-01-09
No Setting
No Setting
664
11-11-37
15-02-12
15-02-41
15-02-42
47-02-16
665
705
706
714
761
20-13-53
47-02-16
15-02-61 ~
15-02-63
15-02-64
15-02-65
15-28-01
2-74 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10,
11-11, and 11-14 through 11-16.
The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 64).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, dialing (Item 05) cancels a previously set Camp- On.
• Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Item Input Data Description
Bypass Call
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Override. This code is available only if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Conference
Override (Off-
Hook Signaling)
Set Camp-On
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
*
, # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Cancel Camp-On 0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Switching of
Voice Call and
Signal Call
Step Call
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Barge-In
Change to STG
(Department
Group) All Ring
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Station Speed Dialing
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Assign the service code used for accessing common speed dialing (system speed dialing) bins.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in
PRG.
Default
707
#1
709
750
770
712
708
710
No Setting
#2
Related
Program
16-02
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-75
Program
11
SL1100
Item
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Item Input Data
Group Speed Dialing
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Last Number Dial 0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Saved Number
Dial
Trunk Group Access
Specified Trunk
Access
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Trunk Access via
Networking (V1.5
Added)
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Clear Last Number Dialing Data
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Clear Saved
Number Dialing
Data
Internal Group
Paging
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
External Paging
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging
Group
Meet-Me Answer to External Paging
Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging
Group
Combined Paging
Direct Call Pickup - Own Group
Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Call Pickup
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Call Pickup for
Another Group
Direct Extension
Call Pickup
Specified Trunk
Answer
Park Hold
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Answer for Park
Hold
Group Hold
Answer for
Group Hold
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
2-76
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Program 11 : System Numbering
765
763
* 6
732
762
**
672
#6
* 1
756
768
* #
769
31-02-01
31-02-01
31-07
23-02
23-02
23-02
24-03
24-03
ISSUE 3.01
776
785
701
703
764
Default
704
#9
726
#4
#5
715
Related
Program
31-01-01
31-02-01
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
53
54
56
57
58
59
62
Item Input Data Description
Station Park
Hold
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Door Box Access 0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Common Canceling Service Code
General Purpose
Indication
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Station Speed Dialing
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Voice Over
Flash on Trunk lines
Answer No-Ring
Line (Universal
Answer)
Callback Test for
SLT
Enabled On
Hook When
Holding (SLT)
Answer On Hook
When Holding
(SLT)
Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer
Account Code
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
* , # Maximum of
VM Access
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Live Recording at SLT
VRS Routing for
ANI/DNIS
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
E911 Alarm Shut
Off
Tandem Trunking
Transfer Into
Conference
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: SLT
Splitting (switching) between calls
Terminal: SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Use when setting up ANI/DNIS
Routing to the VRS Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.
Terminal: MLT
Enter the Service Code that an extension user can dial to shut off the
E911 Alarm Ring.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Assign the Service Code a user dials to Transfer a call to a Conference call.
Terminal: SLT
Trunk Drop Operation for SLT
Security Sensor
Reset
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code setting for cancel
Warning message sending and emergency call.
Default
757
702
* 9
783
#7
690
#3
#0
799
749
Related
Program
15-07-56
15-07-57
11-16-08
14-05
14-06
15-03-07
759
794
##
*
8
654
782
786
#8
624
660
716
15-03-08
11-12-03
21-01-13
21-01-14
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-77
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
63
Item
Watch Mode
Start
64
Security Sensor
Mode Start
0~9,
8 digit
Input Data
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
Description
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code (SC) setting for on/off watch mode.
SC+1;Watch mode start
SC+0; Watch mode end.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code (SC) setting for on/off security sensor.
SC+1; Start sensor detection
SC+0; Ignore sensor detection
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Program
11
Conditions
None
Default
717
Related
Program
719
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-78 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 06).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Input Data Description
ACD Log In/Log Out
(for KTS)
ACD Log Out (for
SLT)
Set ACD Wrap-Up
Time (for SLT)
Cancel ACD Wrap-Up
Time (for SLT)
Set ACD Off Duty (for
SLT)
Cancel ACD Off Duty
(for SLT)
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, digit
* , # Maximum of 8
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
Assign the service code used to Login
(MLT/SLT) and Logout (MLT/SLT) ACD
Agents.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG.
Assign the service code used to Logout
SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG.
Assign the service code used to set Wrap-
Up on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG.
Assign the service code used to cancel
Wrap-Up on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG.
Assign the service code used to set Off
Duty on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG.
Assign the service code used to cancel Off
Duty on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within your valid numbering plan in PRG.
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Default
* 5
655
656
657
658
659
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-79
Program
11
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ISSUE 3.01
2-80 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~
11-12, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02.
The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 19).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
Set DND for Own Extension
Cancel DND for Own
Extension
Set DND for Other Extension
Cancel DND for Other
Extension
Set Wake Up Call for
Own Extension
Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension
Set Wake Up Call for
Other Extension
Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, digit
*
, # Maximum of 8
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set DND for own extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel DND for own extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set DND for another extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel DND for another extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set wake up call for own extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel wake up call for own extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to set wake up call for another extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel wake up call for another extension.
Default
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
Programming Manual 2-81
Program
11
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
11
Item
No.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
Item Input Data Description
Set Room to Room
Call Restriction
Cancel Room to
Room Call Restriction
(Hotel)
Change Toll Restriction Class for Other
Extension
Check-In
Check-Out
Room Status Change for Own Extension
Room Status Change for Other Extension
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
Room Status Output
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
Hotel Room Monitor
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
Hotel Room Data Set
0~9, * , # Maximum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to Set Room to
Room Call Restriction.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to cancel Room to
Room Call Restriction.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to change the toll restriction class for another extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to check-in another extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to check-out another extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to change room status on their extension.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to change room status on another extension.
Terminal: MLT
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to output the status of hotel rooms via a printer.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Determine what the service code should be for initiating Hotel Room Monitor.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Default
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
675
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Hotel/Motel
2-82 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special
Access)
Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.
The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 14).
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
• The default entry.
• Programs that may be affected when changing the code.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
05
09
12
13
14
Item Input Data
Remote Maintenance
ACD Access in
Dialin Conver-
sion Table (V1.5
Added)
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9,
8 digit
*
, # Maximum of
System Programming Mode, Log-
On
0~9,
*
, # Maximum of
8 digit
Transfer to Incoming Ring
Group
Extension Data
Swap
0~9,
8 digit
* , # Maximum of
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Remote Access from DISA
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
Modem Access
0~9, * , # Maximum of
8 digit
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Description
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT
Default
730
760
Related
Program
22-04
22-11
#
*
#
*
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
740
11-01
92-04
22-02
Program
11
Programming Manual 2-83
Program
11
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-84 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15.
The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 11).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (Item 03) when calling an extension switches the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently defined).
• Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.
Input Data
07
08
09
10
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
11
Item Input Data
Step Call
Barge-In
Voice Over
Access to Voice Mail
(Department) STG All Ring
Mode
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
Switching of Voice/Signal
Call
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
Camp-On
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
Message Waiting
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
Station Park Hold
0~9, * , # Maximum of 1 digit
Default
2
No Setting
1
*
#
No Setting
0
6
8
No Setting
No Setting
Related
Program
16-01-05
Program
11
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-85
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each ACD
Group. This is the number a user dials to transfer calls to the ACD Group. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers for the master number. If you want to use an extension number which, by default, has a port number assigned, first remove the default assignment.
Input Data
ACD Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
ACD Group Pilot
Number
Input Data
01 ~ 02
Description
Dial (Up to eight digits) Assign the ACD Master Number for each
ACD Group.
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2-86 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot number to be used for the Remote Conference. This is the number that outside parties will call in order to connect to a conference.
Input Data
Conference Group Number 1 ~ 4
Item
No.
01
Item
Remote Conference Group
Pilot Number
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Input Data
See
No Remote Conference Pilot Numbers assigned to any Conference Group (1 ~ 4).
Default Related
Program
20-13-46
20-34
Program
11
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Conference, Remote
Programming Manual 2-87
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level:
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more digits. This program is relevant only if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9 (Dial Extension Analyze).
Input Data
Dial Extension Analyze Table
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Dial Extension Analyze Table Dial (Up to eight digits : 0, 1 ~ 9, #,
*
, @)
Dial Extension Analyze Table Type of Dials :
0 = Not used
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access
001 ~ 128
Default
No Setting
0
Related
Program
11-01
11-01
Conditions
• When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type, the lower table has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used to determine the dial type.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-88 Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data Description
Manual Night
Mode Switching
Automatic Night
Mode Switching
0 = Off (Manual Night
Mode changes are not allowed.)
1 = On (Manual Night
Mode changes are allowed.)
0 = Off (Automatic
Night Mode disabled)
1 = On (Automatic
Night Mode enabled)
Allow/Prevent a activating Night
Service by dialing a service code.
According to a preset schedule, enable or disable Automatic Night
Service for the system.
Default
1
0
Related
Program
11-10-01
12-02
12-03
Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the schedule set up.
Conditions
None
Program
12
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
Programming Manual 2-89
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level:
SA
Program
12
Description
Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic
Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and
12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer Settings.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
Time Pattern Number
Set Time Number
01 ~ 04
01 ~ 10
01 ~ 20
Item
No.
01
02
03
Start Time
End Time
Operation Mode
Item Input Data
0000 ~ 2359
0000 ~ 2359
1 ~ 8 = Night Modes 1 ~ 8
Example :
Time Pattern 1
0 :0 0
M o d e 3
(m id n ig h t)
9 :0 0
M o d e 1
(d a y)
1 2 :0 0
M o d e 4
(re st)
1 3 :0 0
M o d e 1
(d a y)
1 7 :0 0
M o d e 4
(re st)
1 8 :0 0
M o d e 2
(n ig h t)
2 2 :0 0
M o d e 3
(m id n ig h t)
0 :0 0
To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:
Time setting 01 :
Time setting 02 :
Time setting 03 :
Time setting 04 :
Time setting 05 :
Time setting 06 :
Time setting 07 :
00 : 00 to 09 : 00
09 : 00 to 12 : 00
12 : 00 to 13 : 00
13 : 00 to 17 : 00
17 : 00 to 18 : 00
18 : 00 to 22 : 00
22 : 00 to 00 : 00
Mode 3 (midnight)
Mode 1 (day)
Mode 4 (rest)
Mode 1 (day)
Mode 4 (rest)
Mode 2 (night)
Mode 3 (midnight)
Time Pattern 2
00 : 00
Mode 2
(night)
00 : 00
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
2-90 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Time setting 01 :
Default
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number
01
02
03
04
:
20
Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number
01
02
:
20
Time Pattern 3 ~ 10
Set Time Number
01
:
20
Conditions
None
00 : 00 to 00 : 00
Start Time
0000
0800
1700
0000
:
0000
Start Time
0000
0000
:
0000
Start Time
0000
:
0000
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
Mode 2 (night)
End Time
0800
1700
0000
0000
:
0000
End Time
0000
0000
:
0000
End Time
0000
:
0000
Mode
2
1
:
1
2
1
Mode
2
1
:
1
Mode
1
:
1
Program
12
Programming Manual 2-91
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level:
SA
Program
12
Description
Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch settings. 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
Item No.
01
Day of the Week
Item
01 ~ 04
Default
Refer below 01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
04 = Wednesday
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
Input Data
0 ~ 10
Time Schedule Pattern Number
Default
01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
04 = Wednesday
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
Day of the Week Time Schedule Pattern Number
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
2-92 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday nightswitch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is expected to be closed, such as a national holiday.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
Item No.
01
Item
Days and Months
Time Pattern Number
Input Data
0101 ~ 1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1, 1231 = Dec. 31)
0 ~ 10
(0 = No Setting)
01 ~ 04
Default
No Setting
Program
12
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
Programming Manual 2-93
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Program
12
Description
Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day/Night Mode
Group for each extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 1 = Night Mode Group 1
2 = Night Mode Group 2
3 = Night Mode Group 3
4 = Night Mode Group 4
Up to eight digits
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
2-94 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode
Group for each trunk port.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 1 = Night Mode Group 1
2 = Night Mode Group 2
3 = Night Mode Group 3
4 = Night Mode Group 4
001 ~ 084
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
Program
12
Programming Manual 2-95
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level:
IN
Program
12
Description
Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04
1 ~ 8 Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Text Message
Input Data Description Default
Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric)
Assign the data that will be displayed on the phones display when the system enters one of the eight different night modes.
Only phones that have manual night mode switching enabled in class of service (PRG
20-07-01) will display the text.
Mode 1 = No
Setting
Mode 2 =
<Night>
Mode 3 = <Midnight>
Mode 4 = <Rest>
Mode 5 =
<Day2>
Mode 6 =
<Night2>
Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
Mode 8 =
<Rest2>
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
2-96 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each
Day/Night Mode.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04
Item
No.
01
Range
Item
2 ~ 8
Input Data Description
When a Night Mode Key (PRG 15-07 key
09) is assigned as a toggle key (PRG
20-01-17), this data determines how many night modes a user toggles through when the Night Mode key is pressed. Each press of the Night Mode key toggles to the next mode.
Default
2
Example :
When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed, the following modes are switched :
• Press once = Night
• Press twice = Mid-night
• Press third = Day
• Default = 2
Conditions
None
Program
12
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
Programming Manual 2-97
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
Level:
IN
Program
13
Description
Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Speed Dialing
Auto Outgoing
Call Mode
0 = Trunk Outgoing
Mode (Use trunk group assigned in PRG
13-05.)
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode (Follow the system routing for the trunk access code entered.)
Private Speed Dial
0 = Do not use
1 = Use
Number of Common Speed Dialing Bins
Trunk Access
Routing (V3.0
Added)
Set where the Speed Dial bins will use Trunk Routing (0) or dial the bin as though it is an Intercom number
(1).
Define use additional 20 Private speed dial bin beside 1000 Common speed dial bin or not.
0 ~ 1000
0 = No Common Speed
Dialing (No System
Speed Dial)
Assign the number of Speed Dial bins that are used for System Speed
Dials.
0 = Trunk Group
1 = Trunk Route
0 = PRG13-05 defines a trunk group in PRG14-05 to select a trunk from.
1 = PRG13-05 refers to a trunk access route in PRG14-06.
Default
0
Related
Program
13-05
1
900
0
13–06
13-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
2-98 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by each Speed Dialing group.
(Refer to
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions on page 2-100 .)
Input Data
Speed Dialing Group Number
Item No.
01
Item
Start Address of Speed Dialing Bin
End Address of Speed Dialing Bin
Input Data
0 ~ 990
0, 9 ~ 999
01 ~ 32
Default
Refer below
Default
Abbreviated dial group No.
1
:
32
Conditions
None
Start address of ABB Bin
0
:
0
End address of ABB Bin
:
0
0
Feature Cross Reference
• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Program
13
Programming Manual 2-99
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
Level:
IN
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Program
13
Description
Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing
Group for each extension. There are 32 available Speed Dialing groups.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Group Number
Up to 8 digits
Input Data Description
01 ~ 32
Assign group number for extension
Assign each extension to a speed dialing group.
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
2-100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed
Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers.
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Speed Dialing
Data
02
03
Name
Transfer Mode
Input Data Description
1 ~ 9, 0,
*
, #, Pause
(Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press line key 2),
@ = Code to wait for answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(Maximum 36 digits)
Per speed dial bin (000 ~ 999) assign the telephone number that is to be called when the bin is accessed.
If 13-01-01 is set to (0) do not include the trunk access code.
If 13-01-01 is set to (1) include the trunk access code.
Maximum 12 Characters (Use dial pad to enter name)
0 = Not Used (Calls will not be routed based off a users caller ID.)
1 = Internal Dial (Calls will be routed to an internal number specified in PRG 13-04-04.)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group (Calls will be routed to a ring group specified in PRG
13-04-04.)
3 = Remote Monitor
(Used for the security feature and not Flexible
Caller ID routing.)
Each time when this setting is changed Program 13-04-04 will be reset. (V1.5 Added)
000 ~ 999
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
No Setting
0
Program
13
Programming Manual 2-101
Program
13
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
Item Input Data Description
Transfer Destination Number
If Transfer mode is
(Refer to 13-04-03) :
1 = Internal Dial Mode
1 ~ 9, 0, * , #, P, R, @
(Maximum 36 Characters)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
0 ~ 25 (IRG Number)
P = Pause
R = Recall
@ = Additional Digits when using ISDN functionality
3 = Remote Monitor
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Incoming Ring
Pattern
VRS Message
Number
0 = Normal System
Ring Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern 1
~ 4
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern 1
~ 5
10 ~ 13 = Tone Pattern
5 ~ 8 (V3.0 Added)
0 ~ 100
This setting can be changed only when Program 13-04-03 is set other than 0. Also if the Program
13-04-03 is set to 3 only Extension number can be changed.
(V1.5 Added)
When set 1 or 2 at PRG13-04-03, this program is used to assign a ring pattern for the caller ID routed call.
Memo1 (V1.5 Deleted)
Memo2 (V1.5 Deleted)
Memo3 (V1.5 Deleted)
Maximum 28 digit
Maximum 28 digit
Maximum 28 digit
Mailbox Number
0 ~ 544
If the VRS can not be played it will use a Program 13-04-05
Ringing Pattern. (V1.5 Added)
Can only be changed in WebPro or PCPro.
Can only be changed in WebPro or PCPro.
Can only be changed in WebPro or PCPro.
This setting only works when
Program 13-04-01 Speed Dial and Incoming Trunk Call match.
(V1.5 Added)
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
13-04-03
0
0
13-04-03
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
0
15-02-58
15-02-58
15-02-58
40-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
2-102 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each
Speed Dialing number.
If this program has an entry of 0 (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is available only in External Speed
Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01).
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 ~ 999
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Trunk Group/Route Number (V3.0
Changed)
0 = Follow the caller's extension trunk group routing (PRG 21-02)
1 ~ 25 = Trunk group 1 ~ 25
Default
No Setting
Program
13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Programming Manual 2-103
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name
Level:
SB
Program
13
Description
Use Program 13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of each
Speed Dial Number.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Extension Number
Speed Dial Number
Up to 8 digits
01 ~ 20
Item Input Data
Speed Dialing Data
1 ~ 9, 0,
*
, #, Pause (Press line key 1), Recall/
Flash (Press line key 2),
@ = Code to wait for answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(Maximum 36 digits)
Name
Maximum 12 Characters
(Use dial pad to enter name)
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
2-104 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group
Name.
Input Data
Group Number
Item
No.
01
Group Name
Item Input Data
Up to 12 characters
01 ~ 32
Default
1 = ABB : GROUP01
:
32 = ABB : GROUP32
Program
13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-105
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
Trunk Name
Transmit Level
Receive Level
Transmit Gain
Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
Receive Gain
Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
SMDR Printout
Up to 12 characters
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)
Set the names for trunks. The trunk name displays on a multiline terminal for incoming and outgoing calls.
Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming.
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming.
Use this option to select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)
0 = No (trunk will not be reported in the SMDR print out.)
1 = Yes (trunk will be reported in the SMDR print out.)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.
This option can include/exclude trunks from being reported in the
SMDR printout.
If a trunk is set to No Print Out (setting data of 0) any calls made or received on this line will not be reported in the SMDR printout.
Outgoing Calls
0 = Deny (No)
1 = Allow (Yes)
Toll Restriction
0 = Restriction Disabled (Toll restriction will not be applied to calls on this trunk.)
1 = Restriction Enabled
(Toll restriction will be applied to calls on this trunk.)
Use this option to allow/prevent outgoing calls on the trunk you are programming.
Use this option to enable/disabled
Toll Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk follows Toll Restriction programming (example: Programs 21-05, 21-06). If disabled, the trunk is a toll free line.
Default
Refer below
Related
Program
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
16 (- 8 dB)
1
1
1 21-04
21-05
21-06
2-106 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
09
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Item Input Data Description
Private Line
DTMF Tones for
Outgoing Calls
Account Code
Required
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Long Conversation Cutoff
Long Conversation Alarm Before Cutoff
Forced Release of Held Call
Trunk to Trunk
Warning Tone for
Long Conversation Alarm
Warning Beep
Tone Signaling
Privacy Mode
Toggle Option
0 = Disable Private
Line (Normal)
1 = Enable Private Line
(Private Line)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disabled (user cannot enter account codes using this trunk.)
1 = Enabled (user can enter account codes using this trunk.)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls.
Per trunk enable or disable the ability to enter an account code on an inbound or outbound trunk call.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) loop supervision for the trunk. This option is required for Call
Forwarding Off-Premise and Tandem Trunking only.
Use this option to enable or disable the Long Conversation Cutoff feature for each trunk.
Use this option to enable or disable the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk.
Use this option to enable/disable forced release for calls on Hold. If enabled, the system disconnects a call if it is on Hold longer than a programmed interval (Program
24-01-05). If disabled, forced disconnection does not occur. Program
24-01-01 also affects this option.
Use this option to enable or disable the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature for DISA callers.
Block Outgoing
Caller ID
Caller ID Block
Code
Caller ID to Voice
0 = Prevent (No)
1 = Allow (Yes)
Dial (up to eight digits)
0 = Disable (Caller ID not sent to VM.)
1 = Enable (Caller ID is sent to VM.)
Use this option to enable or disable a trunk ability to be switched from private to non-private mode by pressing the line key or Privacy Release function key.
Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing
Caller ID information when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits.
Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that should be used as the Caller ID
Block Code. This code is automatically inserted before dialed digits if
Program 14-01-20 is set to 1.
Enable or disable the system ability to send the Caller ID digits (Remote
Log-On Protocol) to voice mail.
Default
0
Related
Program
*
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
67
0
20-21-03
20-21-04
20-21-01
20-21-02
24-01-01
24-01-05
14-01-21
20-08-15
14-01-20
20-08-15
Program
14
Programming Manual 2-107
Program
14
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
24
25
Item Input Data Description
Trunk-to-Trunk
Outgoing Caller
ID through Mode
Continued/
Discontinued
Trunk-to-Trunk
Conversation
0 = Disable (Caller ID not forwarded out.)
1 = Enable (Caller ID is forwarded out.)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to send the original Caller ID through when the call is Forward
Off-Premise.
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to dial a service code to continue or disconnect the Trunk-to-Trunk conversation after the alert tone is heard.
Default
0
0
Related
Program
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
24-02-11
24-02-12
30
32
33
26
27
28
36
38
39
Automatic Trunkto-Trunk Transfer Mode
0 = Normal Transfer
(Normal)
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)
Caller ID Refuse
Setup
Effectively of
"Conversation
Recording Destination for Extension"
0 = Disable (CID refuse will not function.)
1 = Enable
0 = No Effect (No)
1 = Available (Yes)
Per trunk enable or disable the ability to use the caller ID refuse feature.
Flexible Ringing by Caller ID
Anti-trombone
Function
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = No Effect (No)
1 = Available (Yes)
APSU(VM00)
Trunk Receive
Gain
Calling Party
Name notification (ISDN Trunk)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB intervals)
0 = Off (when set to Off the system will not send any outbound calling party information.)
1 = On (when set to ON the system will send calling party information.)
Additional PAD when a trunk call connects to APSU Voice Mail.
This program enables/disabled the ability to send calling party name information on a per trunk basis.
Outgoing CLI se-
lection (V3.0 Added)
0 = Contract Number
1 = Extension Number
2 = Extended Table
3 = PRG21-13
4 = PRG21-18
5 = PRG21-19
6 = No Digits
Shows what number to show.
CLI composition
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Prefer extension
1 = Combine trunk + extension
If the flag has the default value 0:
"prefer extension", the extension's
CLI is sent out, if it is not empty. If it is empty, the trunk's CLI is sent instead.
If the flag has the value 1: "combine trunk+extension", the trunk's CLI is stored in the sending buffer, padded with the extension's CLI.
0
0
1
1
0
32 (0 dB)
13-04
0
0
0
15-12
21-13-01
21-18-01
21-19-01
21-25-01
2-108 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
40
41
Item Input Data Description
ISDN Queue announcement connect mode
(V2.0 Added)
0 = send CONNECT
1 = send PROGRESS
#8
Incoming Caller
Name Usage
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Use
1 = Ignore
When a VRS queue message is to be played back (configured in PRG
22-14, PRG 22-15, PRG 41-11, or
PRG 41-19, the system shall, instead of a CONNECT message, send a PROGRESS message including a ProgressIE #8 “in-band tones and announcements available”.
This program will determines that the caller name information from the network is valid or not. If the program is set to 1, the caller name information the network provides is ignored.
Default
0
Related
Program
22-14
22-15
41-11
41-19
0
Program
14
Default
Item01 : Trunk Name
Trunk Port Number
1
2
:
84
Name
Line 001
Line 002
:
Line 84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-109
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port.
Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Input Data Description
Signaling Type
(DP/DTMF)
0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS)
2 = DTMF
Ring Detect Type 0 = Normal/delayed
1 = Immediate Ringing
This option sets the signaling type for the trunk.
This option sets Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start trunks, this option must be set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly.
Flash Type
Hooking Type
0 = Open Loop Flash
1 = Ground
0 = Timed Flash (Hooking)
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
This option selects the flash type
(open loop flash or ground). Always set this option for open loop flash.
This option lets you use Flash for
Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or
Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH key while on a trunk call.)
Dial Tone Detection for Manually
Accessed Trunks
0 = Dial Tone Detection
Not Used
1 = Dial Tone Detection
Used
Use this option enable/disable dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks. If disabled, the system outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial tone.
Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in Manual Dial
Mode
0 = No Pause (No)
1 = Pause (Yes)
Default
2
1
0
0
0
1
Related
Program
81-01-14
81-01-15
21-01-04
21-01-06
2-110 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
18
19
20
23
Item Input Data Description
DP to DTMF Conversion Options
0 = Automatic
1 = Automatic and
Manual
2 = Manual
Determine how a user can convert a
Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call.
For each trunk, set the type of DP to
DTMF conversion required. There are three conversion options: Automatic (0), Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual (2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit. In addition, the user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
Manual:
Users can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
Answering Condition
Busy Tone Detection
Caller ID
0 = Polarity Reversing
(Polarity)
1 = Polarity Reversing or Timer (Int Digit)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Off (Caller ID not displayed.)
1 = On ( Caller ID is displayed.)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable or disable a trunk ability to receive Caller ID information.
Next Trunk in
Rotary if No Dial
Tone
Detect Network
Disconnect Signal
Trunk-to-Trunk
Limitation
Busy Tone Detection on Talking
Busy Tone Detection Frequency
Busy Tone Detection Interval
Caller ID Receiving Method
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1 ~ 255
0 ~ 64800 (x 100 ms)
0 = Wait Caller ID
1 = Immediate Ring
Use this option to enable/disable the system ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Speed
Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
Rings extension before receiving
Caller ID (1) or after receiving Caller
ID (0).
Default
2
1
0
1 (V1.5
Changed)
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Related
Program
21-01-03
21-01-03
14-02-18
14-02-18
Program
14
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-111
Program
14
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-112 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is one item for each mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Type of Connection
Input Data
0 = Stand Alone (Trunk)
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
3 = CTX assume 9
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Related Program
22-02
Conditions
None
Program
14
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Manual 2-113
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group
Level:
IN
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item No.
01
Item
Trunk Group Number
Priority Number
0 ~ 25
001 ~ 084
001 ~ 084
Input Data
Default
Conditions
None
Trunk Port
:
1
084
Group
1
:
1
Priority
:
1
084
Feature Cross Reference
• Trunk Groups
2-114 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When a user dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system contains 25 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access.
There are 25 available Trunk Group Numbers.
Example for setting:
With less than four trunk groups,
Route Number 1 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2.
With more than four trunk groups,
Route Number 1
Route Number 2
: Order 1 - Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 - Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 - 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
: Order 1 - Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.
Input Data
Route Table Number
Priority Order Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Group Routing
001 ~ 025
1 ~ 4
Input Data Default
0 = Not Set
001 ~ 025 = Trunk group No.
101 ~ 104 = 100 + Networking System No. (V1.5
Added)
1001 ~ 1025 = 1000 + Route Table No.
Refer below
Related
Program
14-01-07
14-05
15-01-02
21-02
Program
14
Programming Manual 2-115
Program
14
SL1100
Default
Route No.
Route 1
Route 2
:
Route 25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Order
1
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
4
1
2
3
2
3
4
1 (Trunk group 1)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
Data
ISSUE 3.01
2-116 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 084 Access Maps with all 084 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access.
An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign Trunk
Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map.
Emergency calls will override Program 14-07 settings.
Program
14
Input Data
Access Map Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
Item
Access
Map
Input Data Description
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access only
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on
Hold
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on
Hold
6 = Incoming and Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
Trunk Port Number =
001 ~ 084
Default
Refer below
Default
Access map No.
1
2
Trunk Port No.
1
2
:
084
1
2
:
084
Default
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
Programming Manual 2-117
SL1100
Access map No.
:
084
Program
14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing
Trunk Port No.
1
2
:
084
1
2
:
084
ISSUE 3.01
Default
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
2-118 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk as COI port.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
MOH Type
Input Data
0 = Internal/External
MOH
1 = BGM Source
001 ~ 084
Description
Select whether the system will use the built in Music on Hold/External Music on
Hold or a Customer provided source connected to the BGM port.
Default
0
Program
14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Music on Hold
Programming Manual 2-119
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the Conversation
Recording destination for each trunk.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
04
Item Input Data
Recording Destination Extension Number
Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls
Automatic Recording for Outgoing Call
Maximum eight digits
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Enter the extension number where the trunk calls should be recorded.
Determine if incoming trunk calls should be automatically recorded.
Default
No Setting
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-120 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This program refers to incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call. This program is used only for H.323.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
IP Trunk ID
Item
0 ~ 65535
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
001 ~ 084
Default
0
Conditions
• This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call.
• This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call.
• It is not notified when ID is 0.
• Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
14
Programming Manual 2-121
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Register ID
Pilot Register ID
0 ~ 31
0 ~ 31
Input Data
001 ~ 084
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-122 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Extension Name
Outgoing Trunk
Line Preference
SMDR Printout
ISDN Caller ID
Up to 12 Characters
0 = Off
1 = On
Define the extension/virtual extension name.
Use this option to set the extension outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If enabled, the extension user receives trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk
Access Map programming (Programs 14-07 and 15-06). Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details.
Use this option to include or exclude the extension in the SMDR report.
0 = None (Station will not be reported in the
SMDR print out.)
1 = Yes (Station will be reported in the SMDR print out.)
0 = Disabled (CPN is
NOT sent.)
1 = Enabled (CPN is sent.)
If both Program 15-01-04 and
10-03-05 are enabled, the system includes Caller ID in the Setup message as Presentation Allowed. If these options are disabled, it is Presentation Restricted.
Enable or disable supervised dial detection for an extension.
Restriction for
Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
0 = Supervise dial detection
1 = Not supervise dial detection
Do-Not-Call
Call Attendant
Busy Message
Call Attendant
Answer Message
0 = Off
1 = On
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)
Default Related
Program
Ext. 101 ~ 184 =
No Setting
0 14-06
21-02
1
1
0
0
0
0
10-03-05
20-08-13
21-01-15
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
21-01-19
11-11-59
40-10-08
11-11-60
40-10-09
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-123
Program
15
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
10
13
14
15
Item Input Data Description
Extension Number
0 = Off (when set to Off the system will not send any outbound calling party information.)
1 = On (when set to ON the system will send calling party information.)
This program enables/disables the ability to send calling party name information on a per station basis.
When an incoming call is received from the extension defined in this
PRG this item defines the ringtone presented.
Special ringtone
choice (V2.0 Added)
0 = Incoming extension ring tone
1 = Tone pattern 1
2 = Tone pattern 2
3 = Tone pattern 3
4 = Tone pattern 4
5 = Tone pattern 5
(V3.0 Added)
6 = Tone pattern 6
(V3.0 Added)
7 = Tone pattern 7
(V3.0 Added)
8 = Tone pattern 8
(V3.0 Added)
SMDR output of made intercom
calls (V2.0 Added)
SMDR output of answered inter-
com calls (V2.0
Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
When set 0 it will not record the internal calls that been made.
When set 0 it will not record the internal calls that been received.
Default
0
Related
Program
0
0
0
15-02-03
15-01-49
15-01-49
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-124 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various Multiline telephone options.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Display Language Selection
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
Trunk Ring Tone
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
Extension Ring
Tone
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
Redial (Speed Dial) Control
0 = Common Abbreviated Dial
1 = Group Speed Dialing
This program sets the Display Language for the extension port you are programming.
(To select options 6 ~ 11, dial 6 or prss Help until 2 shows in the far right of screen , then press line keys
1 ~ 6. To select options 12 ~ 16, dial
12 or prss Help until 3 shows in the far right of screen, then press line keys 1 ~ 6.)
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for the extension port you are programming.
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming extension call ring for the extension port you are programming. Also refer to Program
15-08.
Use this option to control the function of the extension Redial key when used with Speed Dialing. The
Redial key can access either the
Common/Individual or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
Default
1
2
8
0
Related
Program
22-03
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-125
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
15
Item
No.
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
18
Item Input Data Description
Transfer Key Operation Mode
Hold Key Operating Mode
Automatic Hold for CO Lines
0 = Transfer
1 = Call back
2 = Hook
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
0 = Hold
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
Use this option to set the operating mode of the extension Transfer key.
The keys can be for Call Transfer,
Serial Calling or Flash. When selecting the Flash option (selection 2), refer also to Program 81-01-14.
Use this option to set the function of the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key can activate normal Hold or Exclusive Hold.
When talking on a CO call and another CO line key is pressed, the original trunk is placed on Hold (0) or Disconnected (1).
Use this option to set whether pressing a key access a One-Touch
Key or if it preselects the key.
Automatic
Handsfree
Auto answer to incoming call from Extension
Ringing Line
Preference for
Trunk Calls
Callback Automatic Answer
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch (Automatic Handsfree)
0 = Off
1 = On
Off-Hook Ringing 0 = Muted Off-Hook
Ringing
1 = No Off-Hook Ringing
3 = Beep in Speaker
(SP)
4 = Beep in Handset
(HS)
5 = Speaker and Handset Beep
Redial List Mode
0 = ICM/Trunk (Extension/Trunk Mode)
1 = Trunk Mode
Storage of Caller-ID for answered call
Handsfree Operation
Power-Saving
Mode
0 = Idle (Off)
1 = Ringing (On)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Normal mode
1 = Power-Saving
Mode (Eco-Mode)
Use this option to select between
Idle and Ringing Line Preference for trunk calls.
Use this option to enable or disable automatic answer of calls recalling to a station. For example, if a Transfer Recall or Hold Recall is ringing back to a station, the following happens:
If Program 15-02-11 is enabled, the station will automatically answer the recall when it goes off-hook. If Program 15-02-11 is disabled, a station does not automatically answer the recall when it goes off-hook. The user must first press the line appearance of the recalling call or press the answer key.
Use this option to set the telephone
Off-hook signaling. Off-hook signaling occurs when a telephone user receives a second call while busy on a handset call. To enable/disable
Off-hook signaling for an extension
Class of Service, use Program
20-13-06.
Select whether the Redial List feature should store internal and external numbers (0), or only external numbers (1).
Enable or disable an extension ability to use the speakerphone on outside calls. When disabled, users can hear the conversation, but cannot respond handsfree.
Default
0
Related
Program
0
1
1
1
1
1
5
0
1
1
1
2-126 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
21
22
23
27
28
29
30
34
35
Item Input Data Description
Virtual Extension
Access Mode
(when idle Virtual
Extension key pressed)
Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk
Speed Dial Preview Mode
Handset Volume
0 = Back to Default
Message Waiting
Lamp Color
PB Back Tone
Level
0 = DSS
1 = Outgoing (OTG)
2 = Ignore
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Preview
1 = Outgoing Immediately
(Back)
1 = Stay at previous level (Stay)
0 = Green
1 = Red
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ +
15.5 dB)
Toll Restriction
Class
Call Register
Mode
Message Waiting
Lamp Cycle for
Calling Extension
0 = Virtual Extension
(Follows virtual extension Toll Class in PRG
21-04.)
1 = Real Extension
(Follows physical stations Toll Class in PRG
21-04.)
0 = Trunk Mode
1 = Extension/Trunk
Mode
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
Determine whether a Virtual Extension (VE) should function as a DSS key or a Virtual Extension. When
DSS (0) is selected, the key functions as a DSS key to the extension and for incoming calls to that extension. When Outgoing (1) is selected, the key functions as a virtual extension and can be used for incoming and outgoing calls. When Ignore (2) is selected, the key functions can receive incoming calls only.
If enabled, this affects how a Hotline key lights, based on the setting in
Program 22-01-01. If 22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk priority, the Hotline key lights solid when a trunk call rings in. If 22-01-01 is set to 0 for intercom priority, the Hotline key does not light for incoming trunk calls, but lights solid for intercom calls. If
15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline keys light solid for any incoming calls regardless of the setting in Program
22-01-01.
This option defines how a speed dial key functions when pressed. If set to
Preview (0), the speed dial number can be previewed before dialing. If set to Outgoing Immediate (1), the number is dialed immediately.
Determine how an extension handset volume is set after it is adjusted during a call.
When 1 is assigned in this program and a user sets the volume to maximum, the volume is reset to a level to meet FCC standards when the user hangs up.
Determine whether an extension
Message Waiting Lamp lights Green
(0) or Red (1) when a message is received.
This program allows adjustment of the PB Back Tone Level when you are calling an ISDN Line.
Select the Toll Restriction Class to use when placing a call from a virtual extension.
The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk calls only (0), or both Internal and
Trunk calls (1).
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the extension has set Message Waiting.
Default
2
1
0
1
1
32 (0 dB)
1
1
3
Related
Program
22-01-01
15-02-21
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-127
Program
15
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
36
37
38
40
41
Item Input Data Description
Message Waiting
Lamp Cycle for
Called Extension
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
0 = Green
1 = Red
Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp
Color
Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp
Cycle
Additional Dial for Caller ID Call
Return
Incoming Ring
Setup
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
Up to four digits (0, 1 ~
9, #, * )
0=Speaker Normal
Ring
1=Headset Ring
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the extension has Message Waiting set to the extension.
Select the color of the Large LED when a voice mail message is waiting at the extension.
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the extension has a VM Message Waiting set to the extension.
Enter the digits to be dialed in front of the Caller ID when using the Caller ID Return function.
Default
2
1
2
No Setting
0
0
0
Related
Program
11-11-37
11-11-62
15-02-12
15-02-42
20-13-06
11-11-37
11-11-62
15-02-12
15-02-41
11-11-62
15-02-41
15-02-42
54
55
57
42
43
46
48
50
52
Incoming Off-
Hook Ring Setup
Headset Ring
Duration
0=Speaker Off-Hook
Ring
1=Headset Off-Hook
Ring
0=No Switch to Speaker Ring
1=10 sec
2=20 sec
3=30 sec
4=40 sec
5=50 sec
6=1 minute
Backlight LCD duration
0 = Continuous on
1 = 5 seconds
2 = 10 seconds
3 = 15 seconds
4 = 30 seconds
5 = 60 seconds
Short Ring Setup 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Set how long the Backlight LCD stays on.
Mute Lamp Status Change
Voice Mail Message Waiting
Lamp Setup
Menu Operation
Mode
VRS Message
Number
Caller Log on busy
0 = normal
1 = Lamp Status
Change
0 = Light the VM F-Key only
1 = Light the MW lamp only
2 = Light both MW
Lamp and VM Key
0 = Automatic Close
1 = Manual Close
0 ~ 100
0 = Off
1 = On
This program is not followed if one of the F-keys is assigned as a VM key of some other mailbox.
2
0
0
0
0
0
1
80-09-01
80-09-02
80-09-03
15-07-01
15-02-34
2-128 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
58
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Item Input Data Description
Display mode of trunk incoming
(V1.5 Deleted)
Soft Key/Navigation key Mode
0 = Caller ID
1 = Memo Information
0 = Standard Mode
1 = Advanced Mode1
2 = Advanced Mode2
0 ~ 8
Backlight Max
Brightness
Backlight Min
Brightness
Auto Backlight
0 ~ 8
0 = Off
1 = On
0 ~ 13
Auto Backlight bound threshold
(auto setting)
Auto Backlight bound threshold
(manual setting)
Dial Button
Backlight
Caller ID shared groups
Mode setting for incoming call from extension
Mute Operation on Handsfree
(3.0 Added)
Mute Key Opera-
tion (V2.0 Added)
0 ~ 13
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Personal
1 ~ 8 = Shared Group
Read Only:
0 = Voice
1 = Signal
0 = Do not change
Mute status
1 = Start with enabled
Mute
2 = Start with muted
Mute
0 = Enabled (Active)
1 = Disabled
Disable Softkey
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
This program can only be change by using PC Programming.
This program determines whether the Mute key is operational during a call.
When set to 1 (On), disable Softkey and cursor key operation at the terminal.
Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern (Program 15-02-35, 36, 38)
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
Input
Cycle 1
Cycle 2
Cycle 3
Cycle 4
Cycle 5
Cycle 6
Cycle 7
Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38
Cycle
500 ms - ON / 500 ms - OFF
250 ms - ON / 250 ms - OFF
125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF / 125 ms - ON / 625 ms - OFF
875 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
625 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF / 125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
1000 ms - ON
Default
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
13
6
0
1
0
1
Related
Program
13-04-08
13-04-09
13-04-10
15-02-64
15-02-63
20-49-01
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-129
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program
15
Program 15-02 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Type Frequency 1 Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 1)
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 2)
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 3)
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 4)
Internal Incoming Signal Frequency
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Frequency 2
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
Modulation
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
2-130 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line telephone options.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
SLT Signaling
Type
Input Data
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
03
Terminal Type
0 = Normal
1 = Special
04
05
06
07
08
Flashing
Trunk Polarity
Reverse
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Off
1 = On
Extension Polarity Reverse
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Enabled On-
Hook When
Holding (SLT)
Answer On-Hook when Holding
(SLT)
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Yes (Enable)
Description
Maximum eight digits
Default
1
Related
Program
15-03-03
45-01-01
Use this option to tell the system the type of dialing the connected telephone uses.
For Analog Wireless telephones to function correctly, this must be set to 0 (dial pulse). If this option is set for DTMF, after an outside call is placed, the system cannot dial any additional digits.
This program change is automatically performed when the Analog Wireless telephone is registered. When upgrading software from prior versions, the previous default of 1 is saved from the prior database so this option must be changed manually.
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup. Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice
Mail, always enter 1 (e.g., receive
DTMF tones).
Enables/disables Flash for single line telephones.
Do Not Change Default Entry as
DTMF issues may arise with voice mail.
Do Not Change Default Entry as
DTMF issues may arise with voice mail.
0
1
0
0
1
15-03-01
45-01-01
11-12-45
1 11-12-46
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-131
Program
15
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Item Input Data Description
Caller ID Function - For External Module
Caller ID Name
0 = Disable (Caller ID not displayed.)
1 = Enable (Caller ID is displayed.)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller
ID FSK signal for an external Caller
ID module or a 3rd party vendor telephone with Caller ID display.
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting must be disabled for the system integration codes to be correct.
With a Single Line Telephone, this must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a talk path.
Determine if an extension user telephone should display the Caller ID name.
Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or DTMF.
Caller ID Type
0 = FSK
1 = DTMF
Fixed Cadence
0 = Normal
1 = Fixed
MW sending type 0 = Lamp
1 = Caller ID
Forwarded Caller
ID Display Mode
Disconnect without dial after hooking hold
0 = Calling Extension
Number (Calling)
1 = External Caller ID
(Forward)
0 = Normal
1 = Disconnect
Special DTMF
Protocol Send
0 = No
1 = Yes
Determine what the display shows when a multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside call.
Dial Tone Select
Select Special
Terminal Type
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Normal
1 = New DT
0 = Fax
1 = Modem
Determine whether or not to disconnect a held call when on-hook without any dialing after hooking-hold.
Determine whether or not to send the extension number of the phone forwarded to the extension when
Program 15-03-04 is set to Special
(1) and not in the VM group.
When the function of MW has been set from another extension or VM, the dial tone upon off hook is selected.
This PRG is used for selecting Special Terminal Type (Fax or Modem).
This setting influences how to transmit data via SIP trunk. This PRG is effective at the time of when
PRG15-03-03 1: Special.
Default
0
Related
Program
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
15-03-09
45-01-16
15-03-03
2-132 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Conditions
None
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Normal
Outgoing Call
Idle
Reverse
Normal
Incoming Call
Idle
Reverse
Call Pickup
Normal
Idle
Reverse
(1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook
SL1100
Program
15
Feature Cross Reference
• Single Line Telephones
Programming Manual 2-133
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP telephone.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Terminal Type
IP Phone Fixed
Port Assignment
Read Only:
0 = NGT
1 = H.323
2 = SIP
3 = MEGACO
4 = SIP-MLT
MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
04
07
Nickname
Up to 48 characters
Description
MAC Address of registered SIP MLT phone is stored and/or can input the
MAC address of an SIP MLT phone so when it comes online it is provided with the extension in which the
MAC address matches.
Nickname section on Invite message.
Example :
Extension 100 has a Nickname set to PAUL.
Extension 101 has command
15-05-17 set to Nickname.
The inbound call to extension 101, from 100, shows PAUL.
Nickname must be unique in the system.
09
15
16
Using IP Address Read Only:
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
Call procedure port
CODEC Type
Read Only:
0 ~ 65535
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
Authentication
Password
Up to 24 characters
Assign the CODEC Type of the SIP
MLT.
Assign the authentication password for SIP single line telephones.
Default
-
Related
Program
00-00-00-
00-00-00
15-05-01
No Setting 15-05-17
-
-
1
15-05-01
15-05-01
84-24
84-11
15-05-01
No Setting 15-05-01
2-134 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
18
20
26
27
28
Item Input Data Description
IP Duplication Allowed Group
0 = Not Used
1 = Group 1
2 = Group 2
3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4
5 = Group 5
6 = Group 6
7 = Group 7
8 = Group 8
9 = Group 9
10 = Group 10
Bottom Option
Information
DR700 Terminal
Type
Personal ID Index
Read Only:
0 = No Option
1 = ADA
2 = BHA
3 = WHA
0 = Not Set
2 = ITL-()D-1D/
ITL-24BT-1D/
ITL-24PA-1D (without
8LKI (LCD)-L)
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
9 = IP4WW-24TIXH
0 ~ 084
Addition Information Setup
0 = Do not inform
1 = Inform
If there is an adapter that has one IP address coming into it but has multiple extensions off of it.
Assign all the extensions to a group so that way the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple extensions.
Shows the type of adapter installed.
When the SIP Multiline telephone is using manual/auto registration, assign each phone a unique personal index. Then go to command 84-22 to assign the user name and password.
Select whether to inform of additional information or not.
Default
0
0
0
0
Related
Program
15-05-01
10-03-10
84-22
0
36
38
29
30
31
33
35
39
Terminal WANside IP Address
DTMF Play during Conversation at Receive Extension
0 = Do Not Play
1 = Play
0 = Off
1 = On
Alarm Tone during Conversation
(RTP packet loss alarm)
LAN Side IP Address of Terminal
Read Only:
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
Encryption Mode
On/Off
DR700 Firmware
Version
Paging Protocol
Mode
CTI Override
Mode
Read Only:
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
Read Only:
0 = Off
1 = On
Read Only:
00.00.00.00 ~ ff.ff.ff.ff
0 = Multicast
1 = Unicast
2 = Auto
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Indicate a current firmware Version.
Sets the protocol mode for the Paging function.
0.0.0.0
0
1
0.0.0.0.
0
00.00.00.00
0
0
15-01-01
15-02-13
15-02-15
15-02-34
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-135
Program
15
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
40
41
43
44
45
Item Input Data
Calling name display info via trunk for standard SIP
0 = Both name and number
1 = Name only
2 = Number only
3 = None
Time Zone(hour)
0 ~ 24
(- 12 ~ + 12 hour)
Video Mode
Using STD-SIP
Display for CPN
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
NAT plug & play
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Description
Effective only when PRG 10-46-14 is set to NAT mode.
Select sending RTP port number to remote Router, use from negotiation result (0) or received RTP packet (1)
Default
0
Related
Program
12
0
0
1 10-46-14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-136 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each extension. An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use
Program 14-07 to define the available access maps.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Access Map Number
Input Data
001 ~ 084
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
14-07
Program
15
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Manual 2-137
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level:
SA
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line keys.
For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program
Function Keys using Service Codes.
To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Default Settings
Line Key
LK01
:
LK12
LK13
:
LK24
Function Number
* 01 (Trunk Line Key)
:
* 01 (Trunk Line Key)
0 (No setting)
:
0 (No setting)
Additional Data
1
0
:
0
:
12
Item No.
01
Item
Line Key Number
Function Number
1 ~ 24
Input Data
0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99
(Normal Function Code) (Service Code
751 by default)
*
00 ~
*
99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
Additional Data
Refer to
.
Refer to
.
Default
Programmable keys 1 ~ 8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2, etc.). All other programmable keys are undefined.
Function Number List
2-138 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Table 2-2 Function Number List
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99) (Service Code 751)
03
04
05
06
07
08
Function
Number
01
Function Additional Data
DSS/One-Touch Extension number or any numbers (up to 36 digits)
02
LED Indication
On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy
Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND Transfer,
CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW Busy/Noans, CFW
Both, CFW FL ME
Fast Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND All, CFW
Imm
On (Red) : Mic On
Off : Mic Off
09
Microphone
(Mute) Key (ON/
OFF)
DND Key
BGM (ON/OFF)
Headset
Transfer Key
Conference Key
Incoming Call
Log
On (Red) : DND Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Headset Operating
None
On (Red) : Conference Operating
Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID
On (Red) : Existing Checked CID
Off : No CID
On : While each mode
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Day/Night Mode
Switch
Call Forward -
Immediate
Call Forward -
Busy
Call Forward -No
Answer
Call Forward -
Busy/No Answer
Call Forward -
Both Ring
Mode number (1 ~
8) (0 = toggle)
Call Forward -
Follow Me
Text Message
Setup
Selectable Display
Message Numbers
(01 ~ 20)
External Group
Paging
External Paging
Number
(1 ~ 6)
External All Call
Paging
Internal Group
Paging
Internal All Call
Paging
Privacy Release
Call Pickup for own group
Internal Paging
Number
(01 ~ 32)
Call Pickup for
Another Group
Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Call Pickup Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup
Slow Blink : To be setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
None
None
Note
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-139
SL1100
Program
15
Function
Number
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
43
44
45
46
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Speed Dial -
Common/Private
Speed Dial -
Group
Repeat Redial
Saved Number
Redial
Memo Dial
Meet - Me Conference
Override (Off-
Hook Signaling)
Break - In
Camp On
Step Call
DND/FWD Override Call
Speed Dial Number
(Common / Private)
Speed Dial Number
(Group)
None
None
On (Red) : Repeat Dialing
None
None
None
None
None
On (Red) : Active
None
None
Message Waiting
Room Monitoring
Buzzer
None
Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring
Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored
Extension Number On (Red) : Calling party
Fast Blink (Red) : Called party
Extension Number On (Red) : Active Boss - Secretary
Call
Series Call
Common Hold
Exclusive Hold
Department
Group Log Out
None
None
None
On (Red) : Withdrawing
Reverse Voice
Over
Softphone doesn't support Reverse Voice
Over. (V1.5
Added)
Voice Over
Extension Number Same as DSS
Call Redirect
On (Red) : Responding
Slow Blink (Red) : Listening
None
Account Code
Automatic Answer with Delay
Message Setup
Extension Number or Voice Mail Number
Incoming Ring
Group
(01 ~ 25)
None
On (Red) : Setup
Automatic Answer with Delay
Message Start
External Call Forward by Door
Box
On (Red) : Delay Message Answering
On (Red) : Setup
2-140 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Note
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Function
Number
55
56
57
58
59
60
62
63
66
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Extension Name
Change
General Purpose
LED Operation
General Purpose
LED Indication
001 ~ 100 :
(Red) On Off
001 ~ 100 :
(Red) On Off
Automatic Transfer at Department
Group Call
Extension Group
Number
(01 ~ 32)
Delayed Transfer at Department
Group Call
DND at Department Group Call
Flash Key
Outgoing Call
Without Caller ID
(ISDN)
Extension Group
Number
(01 ~ 32)
Extension Group
Number
(01 ~ 32)
CTI (V3.0 Deleted)
Keypad Facility
Key
Keypad Hold Key
Keypad RE-
TRIEVE Key
Keypad Conference Key
None
001 ~ 100 : (Red) On
001 ~ 100 : (Red) On
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
None
On (Red) : Mode enabled
On (Red) : CTI active
Off
Off
Application Key Any dial data (8 digit)
Voice Mail (In-
Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot Number
None
<InMail>
Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own Mailbox.
Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mailbox.
<External VM>
On (Red) : Access to Voice Mail
Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own Mailbox.
Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mailbox.
Fast Blink : Recording Conversation Recording - Voice
Automated Attendant (In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot Number
On (Red) : Setup - All calls
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec
off) (Red) : Setup - busy calls
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup – busy/noans calls
Tandem Ringing 1 = Set
0 = Cancel Extension Number to Tandem Ring
Automatic Transfer to Transfer
Key
Trunk Line No.
(001-084)
On (Red) : Master Side
Slow Blink : Slave Side
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Note
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-141
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
15
Function
Number
83
84
86
87
88
91
94
97
#02
#03
#07
Function Additional Data
Conversation Recording Function
(VMSU)
0 = Pause
1 = Re-recording
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
Drop Key None
Private Call Refuse
None
Caller ID Refuse None
Dial-In Mode
Switching
Program 22-17 Table No.
(1 ~ 500)
LED Indication
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Pattern 1, Pattern 5 ~ 8
On (Red) : Pattern 2
Slow Blink (Red) : Pattern 3
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec
off) (Red) : Pattern 4
Slow Blink (Green) : Set Live Recording
Key
Call Attendant
Door Box Access
Key
Door Box Number
(1-6)
-- Cutting the telephone power --
-- Remote Monitor Permit --
Fix Operation
Mode (V3.0 Added)
Package Number
(2-9)
Night Mode Service
Group No. (1-4)
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125 ms : On / 125 ms : Off / 125 ms : On / 625 ms :
Off) (Red) : Setup - Busy calls
On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls
On (Red) : Doorphone Busy
Off : Doorphone Idle
Fast Blink (Red) : Doorphone Incoming
On (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Remote Monitor Permit
Off : Remote Monitor Deny
Note
Table 2-3 Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level (
*
00 ~
*
99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Number
Function
*
00 ICM Key
* 01 Trunk Key
Additional Data
LED Indication
*
02 Trunk Group
* 03 Virtual Extension
Key
* 04 Park Key
None
Trunk Number
(001 ~ 084)
Fast Blink (Green) : Incoming(own)/Recall(own)
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(other)
On (Green) : Speaking(own)
On (Red) : Speaking(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)/Transferring(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Transferring(other)/
Recall(other)
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming (own/other) Trunk Group
Number (001 ~
025)
Extension Number or Department Group Number
Park Number (01
~ 64)
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(own/other)/Recall(own)
On (Green) : Speaking(own)
On (Red) : Speaking(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)/Transferring(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Transferring(other)/
Recall(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)
Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)
Note
2-142 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Function
Number
Function
* 05 Loop Keys
Use Programs
15-13-01 and/or
15-13-02 to assign the loop key to a trunk group.
Additional Data
0 = Incoming
1 = Outgoing
2 = Both
* 06 Trunk Access via
Networking
Network System
No. 1 ~ 4
* 07 Station Park Hold None
None
None
LED Indication
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)
Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)
On : Logged in
Off : Logged out
On : While Setup
Slow Blink : Rest Mode Setup
* 10 ACD Log in / Log out
*
13 ACD off-duty mode (Rest
Mode)
* 17 ACD Work wrap up time
*
19 ACD Queue Status Display
* 32 Warning Message
* 33 Sensor Mode
On : While wrap up time
Slow Blink : While setup wrap up time
None
On (Red) : Play warning message
Off : Stop warning message
On (Red) : Security Sensor On
Off : Security Sensor Off
(125msec:on / 125msec:off / 125msec:on /
625msec:off) : Security Sensor Delay Timer
(PRG20-50-01) is starting. (V1.5 Added)
SL1100
Note
(V1.5 Added)
(V1.5 Added)
(V1.5 Added)
(V1.5 Added)
(V1.5 Added)
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-143
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
15
L E D P a tte rn 0 :[O F F ]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 1 :[F L : O n (5 0 0 m s)/Off(5 0 0 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 2 :[W K : O n (2 5 0 m s)/Off(2 5 0 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 3 :[R W : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 4 :[IR : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/ O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(6 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 5 :[IL O n (8 7 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 6 :[IW O n (6 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 7 :[O N ]
O n
O ff
LED Indication Reference :
ON = LED pattern 7.
OFF = LED pattern 0.
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3.
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5.
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1.
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3.
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4.
Conditions
• When a key is programmed using service code 752, it cannot be programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing
752 + * 04 must be undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 + 48.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-144 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0 ~
4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see
Program 22-03. The chart below shows the available tones. There are 084 available extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Ring Pattern
Input Data Description
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Ring Tone
Extension
5 = Tone pattern 5 (V3.0
Added)
6 = Tone pattern 6 (V3.0
Added)
7 = Tone pattern 7 (V3.0
Added)
8 = Tone pattern 8 (V3.0
Added)
When an extension or a virtual extension is assigned to the function key on the key telephone, select the ring tone when receiving a call on that key.
Default
0
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1
Table 2-4 Program 15-08 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Internal Incoming Signal Frequency
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
Modulation
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-145
Program
15
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-146 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program
15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.
Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual
Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code * 03). There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
Ringing
Key Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
0 = No Ringing
1 = Ring
Input Data
01 ~ 24
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Conditions
• Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-147
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level:
SA
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1 ~ 4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only flash. There are 50 Virtual Extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item No.
01
Item
Priority Order
Data
1 ~ 4
Input Data
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension Ring Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5 (V3.0 Added)
6 = Tone Pattern 6 (V3.0 Added)
7 = Tone Pattern 7 (V3.0 Added)
8 = Tone Pattern 8 (V3.0 Added)
Maximum eight digits
Description
When two or more virtual extensions are set on a function key on the telephone, and the tone pattern by which the sound of each extension differs, the priority of ring sound is set up.
Related Program
15-08
Default
• By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order :
Priority Order
1
2
3
4
Ring Tone (Set in Program 15-08)
0 (Tone Pattern 1)
1 (Tone Pattern 2)
2 (Tone Pattern 3)
3 (Tone Pattern 4)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-148 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in
Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. There are 50 Virtual
Extension Ports.
Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports.
Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code * 03).
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Key Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Ringing
Item Input Data
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
01 ~ 24
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Related
Program
20-04-03
15-09-01
Program
15
Conditions
• Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone programming.
• Program 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the VE key to Delay
Ring.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-149
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level:
IN
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the Conversation
Recording destination for each extension.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Recording Destination Extension Number
Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls
Recording Contents
Storing Method
Automatic Recording for Outgoing Calls
Maximum eight digits
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Save to dialed Mail
Box
1 = Save to own Mail
Box
0 = Off
1 = On
Enter the extension number to which the trunk calls should be recorded.
Determine if an extension incoming calls should be automatically recorded.
Determine if an extension outgoing calls should be automatically recorded.
Default
No Setting
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-150 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-13 : Loop Keys
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset terminal. Loop Keys can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in item 1. Incoming Loop
Keys use the entry in item 2. Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2.
Input Data
Extension Number
Key Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Outgoing Option
02
Incoming Option
Maximum eight digits
01 ~ 24
Input Data Default
0 ~ 25
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key for ARS, 1 ~ 25 = Assigns the Loop Key to the trunk group specified)
0 ~ 25
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups,
1 ~ 25 = Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group specified)
0: Programming Function Key No. = 01 ~ 24
0: Programming Function Key No. = 01 ~ 24
Program
15
Conditions
• Please set Loop Key at Program 15-07 before setting Program 15-13.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-151
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level:
SB
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each multiline terminal.
For each SL1100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of Range feature, enter the destination number (up to 36 digits) and name (up to 12 characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure to add any required trunk access codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either through 15-14-01 or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also changed.
Input Data
Extension Number
Key Number
Item
No.
01
Dial Data
Item
02
Name
Maximum eight digits
01 ~ 10
Input Data Description
Maximum of 36 digits (0
~ 9, * , #, @, P, R)
@ = Wait for Answer Supervision - ISDN trunks only
P = Pause - Analog
Trunk Only
R = Hook flash - Analog
Trunk Only
If PRG 15-02-60 is set to a (0) then the stations personal speed dial entries are programmed here.
Per key number (1 ~ 10) assign the telephone number that is to be called when the bin is accessed.
Maximum of 12 characters
Per key number (1 ~ 10) assign a name to be used when searching through the directory.
If a name is not assigned for a speed dial bin the speed dial entry will not be listed in the directory.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-152 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for
Extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Register ID
Item
None, 0 ~ 31
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-153
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level:
IN
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash assignment on each CO line.
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
LED Flash Assignment
0 = LED Off
1 = LED On
Input Data
Up to eight digits
001 ~ 084
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-154 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a
Virtual Extension Key is pressed.
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description
Virtual Extension
Key Operation
Mode
Display mode when placing a call on Virtual
Extension Key
Show CLI (V3.0
Added)
Show Internal
Caller Informa-
tion (V3.0 Added)
One Ring (V3.0
Added)
0 = Release
1 = Land on the key
0 = Secondary Extension Name
1 = Actual Station
Name
0 = No CLI info
1 = Show CLI info
0 = Do Not Show
1 = Show
0 = Normal Ring Cycle
1 = One Ring
Define if calls to a Virtual Extension
Key land on the Virtual or on the extension/CO appearance.
This is assigned for the Virtual
Extension Key, not the extension it resides on.
Defines if calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual
Extension Key name or the name of the extension it resides on.
When set to a 0, the caller ID of a trunk call/station call pointed to a virtual extension will not be displayed if the virtual extension is not set to ring. When set to a 1, the caller ID of a trunk call pointed to a virtual extension will be displayed if the virtual extension is not set to ring. Station calls to a virtual that is not assigned to ring will display the station name or number if PRG 15-18-04 is set to a 1.
When set to a 0, internal calls to the virtual extension will not show the name or number of the extension that is calling.
When set to 1, internal calls to the virtual extension will show the name or number of the extension that is calling if the virtual is assigned to ring or if PRG 15-18-03 is set to a 1.
When set to a 0, the virtual extension follows the normal ring cycle.
When set to a 1, the virtual extension will only ring one time (the virtual extension must be first set to ring in PRG 15-08).
Default
1
1
0
0
0
Related
Program
20-04-01
15-09-01
15-09-01
15-18-03
15-09-01
Program
15
Programming Manual 2-155
Program
15
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Condition
• If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-156 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension feature.
Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Mobile Extension Target Setup
0 = No Setting
1 ~ 999 = Speed Dial
Bin 1 ~ 999 (PRG 13-04)
Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call when the Mobile extension is called.
Connect Confirmation 0 = Always (User must dial
*
when answered for the call to cut through on ALL line types.)
1 = On Analog Line
(User must dial * when answered for the call to cut through on Analog lines only.)
2 = Never (When the call is answered the call is immediately cuts through.)
Per Mobile Extension, assigned in PRG
11-02, select whether a confirmation is required (user dials*) to allow the call to cut through when answered.
Trunk Access Code
Call Back
0 = Normal Trunk Access (PRG 11-09-01)
1 = Individual Trunk Access (PRG 11-09-02)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Select if the Normal (0) or Individual (1)
Trunk access is used when making the call to the mobile number.
Default
0
0
0
0
Program
15
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-157
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal to register data in the standard SIP terminal where Register is not used.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Using IP Address
Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
02
03
Call Procedure Port
0 ~ 65535
Registration Setting when REGISTER isn't used
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
IP Address of the standard SIP terminal that is used as the SIP extension. When
Program 15-24-03 is set to 1, this Program cannot be changed from 0.0.0.0 (except using PCProgramming).
Call procedure port of the standard SIP terminal that is used as SIP extension.
Enables or disables the Registration method. An error will occur if Program 15-24-01 is 0.0.0.0 and this Program is set to 1 (except using PCProgramming).
Default
0.0.0.0
5060
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-158 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup to define the ringing tone for each trunk port of extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Trunk port number
Day/Night Mode
Up to eight digits
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Trunk Incoming
Ring Tone
0 = Trunk incoming ring tone
1 = High
2 = Middle
3 = Low
4 = Melody 1
5 = Melody 2
6 = Melody 3
7 = Melody 4
8 = Melody 5
Assign individual ring tones at extension for each trunk and each
Night mode.
When 0 (Trunk incoming ring tone) is selected, it follows the setting of
Program 15-02-02.
Default
0
Related
Program
22-03
15-02-02
Program
15
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-159
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
16
Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each department group. There are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Department Group Number 1 ~ 32
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Item Input Data Description
Department
Name
Department Calling Cycle
Department
Routing when
Busy (Auto Step
Call)
Hunting Mode
Extension Group
All Ring Mode
Operation
STG Withdraw
Mode
Call Recall Restriction for STG
Maximum 12 characters
0 = Normal Routing
(Priority)
1 = Easy - UCD Routing (Circular)
0 = Normal (Intercom caller hears busy tone.)
1 = Circular (Intercom caller routes to an idle group member.)
0 = Last extension is called and hunting is stopped
1 = Circular
Set this option to set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member.
Intercom callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the first available department number.
This only occurs for calls to the extension directly, not the department number assigned in Program 11-07.
Use this option to set the action taken when a call reaches the last extension in the Department Group (0
= hunting stopped, 1 = hunting repeats with circular routing through the Department Group).
0 = Manual (Ring the extensions one at a time when the service code are pressed.)
1 = Automatic (Ring all extensions.)
This program is used to assign a name to the department group.
Use this option to set the call routing for Department Calling. Routing can be either circular (cycles to all phones in group) or priority (cycles to highest priority extensions first).
Determine whether calls ringing a
Department Group should ring all extensions in the group simultaneously automatically or manually when using the service code defined in Program 11-12-09.
When set to (1) Automatic, only
ICM Calls and DID Calls will ring all the stations in the Department Group.
0 = Disabled (Call will camp on to the group.)
1 = Automatic (Call follows PRG 22-11-11.)
0 = Disabled (Call will recall.)
1 = Enabled (Call will not recall.)
Determine whether or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred.
Default
No Setting
0
Related
Program
11-07
16-02
0
0
0
0
0
16-02
11-16-10
2-160 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
08
09
10
Item Input Data Description
Maximum Queuing number for
Department
Group Call
Department
Hunting No Answer Time
Enhanced Hunt
Type
0 ~ 32
0 = No Queuing
0 ~ 64800 seconds
This program sets the amount of calls that can queue to a department group when all members of the group are busy.
Set how long a call rings a Department group extension before hunting occurs.
0 = No hunting
1 = Hunting When Busy
2 = Hunting When Not
Answered
3 = Hunting When Busy or No Answer
Set the type of hunting for each Extension (Department) Group.
Default
0
Related
Program
15
0
Conditions
None
Program
16
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Calling
Programming Manual 2-161
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Program
16
Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department
Groups. The system uses these groups (32 Department Groups) for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Use Program 16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group.
When a call comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Item
01
Group Number
Priority
Input Data
1 ~ 32
1 ~ 999
Default
1 - xxx
(See )
Description
Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.
Related Program
11-07
16-01
The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Programs 11-02 and 11-04.
(Extension ports are 1 ~ 100 (V2.0 or higher) Virtual extension ports are 1 ~ 50.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Calling
2-162 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group. There are 32 available
Department Groups.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Item No.
01
Item
Secondary Extension Number
Extension Number
Priority Order
1 ~ 16
Input Data
Maximum 8 digits
0 ~ 999
01 ~ 32
Description
This program is set up when placing telephones in two or more groups.
Program
16
Default
• All extension groups : No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Calling
Programming Manual 2-163
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level:
IN
Program
16
Description
Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted on a per group basis. Each department group can restrict calls to up to 8 department groups in Department Group - Departmental
Call Restriction.
Input Data
Extension (Department) Group Number
Restricted Group Index
Item
No.
01
Item
Restrict Department
Group Number
Input Data
0 ~ 32
1 ~ 32
1 ~ 8
Description
Calls between members of different Department (Station) groups can be restricted on a per group basis.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-164 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
16
17
Item Input Data Description
Operator Access
Mode
Text Message
Mode
Interval timer for
BLF Data (V1.5
Added)
DTMF Receive
Active Time
Alarm Duration
Callback Ring
Duration Time
Trunk Queuing
Callback Time
Callback/Trunk
Queuing Cancel
Time
Trunk Guard
Timer
Telephone/Web
Pro Logout Time
0 = Step Call
1 = Circular
0 = Call mode
1 = No Answer/Busy mode
0 ~ 64800
(0 ~ 6480 seconds)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
1 ~ 86400
(86400 seconds = 1 day)
Mobile Extension
Callback time
1 ~ 64800 seconds
Day/Night
Change Key
Mode
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Toggle (Will follow
PRG 12-08-01.)
1 = Skip (When pressed the system will step to the next night mode time period in PRG
12-02.)
Use this program to set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone.
Use this program to select the mode when calling the telephone which set up the text message.
While on Networking Operation It sends a BLF message to other system interval of per 100s.
For OPXs, analog telephones and certain analog trunks (like DISA), the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the port for this time. The system releases the receiver after the time expires.
This time sets the duration of the alarm signal.
Callback rings an extension for this time.
Trunk Queuing callback rings an extension for this time.
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this time.
The amount of time the system waits to seize the next outside line after the system releases an outside line.
The system automatically logs out of a Telephone/Web Pro session after inactivity lasting this time.
The amount of time the system waits to until system ends the call back.
This program sets the operation mode for the Night Mode Key (PRG
15-07 key 09).
Default
0
Related
Program
20-17
1
0
10
30
15
15
64800
1
11-11-14
15-07-08
11-11-12
11-12-05
15-07-35
11-12-05
15-07-35
11-12-05
15-07-35
900
(15 min.)
15 15-22-04
1
25-07-01
15-07
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-165
Program
20
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-166 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for multiline telephones.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
04
05
06
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
1
Trunk Loop Key Operation Mode
Trunk Group Access Key Operating
Mode
Retrieve the Line After Transfer
0 = Keep Lamp
1 = Extinction
Mode
Incoming :
Talking :
Holding :
0 = Keep Lamp
300 IPM Red blink
Green Lighting
(on Talking TEL)
60 IPM Green blink (on holding
TEL)
1 = LED Off
LED Off
LED Off
0 = Outgoing / Incoming
1 = Outgoing
2 = Incoming
0 = Not Holding (No Keep)
1 = Holding (Keep)
Headset Busy Mode 0 = No (Disable)
Pre-selection Time
1 = Yes (Enable)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Use this option to set the operating mode of the extension trunk group keys. The keys are for incoming access, outgoing access, or both.
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension ability to answer a call after it has been transferred, but before it is answered.
Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers.
When a multiline terminal user preselects a line key, the system remembers the pre-selection for this time.
0
1
0
5
20-09-07
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-167
Program
20
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
07
08
09
Item Input Data
Time and Date Display Mode
1 ~ 8
Type 1 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3 : 15 PM
Type 2 = (12 hour) 3 : 15 PM MAR 10 TUE
Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3 : 15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour) 3 : 15 PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15 : 15
Type 6 = (24 hour) 15 : 15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15 : 15
Type 8 = (24 hour) 15 : 15 TUE 10 MAR
0 ~ 64800 seconds
LCD Display Holding Time
Disconnect Supervision
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Description Default Related
Program
3 Set how the
Time and Date appear on display telephones. There are eight display modes.
Use this option to enable or disable disconnect supervision for the system trunks.
5
1
0 15-02-18 10
11
Time Before Shifting to Power-Saving
Mode
0 = No Shift
1 = 1 minute
2 = 2 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = 8 minutes
5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes
Handsfree Microphone Control
0 = Off
1 = On
1
12
Forced Intercom
Ring (ICM Call Type)
0 = Disable (Voice)
1 = Enable (Signal)
Use this option to control the setting for Multiline Terminal
Handsfree microphone after being disconnected and reconnected. If set to 0, the microphone is always off when the terminal is reconnected. If set to
1, the microphone remains in the same state it was in when the terminal is reconnected.
Use this option to enable or disable Forced
Intercom Ringing. If enabled, incoming Intercom calls normally ring. If disabled, Intercom calls voice-announce.
1
0 15
18
Caller ID Display
Mode
Dialing Record Display Time
0 = Name and Number (Both)
1 = Name
2 = Number
0 ~ 64800 seconds 30
2-168 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
19
Item
DSS Key - Virtual
Extension Mode
0 = No
1 = Yes
Input Data
24 LCD scroll mode 0 = Character
1 = Dot
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Description Default Related
Program
0 Sets the mode of a virtual extension key that appears on a DSS console.
0
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-169
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for single line telephones.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description
SLT Call Waiting
Answer Mode
Ignore Received
DP Dial on DTMF
SLT Port
0 = Hook Flash (Hooking)
1 = Hook Flash + Service Code 794
0 = Do Not Ignore (No)
1 = Ignore (Yes)
SLT DTMF Dial to
Trunk Lines
Dial Sending
Start Time for
SLT or ARS
SLT Operation
Mode
0 = Receive all dialed data, before sending
(All)
1 = Direct through out
(Direct)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Normal Mode
1 = Extended Mode 1
2 = Extended Mode 2
For a busy single line telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call.
Use this option to define whether the system should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF signals
(1).
• Type 0 : The system keeps the digits dialed by the single line telephone on a trunk in a buffer. After all the digits are received, the system sends all the digits to the trunk. If the time space between digits is longer than the time in
Item 4, the system considers all digits received.
• Type 1 : The system passes the received digits from the single line telephone to the trunk immediately. If the single line telephone has a Last Number Dial key without a pause, this key may not be able to use the Last Number Dial key with the Type 1 setting.
When using a third-party external paging device, set this option to 1.
In addition, set Program 20-03-04 to
1
When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the system waits this time before outdialing the first digit.
When using a third-party external paging device, set this option to 1.
In addition, set Program 20-03-03 to
1.
Default
0
Related
Program
11-12-47
0
0
3
0
15-03-01
20-03-04
20-03-03
2-170 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
06
Item Input Data
Headset Ringing
Start Time (for
SLT)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Define the headset ringing start time. After this time expires from the time when a single line telephone is off-hook, the system sets the single line telephone to headset ringing mode.
07
Trunk Call Dial
Forced Sending
Start Time
(Forced Dial)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Default
5
Related
Program
20-13-38
0 20-03-03
20-03-04
Conditions
None
Program
20
Feature Cross Reference
• Single Line Telephones
Programming Manual 2-171
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for
Virtual Extensions. There are 50 available Virtual Extension ports.
Input Data
Item
No.
03
04
05
Item
Ringtone mode for incoming to
VE (V2.0 Added)
Input Data
Virtual Extension
Delay Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Virtual Extension
Key Seize Mode
0 = Normal
1 = Enhanced Option
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Virtual Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring the extension after this time.
When set to Enhanced, the BLF will not show as being busy when the station is on a trunk call.
When set to Normal, the BLF will show as being busy when on a trunk call.
Enable the distinctive ring tone when incoming ring.
Default
10
Related
Program
1
0 22-03-01
15-08-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Virtual Extensions
2-172 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service (COS) to an extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Class of Service for Extensions
1 ~ 15
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
Extension 101 is Class
15 and other Extension are Class 1
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
Programming Manual 2-173
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
10
11
12
13
14
Item Input Data Description
Manual Night
Service Enabled
Changing the
Music on Hold
Tone
Time Setting
0 = OFF (User cannot control manual night mode.)
1 = ON (User can control manual night mode.)
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension for manual Night Service Switching.
Turns off or on an extension to change the Music on Hold tone.
Storing Speed
Dialing Entries
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off (Deny)
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension to set the Time via Service Code 728.
Turns off or on an extension to store
System or Group Speed Dialing numbers.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-
Trunk Transfer
Charging Cost
Display
Programmable
Function Key
Programming
(Appearance
Level)
Forced Trunk
Disconnect (analog trunk only)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Trunk Port Disable
VRS Record
(VRS Msg Operation)
VRS General
Message Play
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on the ability for an extension user ability to program the
Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
Turns off or on extension user ability to record, erase and listen to VRS messages.
Turns an extension off or on to dial
4 or Service Code 611 to listen to the General Message.
Default
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 0
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 0/1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 0/1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 0/1
Related
Program
11-10-01
11-10-02
11-10-03
11-10-04
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
11-10-09
11-11-38
11-10-26
11-10-27
11-10-20
11-10-21
2-174 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
15
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
Item Input Data Description
VRS General
Message Record/
Delete
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension user ability to dial Service Code 612 and record, listen to, or erase the General Message.
SMDR Printout
Accumulated Extension Data
SMDR Printout
Department
Group (STG) Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
SMDR Printout
Accumulated Account Code Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Register and delete DECTPP
CO MSG Waiting
Indication Callback Number
Programming
Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off (User cannot control the feature.)
1 = On
Enable or Disable an extension ability to receive CO Message Waiting
Indication.
Set/Cancel Caller
ID Refuse
0 = Off (User cannot control the feature.)
1 = On
Dial-In Mode
Switch
Do-Not-Call Administrator
0 = Off (Station cannot control DDI switching.)
1 = On (Station can control DDI switching.)
0 = Off
1 = On
Per class of service (PRG 20-06-01) this program is used to allow or deny the stations ability to set or cancel the Private Call Refuse feature.
Enable or Disable an extension ability to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse.
30
Default
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 0/1
Related
Program
11-10-22
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
11-10-23
11-10-24
11-10-25
11-10-32
11-10-33
11-10-34
11-10-35
25-01-07
15-07-89
20-01-19
11-10-41
31
Date Setting
System Wide call forward clear
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 0/1
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
Programming Manual 2-175
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Level:
IN
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
08
09
06
07
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Intercom Calls
Trunk Outgoing
Calls
System Speed
Dialing
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off (Deny)
1 = On
04
05
10
Group Speed Dialing
0 = Off (Deny)
1 = On
Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial)
0 = Off
1 = On
Toll Restriction
Override
Repeat Redial
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Toll Restriction
Dial Block
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off
1 = On
01 ~ 15
Description Default Related
Program
Turns off or on Intercom calling for the extension.
Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling for the extension.
Turns off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers.
Turns off or on an extension ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers.
Turns off or on an extension for using Dial Number Preview.
Turns off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service Code 663).
Turns off or on an extension to use
Repeat Redial.
Turns off or on an extension to use
Dial Block.
Turns off or on Ringdown Extension for extensions with this COS.
Turns off or on an extension allowing it to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
(Internal Call)
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 21-01-07
21-07
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 11
12
Protect for the
Call Mode
Switching from
Caller
Department
Group Step Calling
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension to use
Department Group Step Calling.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
2-176 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
Item Input Data Description
ISDN CLIP
Call Address Information
Block Outgoing
Caller ID
Display E911 Dialed Extension
Name and Number
0 = Off
1 = On
ARS Override of
Trunk Access
Map
0 = Off
1 = On
Hotline for SPK
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off (when set to Off the system will not send any outbound calling party information.)
1 = On (when set to ON the system will send calling party information for the station or trunk.)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Determines if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators are allowed.
Turns off or on the system ability to automatically block outgoing Caller
ID information when a user places a call.
If this option is on, the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user-dialed digits.
Turns off or on an extension to display the name and number of the extension that dialed E911.
Hot Key Pad
Automatic Trunk
Seizing by Pressing SPK Key
Voice Over to
Busy Virtual Extension
Display indication for security sensor detection
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Display indication for emergency call by remote inspection
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension ability to override the trunk access map programming for outgoing calls.
The ability of an extension to have
Hotline activated or deactivated when going off hook via the speaker key.
The ability of an extension to make a call by just dialing the number without first going off hook.
The ability of an extension to automatically access Trunk Route when going off hook via the speaker key.
The ability of an extension to make
Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension.
Default Related
Program
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 10-03-05
15-01-04
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 14-01-20
14-01-21
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-08-09
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
Programming Manual 2-177
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Level:
IN
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
13
Item Input Data Description Default
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Related
Program
Second Call for
DID/
DISA/DIL/E&M
Override
0 = Off (2nd call will not be allowed.)
1 = On (2nd call is allowed.)
Turns off or on the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through. If the destination extension does not have a trunk key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered, the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting.
Caller ID Display
0 = Off
1 = On
Notification for
Incoming Call
List Existence
0 = Off
1 = On
Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on the Caller ID display at an extension.
Determines whether or not an extension display shows Check List when an incoming call is missed by a user.
Turn off or on an extension ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls.
Incoming Time
Display
Call Queuing
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off (Calls are not queued.)
1 = On (Calls are queued.)
Turn off or on an extension ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy.
Deny Collect Call
Receiving
DND Active
While Ringing
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Immediate
1 = Next call
When set to 0, and if set DND during an incoming call, the call for the terminal stops immediately.
When set to 1, and if set DND during an incoming call, the call for the terminal continues ringing and set for the next call.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
(V1.5 Changed)
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-11-15
11-11-16
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 20-13-06
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
2-178 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
SL1100
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-179
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item
Group Call Pickup
(Within Group)
Group Call Pickup
(Another Group)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Group Call Pickup for
Specific Group
Telephone Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
06
07
08
09
10
Meet-Me Conference and Paging
Automatic Off-Hook
Answer
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Virtual Extension Off-
Hook Answer
0 = Off (Ringing Line
Preference Disabled)
1 = On (Ringing Line
Preference Enabled)
Call Pickup Callback
0 = Off
1 = On
Answer Preset
0 = Off
1 = On
Description Default
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group and ringing group calls (Service Code * #).
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group (Service Code
769).
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group (Service Code 768).
Turns off or on an extension to be picked up by a call pickup
Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group
(Service Code 756).
Turns off or on an extension to use Meet-
Me Conference and Paging.
Turns off or on an extension to use Universal Auto Answer (no service code required).
Turns off or on an extension to answer an incoming call on a Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Turn off or on an extension ability to use
Call Pickup to pick up Callback calls.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Conditions
None
2-180 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-181
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Level:
IN
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and
Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
Item
Call Forward All
Call Forward When
Busy
Call Forwarding
When Unanswered
Call Forwarding (Both
Ringing)
Call Forwarding with
Follow Me
Unscreened Transfer
(Ring Inward Transfer)
Transfer Without
Holding
Transfer Information
Display
Group Hold Initiate
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Group Hold Answer
Automatic On-Hook
Transfer
Call Forwarding Off
Premise (External
Call Forwarding)
Operator Transfer After Hold Callback
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
14
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction
0 = Off
1 = On
15
VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting)
0 = Off
1 = On
01 ~ 15
Description Default
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call Forwarding All.
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Call Forward when Busy.
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Call Forward when Unanswered.
Turns off or on an extension ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing.
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me.
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Unscreened Transfer.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Transfer Without Holding.
Turns off or on an extension ability for incoming Transfer preanswer display.
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate a Group Hold.
Turns off or on an extension ability to pick up a call on Group Hold.
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Automatic On Hook Transfer.
Turns off or on an extension ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone.
Turns off or on an extension ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator.
Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer is not possible.
Turns off or on a Service Code to record, listen to, or erase the Personal Greeting
Message.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
2-182 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
Item Input Data Description Default
Call Redirect
0 = Off
1 = On
Department Group
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Each Telephone
Group Transfer)
0 = Off
1 = On
No Recall
0 = Off
1 = On
Hold/Extended Park
No Callback
Restriction for Tandem Trunking on
Hang Up
Restricted Unsupervised Conference
VE Call Forward Set/
Cancel
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
0 = Off
1 = On
Trunk Park Hold
Mode
Transfer Park Call
Station Park Hold mode
Call Park Automatically Search
Both Ring Enhancement
Disable Call FWD In-
dication on LCD (V3.0
Added)
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold (On)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Normal
1 = Enhanced
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on a multiline terminal user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to set Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
No Recall set to "Allow" (1) will not stop transferred calls from recalling from a virtual extension.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 Determine if an extension Class of Service should allow either a normal or extended
Park.
Turns off or on an extension to receive callbacks.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user ability to set up a tandem/conference call automatically when they hang up.
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension ability to initiate an unsupervised conference.
Turn on or off an extension ability to set or cancel call forwarding for a virtual extension.
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by an extension.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Turn off or on an extension ability to transfer a parked call.
When set to 1, Call FWD setting is not shown on the terminal LCD.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
Programming Manual 2-183
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging
Cost service availability for each extension service class.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
02
Item
Advice of Charge (ISDN-AOC)
03
Cost Display (TTU)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
01 ~ 15
Default
COS 01~15 = 0
COS 01~15 = 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
2-184 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Item Input Data
Long Conversation Alarm
0 = Off
1 = On
Description Default
Turns off or on the Warning Tone for
Long Conversation (not for single line telephones).
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call Forwarding/DND Override.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Related
Program
Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Call
Forward/DND
Override (Bypass
Call)
0 = Off
1 = On
Intercom Off-
Hook Signaling
Automatic Off-
Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
0 = Off (ICM off hook signaling disabled.)
1 = On (ICM off hook signaling enabled.)
0 = Off (manually)
1 = On (automatically)
Message Waiting 0 = Off
1 = On
Conference
0 = Off
1 = On
Privacy Release
Room Monitor,
Initiating Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
Barge-In Monitor 0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension ability to receive off-hook signals.
Allows a busy extension ability to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Turns off or on an extension ability to leave Message Waiting.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a conference or
Meet-Me Conference.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference.
Enables the extension Barge-In
Mode to be Speech mode (0) or
Monitor mode (1).
Turns off or on extension user ability to Room Monitor other extensions.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-13-45
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-185
Program
20
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
Room Monitor,
Extension Being
Monitored
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on ICM Call
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Barge-In, Initiate
0 = Off
Barge-In, Receive
Barge-in Tone/
Display (Intrusion Tone)
Programmable
Function Key
Programming
(General Level)
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Account Code/
Toll Restriction
Operator Alert
(Restricted Operation Transfer)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off (Call restricted.)
1 = On (Call routed to operator.)
Extension Name
0 = Off
1 = On
Busy Status Display (Called Party Status)
0 = Off
1 = On
Display the Reason for Transfer
0 = Off
1 = On
Privacy Release by Pressing Line
Key
Group Listen
Busy on Seizing
Virtual Extension
Allow Class of
Service to be
Changed
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension ability to be monitored by other extensions.
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to barge-in on other's calls.
Turns off or on an extension ability to have other extensions barge-in on calls.
Turns off or on the Barge-In tone. If on, callers hear an alert tone and their display indicates the Barge-In when another extension barges into their conversation. If off, there is no alert tone or display indication.
Turns off or on extension user ability to program General function keys using Service Code 751 (by default).
(Refer to Program 20-07-10 for
Service Code 752.)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
Turns off or on operator alert when an extension user improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to program its name.
Turns off or on the ability to display the detailed state of the called party.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Select whether an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer, and DND).
Turns off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Group Listen.
If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06
(Call Waiting) must be set to 0 for this option to work.
Turns off or on the ability of an extension Class of Service to be changed via Service Code 677.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
20-13-06
2-186 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
Item Input Data Description Default
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Related
Program
Paging Display
Background Music
Connected Line
Identification
(COLP)
Deny Multiple
Barge-Ins
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Deny (user cannot control background music on their station.)
1 = Allow (user can control background music on their station.)
Allow or Deny an extension user to turn Background Music on and off.
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension user ability to display paging information.
0 = Off
1 = On
Block Manual
Off-Hook Signaling
0 = Off
1 = On
Block Camp On
0 = Off ( Camp On blocked.)
1 = On (Camp On allowed.)
Call Duration
Timer Display
0 = Off
1 = On
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Allows or Denies an extension from having multiple users Barge into their conversation.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to block off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker.
Turns off or on an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to
Camp On.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Headset Ringing for SLT
ACD Queue Sta-
tus Display (V1.5
Added)
Do Not Disturb
Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS
Extension Data
Swap Enabling
Live Monitor Enabling
Mute Key Mode while Call Monitoring
Remote Conference
Station Number
Display
Station Name
Display
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension display of the Call Duration Time. The system waits until the interdigit time
(Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this timer.
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the Headset ringing
Turn off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an extension Class of
Service. Any extension, which has this option enabled, also hears the queue alarm.
Turn off or on an extension user ability to set or cancel Do Not Disturb.
Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an extension on a DSS console.
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Extension Data Swap.
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Live Monitor.
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines if the monitored parties receive the barge in alert tone when Coaching
Mode is enabled.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 41-20
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-11-08
15-07-03
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-15-12
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 20-13-10
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
11-19
20-34
Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an idle state.
Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an idle state.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-187
Program
20
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
49
51
52
Item Input Data
BLF Indication on CO Incoming
State
Number and
Name appear in the Directory
VoIPDB All DSP
Busy Display
0 = Off (Disabled)
1 = On (Enabled)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
53
54
55
Language Selection for specific extension
Call waiting for standard SIP terminal
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Intercom Call to
Room Monitor
0 = Off
1 = On
Description Default
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Related
Program
Determine if a BLF of the station will light when a Normal CO call is ringing the phone.
Determine if an extension name and number will be listed (On) or unlisted (Off) in the directory.
Set whether “All DSP Busy” alarm displays on LCD when the caller makes an IP call and there is no
VoIPDB DSP resource.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 11-11-68
15-02-01
47-02-16
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-13-05
20-13-06
20-09-01
20-09-07
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
2-188 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line
Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.
Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by this program.
However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk calls are NOT supported by this program.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
01
Item
First Digit Absorption
(Delete First Digit Dialed)
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
02
Trunk Group
Routing/ARS Access
0 = Off
1 = On
03
Trunk Group Access
0 = Off
1 = On
04
05
06
07
08
09
Outgoing System
Speed Dial
Operator Calling
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Internal Paging
External Paging
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Direct Trunk Access
0 = Off
1 = On
Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN Tpoint>
0 = Off
1 = On
01 ~ 15
Description Default
For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit.
Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk
Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code
704).
This option enables or disables DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the System
Speed Dialing.
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator.
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system Internal Paging.
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging.
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Trunk
Access (Service Code #9).
This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 11-10-26). This option is not available to DISA callers.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-189
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
10
Item
Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
11
12
DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
Retrieve Park Hold
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Description Default
Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05).
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the Barge-In.
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to retrieve a Park
Hold call.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-190 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Item Input Data
Incoming Signal Type : Normal Incoming Call on Trunk
Incoming Signal Type : PBX, CES
Incoming Call
Incoming Signal Type : Incoming
Internal Call
Incoming Signal Type : DID/
DISA/VRS
Incoming Signal Type : DID/DDI
Incoming Signal Type : Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line
Incoming Signal Type : Door Box
Ringing for SLT
Incoming Signal Type : Virtual Extension Ring
Incoming Signal Type : Callback
Incoming Signal Type : Alarm for
SLT
Incoming Signal Type : VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13
Number
1
8
9
10
4
5
6
7
2
3
Table 2-5 Ringing Cycles
Ringing Cycle
On
On : 2.0 / Off : 4.0
On : 1.0 / Off : 2.0
On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25
On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5 / On : 0.5 / Off : 1.5
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 5.25
On : 0.375 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.375 / Off : 2.0
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.0
On : 1.0 / Off : 4.0
Default
2
8
8
12
8
12
11
5
6
8
8
Programming Manual 2-191
Program
20
SL1100
Number
11
12
13
Ringing Cycle
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 4.25
On : 1.0 / Off : 3.0
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.25
Conditions
None
Program
20
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-192 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages.
There are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 48 characters. Use the following chart when programming messages.
Use this keypad digit ...
1
6
7
8
9
0
4
5
2
3
*
#
Clear/Back
Flash
When you want to ...
Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
Enter characters :
* + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex :
TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Program
20
Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number
Item No.
01
Item
Selectable Display Messages
48 characters
Input Data
Default
Number
1
2
3
4
IN MEETING UNTIL ## : ##
MEETING ROOM - ########
COME BACK ## : ##
PLEASE CALL ###########
Message
01 ~ 20
Default
Refer below
Programming Manual 2-193
Program
20
SL1100
Number
9
10
11
12
13
7
8
5
6
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
BUSY CALL AFTER ## : ##
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ## : ##
BUSINESS TRIP BACK ## / ##
BUSINESS TRIP ##########
GONE FOR THE DAY
ON VACATION UNTIL ## / ##
MESSAGE 11
MESSAGE 12
MESSAGE 13
MESSAGE 14
MESSAGE 15
MESSAGE 16
MESSAGE 17
MESSAGE 18
MESSAGE 19
MESSAGE 20
Conditions
• Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.
Message
Feature Cross Reference
• Selectable Display Messages
ISSUE 3.01
2-194 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-17 : Operator Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials 0
(defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program.
If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option.
Input Data
Operator Number 1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Operator’s Extension Number
Operator Console
Up to eight digits
0 = Normal key set
1 = Special Operator
Console
Description
Define the extension numbers which are to be used by operators.
Default
101
0
Related
Program
11-01
20-01-01
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Intercom
Programming Manual 2-195
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers.
Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Dial
Tone Time
02
03
Input Data
3 ~ 64800 seconds
Busy Tone Timer 0 ~ 64800 seconds
Congestion Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Call Waiting
Tone Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
06
07
Multiline Confirmation Tone
Interval of Call
Waiting Tone
Intrusion Tone
Repeat Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
3 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
09
Conference Tone
Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Warning Beep
Tone Signaling
Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
After getting Intercom dial tone, a telephone user has this time to dial the first digit of the Intercom call.
A Busy Tone when system resources run short. (Such as DTMF receiver resources).
This option sets the time between
Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the time between Off-Hook Signaling alerts.
After a call is interrupted (such as
Barge-In, Voice Mail Conversation
Recording, or Voice Over), the system repeats the Intrusion Tone after this time. Normally, you should enter
0 to disable this time.
Default
30
Related
Program
15
10
10
10
10
0
0
60 14-01-18
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns
2-196 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Caller ID Displaying
Format
0 = First 10 digits (Upper)
1 = Last 10 digits (Lower)
0 ~ 30 seconds
(if displaying digits are more than 12 digits)
Caller ID Wait Timer
Caller ID Edit Mode
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
Wait Facility IE Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Caller ID Sender
Queuing Time (Sender Wait)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Long Distance Code
Up to two digits
Area Code
Calling party Name for ISDN Trunk
Up to six digits
Maximum of 12 digits (0
~ 9, * , #)
When an incoming CO call is received, the
SL1100 starts the timer. It will wait the programmed time for Caller ID information from Telco before connecting the CO call.
If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled (0), no access code will be added to the Caller ID.
If this option is enabled (1), the access code entered in PRG 10-02-02 & 10-02-03 will be added to the beginning of the Caller
ID.
This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine how long the system waits for the
Caller ID name from the Telco.
When a name is programmed in this program this will be the name sent out for all callers that have PRG 15-01-10 enabled.
Default
0
5
0
10
0
1
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Caller ID
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-197
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which are displayed when no Caller ID information is received.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Private Call
Call from Out of Service Area
Call Information with Error
Input Data
24 Alphanumeric Characters
24 Alphanumeric Characters
24 Alphanumeric Characters
Default
PRIVATE
OUT OF AREA
NO CALLER INFO
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Caller ID
2-198 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the
Long Conversation feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Long Conversation Alarm 1
Long Conversation Alarm 2
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
04
05
Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Long Conversation Cutoff for
Outgoing Call
Conversation cutoff for remote monitor
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this time.
After the initial long toll call warning tone, additional warning tones sound after this time.
This timer determines how long the system waits before disconnecting an incoming call.
This timer determines how long the system waits before disconnecting an outgoing call.
Default
170
180
Related
Program
14-01-15
14-01-15
0
0
180
14-01-14
14-01-14
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Long Conversation Cutoff
Programming Manual 2-199
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Delayed ring timer for
CTI
ALERT replay time
(CTI)
Trunk Virtual Bridge -
TSP Driver
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
04
06
The Timer that waits for an off-hook for
Single Line Telephone
3rd Party CTI IP Ad-
dress (V3.0 Added)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0.0.0.0 -
255.255.255.255
Description
Enable or disable the system to send trunk or virtual extension information to the TSP driver.
Read Only:
Displays the IP address of 3rd Party CTI
Server currently connected.
Default
30
8
0
30
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-200 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-25 : ISDN Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
Item Input Data Description
Send the Release
Message After Subscriber Hangs Up
Progress Indicate Information Element
Detect
Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing
Send DT until user dials first digit (Local
Dial Tone)
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
0 = 3.1 KHz Audio
1 = Speech
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
T305 Timer Start After
Sending Disconnect
Message
Call Proceeding Send
Mode
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
Local Busy Tone
Mode Set When Disconnect Message Received
Use of Lower Layer
Compatibility (LLC)
0 = Local Busy Tone Off
1 = Busy Tone from NT
(network side)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message, the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first digit instead of the network.
This Program must be set to (0 = Disable) for International Dialing when using Calling
Number Presentation (CPN) from station.
High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending
S-Point Terminal
Seizes Analog Trunk
Automatic Changing
System Clock When
Date/Time Information Element Received
Call Forward Options
(Auto Connect Send)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Local Busy Tone (Release)
0 = Normal - No Message (Off)
1 = Normal - No Message (On)
0 = Off
1 = On
Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives Alerting Message.
Busy tone sends when T-point receiving a
RELEASE message from Network.
Default
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Programming Manual 2-201
Program
20
Program
20
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
14
15
18
Item Input Data
No Response Release
Send
0 = Off
1 = On
Call Reference selection for PRI 2B-Ch
Transfer
Include CPN on Presentation Restriction
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Not include
1 = Include
19
Send Progress Message on Forward
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Operation mode setting for when second
T303 timer expires.
When the presentation indicator bit is set
(by pressing key 63 in PRG 15-07) the
ISDN setup message is changed as follows:
When set to "Include" the CPN from the station or trunk is sent in the setup message.
When set to "Disable" the CPN from the station or trunk is NOT sent in the setup message.
When enabled if an ISDN call forwards out of the system a Progress Message will be sent for the initial call.
Default
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• ISDN Compatibility
2-202 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each extension service class.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Value (%)
Service Class
Item
100 ~ 500
Input Data
01 ~ 15
Default
100
Conditions
None
Program
20
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-203
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for Trunk to Trunk
Conversation.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Conversation
Continue Code
Input Data Description
0 ~ 9, * , #
(Set for one digit only)
Input the code that can be dialed to continue the conversation after the
Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning
Tone is heard.
02
03
Conversation
Disconnect Code
0 ~ 9, * , #
(Set for one digit only)
Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect the conversation after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard.
Conversation
Continue Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds Input how long the conversation extends when the Conversation Continue Code is dialed.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
0
Related
Program
14-01-25
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
14-01-25
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
14-01-25
20-28-01
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-204 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night
Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension numbers.
The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Timer Class for Extension
0 ~ 15
0 = Not assigned
Input Data
Up to eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-205
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk. There are 16
Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service
Mode. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Timer Class for Trunks
0 ~ 15, #, *
0 = Not assigned
Input Data
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-206 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of service basis.
Input Data
Timer Class Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Trunk Queuing
Callback Duration Time
Callback / Trunk
Queuing Cancel
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Virtual Extension
Delay Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
05
Intercom Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D Timer)
Trunk Interdigits
Time (Trunk I/D
Timer)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
07
Hotline Time
Start Time (Hotline Start)
Ring No Answer
Alarm Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
09
DIL/Incoming
Ring Group No
Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
DID Ring-No-Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 15
Description
Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this amount of time
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this amount of time.
Virtual Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (refer to
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) on page 2-149 ring the exten-
sion after this time.
When placing Intercom calls, extension users must dial each digit in this time.
The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are not allowed until after time expires).
A Ringdown extension automatically calls the programmed destination after this time.
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this time, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long.
A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this time sets the
Ring-No-Answer time. This time is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group.
Default
15
Related
Program
20-01-08
64800
10
10
10
5
60
0
20
20-01-09
20-04-03
21-01-02
21-01-03
21-01-09
22-01-03
22-01-04
22-01-06
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-207
Program
20
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
10
11
Item Input Data
Hold Recall Time
(Non Exclusive
Hold)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Hold Recall Call-
Back Time (Non
Exclusive Hold)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
12
13
14
15
Exclusive Hold
Recall Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Exclusive Hold
Recall Callback
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Park Hold Time -
Normal
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
(Call Forward No
Answer)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
16
17
Transfer Recall
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
DID/DISA No Answer Time (Disconnect or IRG or VM)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time.
This time works with the Hold Recall
Callback Time (Program 24-01-02 ).
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time. This time works with Hold Recall Time or
Park Hold Time. After this time, the system invokes the Hold Recall
Time again. Cycling between time
Program 24-01-01 and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and
24-01-07 continues until a user answers the call.
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time.
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
A call left parked longer than this time interval recalls the extension that initially parked it.
If activated at an extension, Delayed
Call Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets how long a
Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox.
An unanswered transferred call recalls after this time to the extension that initially transferred it.
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No
Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and 25-04).
Default
60 (V1.5
Changed)
30
90
30
Related
Program
24-01-01
60 (V1.5
Changed)
10
24-01-06
24-02-03
20 (V1.5
Changed)
0
24-02-04
25-07-02
60
24-01-02
24-01-03
24-01-04
25-07-03 18
19
20
21
Disconnect after
Re-transfer to
IRG
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
(Trunk to Trunk)
Long Conversation Disconnect
(Trunk to Trunk)
DISA Internal
Paging Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can last before the Long Conversation tone is heard
This time determines how long the system waits before disconnecting a
DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard.
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.
3600
10
30
25-07-07
25-07-08
25-07-09
2-208 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
22
Item
DISA External
Paging Time
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
23
24
25
Page Announcement Duration
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Mobile Extension answer time
1 ~ 64800 seconds
Mobile Extension callback time
1 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
This is the maximum length of an
External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call.
This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only)
Default
30
Related
Program
25-07-10
1200
3
15
31-01-02
22-01-12
20-01-16
Conditions
• These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 16 in 20-29-01 or
20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used.
• All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.
Program
20
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-209
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup
Level:
SA
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote Conference options.
Input Data
Remote Conference Group Number 1 ~ 4
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description Default
Conference Name
Password
Max participants
Max Conference Duration
End Tone Alert Time
Up to 12 characters
4 digits Fixed
(0 ~ 9, @ = wild character)
0 ~ 32
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Enter the name displayed at the time of a
Remote Conference. This entry will display on the keyset LCD.
Define the password of a Remote Conference.
Define the maximum number of participants of a Remote Conference.
Define the maximum duration of a Remote
Conference.
When this time passes, the conference is disconnected by the SL1100.
Determine how long prior disconnecting a
Remote Conference call (based on the maximum conference duration above) the
SL1100 should send out a beep. This is used to warn the conference participants of the pending disconnect.
Group1 = Conf1
Group2 = Conf2
Group3 = Conf3
Group4 = Conf4
Group1 = 1111
Group2 = 2222
Group3 = 3333
Group4 = 4444
8
7200
300
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Conference, Remote
2-210 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension’s Operator Setting
Input Data
0 ~ 15 ( 0 = Not Set)
Up to eight digits
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-211
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Trunk’s Operator Setting
0 ~ 15
(0 = No Setting)
001 ~ 084
Description
Allows the user to select Operator Group per trunk when DISA is being used. After the user enters the 6 digit DISA password if the user dials 0 this command will decide which operator to route the call to.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-212 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in the operator group.
Input Data
Operator Group
Operator Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Operator Extension Group Setup
Up to eight digits
Input Data
1 ~ 15
1 ~ 8
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-213
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone.
Input Data
Operator Group
Item
No.
01
Item
Operator Access
Mode
Input Data
0 = Step
1 = Circular
1 ~ 15
Description
Assign if the operator is called, starting with the first operator, every time (0) or a different operator is tried first (1)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-214 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-42 : Night Mode for each package
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-42 : Night Mode for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package.
This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).
Input Data
PKG Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Ecology Mode group No
1 ~ 4
Input Data Description
02 ~ 12 (V1.5 Changed)
Assign Night mode group number per each package (slot)
Default
1
Related
Program
12-02
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-215
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-43 : Power supply for each package
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-43 : Power supply for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package.
This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).
Input Data
PKG Number
Operation Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Ecology Mode
Input Data
0 = Cut the power
1 = Power Supply
02 ~ 12 (V1.5 Changed)
01 ~ 08
Description
Assigns the power supply mode to each package base
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-216 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-44 : Watch Mode Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-44 : Watch Mode Setup to defines the watch mode.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data
Internal Paging Group for Watch Message
0 ~ 32
0 ~ 8
External Paging
Group for Watch Message
VRS Message for
Watch Mode
0 ~ 100
Interval Timer for
Watch Message
0 ~ 60
Description
Define Internal paging group number for
Watching message.
Define External paging group number for
Watching message
Define VRS number used for Watching message
Define interval time for sending Watching message.
Default
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-217
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-45 : Remote Watch Setup
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-45 : Remote Watch Setup to defines the remote watch.
Input Data
Terminal Number 1 ~ 6
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Ring Terminal for Remote Inspection
Ring Time Setting
Ring Timer
Extension Number (Up to 8 digits)
0000 ~ 2359
0 ~ 60
04
05
06
07
08
09
Auto Dial Number
Area Setting
VRS Message for Answer
VRS Message for Auto Dial
Time of Repeat Auto
Dial
Auto Dial Calling
Time
Interval of Auto Dial
0 ~ 999
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 3600
0 ~ 3600
Description
Extension number for Remote Inspection
Ringing start time for Inspected Extension
Ringing continue time for inspected extension
Speed dial number when detect no answer at extension and make emergency call
VRS message number when inspected extension answered
VRS message number when emergency call destination answered.
Repeat number for making emergency call.
Calling continue time when making emergency call.
Default
No Setting
0000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-218 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-46 : Security Sensor Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-46 : Security Sensor Setup to defines the security sensor.
Input Data
Security Sensor Number 1 ~ 6
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Item
Sensor Mode
0 = Off
1 = On
Internal Paging Group for Warning Message
0 ~ 32
Ring Timer
0 ~ 8
Input Data Description
VRS Message for
Warning
0 ~ 100
Auto Dial Number
Area Setting
VRS Message for Answer
0 ~ 999
0 ~ 100
Auto Dial Wait Timer
0 ~ 64800
Time of Repeat Auto
Dial
Auto Dial Calling
Time
Monitored Terminal
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 64800
Extension Number (Up to 8 digits)
Interval of Auto Dial
0 ~ 3600
Define door port (084M 3, 4) to use as
Sensor.
Define Internal paging group number for
Warning message
Define External paging group number for
Warning message.
Define VRS number used for Warning message.
Define Speed dial number when sensor detects warning.
Define VRS message number when emergency call destination answered.
Define wait time before making emergency auto dial.
Define repeat number for making emergency call.
Define calling continue time when making emergency call.
Define extension number for monitor from outside. IP terminal cannot set as monitored extension.
Default
30
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-219
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode to defines the watch mode time pattern.
Input Data
Time Pattern
Item
No.
01
Item
Watch Mode Time
Pattern
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
01 ~ 08
Description
Define watch mode on/off against time pattern 1-8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-220 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor to defines the Security Sensor time pattern.
Input Data
Time Pattern
Item
No.
01
Item
Security Sensor Time
Pattern
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
01 ~ 08
Description
Define security sensor on/off against time pattern 1-8
Default
0
Program
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-221
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup to defines the function mode for each Caller ID shared group.
Input Data
Caller ID shared group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Group Name
Input Data Description
Maximum 12 characters
Caller ID shared group Name
01 ~ 08
Default Related
Program
Group 1 = Group
Name: Group 1
:
Group 8 = Group
Name: Group 8
15-02-67
Default
Group
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
Conditions
None
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Group Name
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-222 Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 20-55 : Delay Timer for Secuirty Sensor to set time for Security to be operational.
Once it reach the time the Security will starts if the Security sets manually.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Sensor delay timer
Input Data
0 ~ 3600 (seconds)
0 = Sensor will start immediately
Default
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
20
Programming Manual 2-223
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing
Call Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Seizure Trunk
Line Mode
Input Data
0 = Priority Route
1 = Circular Route
02
03
Intercom Interdigit Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Trunk Interdigit
Time (External)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Dial Tone Detection Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Disconnect Time when Dial Tone not Detected
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
07
Dial Pause at
First Digit
Toll Restriction
Override Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
09
Preset Dial Display Hold Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline Start)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Select the trunk based off the Trunk
Route Priority (0) or based off the trunk that has not been used in the longest time (1).
When placing Intercom calls, extension users must dial each digit in this time.
The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In is not allowed until after time expires).
If dial tone detection is enabled, the system waits this time for the Telco to return dial tone. When the time expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this time (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0.
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system skips over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS,
Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
After dialing the Toll Restriction
Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction from the extension for this time.
A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this time.
Default
0
Related
Program
14-05
14-06
10
5
5
3
10
5
1
10
14-02-08
14-02-05
20-08-06
21-07
20-08-09
21-11
2-224 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Item Input Data Description
Dial Digits for
Toll Restriction
Path
0 ~ 36 If this option is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call.
This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when dialing 911 (USA only). Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path, preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at its default setting of 0 to prevent any problems with dialing 911 (USA only).
Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction Path Control
Dial E911 Routing Without
Trunk Access
Alarm Ring Timer (E911)
Forced Account
Code Inter-digit
Timer
Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
(Toll Restriction)
0 ~ 60 seconds
0 = Trunk Access Code
Required
1 = Trunk Access Code
Not Required
If enabled (1), an extension user can dial 911 (USA only) without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an extension user must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key before dialing 911 (USA only).
0, 1~ 64800 seconds
(0 = Off)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Use this option to set the duration of the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for
0, the E911 Alarm does not ring.
If the user does not enter the account code in the amount of time specified in this program the call will be restricted.
Enable or disable the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature.
16
17
18
19
Supervise Dial
Detection Timer
Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
Reset Dial After
Failure of Trunk
Access
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Digits 1 ~ 9
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Do-Not-Call-Setup
0 = No service
1 = Extented common restriction
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line, the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver.
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, determine the number of digits to be dialed before the call should be disconnected.
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to continue to dial codes or extensions after receiving Trunk Busy.
This needs to be set to Enabled (1) for the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to work.
Default
0
Related
Program
0
1
0
3
0
20
4
1
0
11-12-56
20-08-16
15-01-05
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
15-01-05
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
15-01-05
21-01-15
21-01-16
80-03-01
15-01-07
Program
21
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-225
Program
21
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Placing
ISSUE 3.01
2-226 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table Number
Input Data
0 ~ 25
0 = No Setting (Calls will not route.)
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
14-06
14-01-07
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-227
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic
External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table Number
0 ~ 25
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
14-06
14-07-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Trunk Group Routing
2-228 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06.
A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Restriction Class
Input Data
1 ~ 15 = Toll Class 1 ~ 15
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
2
Related
Program
14-01-08
21-05
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-229
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes (1 ~ 15).
Input Data
Toll Restriction Class Number 1 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
International Call
Restriction Table
International Call
Permit Code Table
Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment
0 = Unassign (No international restrict table applied.)
1 = Assign (Table in
PRG 21-06-01 is applied.)
0 = Unassign (No international permit table applied.)
1 = Assign (Table in
PRG 21-06-02 is applied.)
0 = No Table Applied
1 ~ 4 = Tables 1 ~ 4
( Defined in PRG
21-06-03)
This option assigns/unassigns the
International Call Restrict Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. Enter International
Call Restrict Table data in Program
21-06-01.
This option assigns/unassigns the
International Call Permit Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. Enter International
Call Permit Table data in Program
21-06-02.
Select the table (defined in
21-06-03) to be used to determine the maximum number of digits allowed for outgoing calls.
Default Related
Program
Class No1, 6 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 ~ 5 : 1
21-06-01
Class No1, 3 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 : 1
21-06-02
Common Permit
Code Table
Common Restriction Table
Permit Code Table
0 = Unassign (No common permit table applied.)
1 = Assign (Table in
PRG 21-06-04 is applied.)
0 = Unassign (No common restrict table applied.)
1 = Assign (Table in
PRG 21-06-05 is applied.)
0 = No Permit Table
Assigned
1 ~ 4 = Permit Tables 1
~ 4 (assigned in PRG
21-06-06)
Restriction Table 0 = No Permit Table
Assigned
1 ~ 4 = Restrict Tables
1 ~ 4 (assigned in PRG
21-06-07)
It chooses whether the table set up by 21-06-04 is referred to, or not referred to.
It chooses whether the table set up by 21-06-05 is referred to, or not referred to.
Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring to the table set up by 21-06-06.
Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring to the table set up by 21-06-07.
Class No1 ~ 2, 6
~ 15 : 0
Class No3 : 1
Class No4 : 2
Class No5 : 3
21-06-03
Class No1, 8 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 ~ 7 : 1
21-06-04
Class No1, 6 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 ~ 5 : 1
21-06-05
Class No1 ~ 2, 6
~ 15 : 0
Class No3 : 1
Class No4 : 2
Class No5 : 3
0
21-06-06
21-06-07
2-230 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
09
10
11
12
13
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
Restriction for
Common Speed
Dials
Restriction for
Group Speed Dials
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following Restriction Check
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following Restriction Check
Use this option to enable/disable
Toll Restriction for Common Speed
Dialing numbers. If enabled, System
Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers.
Use this option to enable/disable
Toll Restriction for Group Speed Dialing numbers. If enabled, Group
Speed Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers.
Intercom Call Restriction
0 = Disable (ICM call not restricted.)
1 = Enable (ICM call restricted.)
Determines if incoming and outgoing intercom calls are allowed.
PBX Call Restriction
Restriction of Tie
Line Calls
0 = Disable (PBX/CTX call not restricted.)
1 = Enable (PBX/CTX call restricted.)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Use this option to set how the system Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Restriction, the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access code.
The user cannot dial a PBX extension. If you disable PBX Toll Restriction, the system only restricts calls that contain the PBX access code.
The system does not restrict calls to
PBX extensions. Refer to the PBX compatibility feature. Make sure
Program 21-05-04 (Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment) allows for PBX Toll Call Dialing (normally 12 digits).
It chooses whether the toll restriction of the dial set up by 34-08 is enabled or disabled.
0
0
0
Class 1 ~ 6 = 0
Class 7 = 1
Class 8 ~ 15 = 0
0 34-08
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-231
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data. Dial
1 ~ 9, 0, * , # can be entered in each table.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Table Input Data Default
International Call Restriction Table
This option lets you program the Restrict Table for international calls.
The system has 10 International Call Restrict
Tables.
Each entry can have up to four digits.
International Call Permit Code Table
This option lets you program the Permit Table for international calls.
The system has 20 International Call Permit
Tables.
Each entry can have up to six digits.
Maximum Number Digits Table Assignment
This option selects the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table.
Common Permit Code Table
This option lets you program the Common
Permit Code Table.
This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly allow users to dial.
Common Restriction Table
This option lets you program the Common
Restrict Code Table.
This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly prevent users from dialing.
Permit Code Table
This option lets you program the Permit
Code Tables.
If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users can dial numbers only if permitted by these tables and the Common Permit Table
(21-06-04).
There are four Permit Code Tables, with up to 200 entries in each table.
The system permits calls exactly as you enter the code.
[caption: table]
1 ~ 10
[caption: table]
1 ~ 20
[caption: table]
1 ~ 4
Dial (Up to four digits)
Dial (Up to six digits)
4 ~ 30
Tables 1 ~ 10 = No Setting
Tables 1 ~ 20 = No Setting
Tables 1 ~ 4 = 30
[caption: table]
1 ~ 10
[caption: table]
1 ~ 10
[caption: table]
1 ~ 4 (table)
001 ~ 200 (Entry)
Dial (Up to four digits)
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
Table 1 = 911
Table 2 = 1800
Table 3 = 1888
Table 4 =1822
Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 =1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No Setting
Table 1 = 900
Table 2 = 1900
Table 3 = 976
Tables 4 ~ 10 = No setting
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No Setting
2-232 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
07
08
09
Item
Deny Restriction Table
This option lets you program the Restrict
Code Tables.
If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users cannot dial numbers listed in these tables.
There are four Restrict Code Tables, with up to 60 entries in each table.
The system restricts calls exactly as you enter the code.
PBX Access Code
Use this option to enter the PBX Access
Code.
When the system is behind a PBX, this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code.
For PBX trunks (Program 14-04) the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the access code.
Always program this option when the system is behind a PBX, even if you don’t want to use Toll Restriction.
PBX Access Codes can have up to two digits, using 0-9, #, * and LINE KEY 1 (don’t care).
When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code. Otherwise, after the * , the trunk stops sending digits to the central office.
Entries 1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access
Codes.
Each code can have up to two digits.
Specific Dial Outgoing Code
Table Input Data
[caption: table]
1 ~ 4
Dial (Up to two digits)
Default
[caption: table]
1 ~ 4 (table)
1 ~ 60 (Entry)
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No Setting
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No Setting
10
Outgoing Call Code Setup
[caption: table]
1 ~ 20
[caption: table]
1 ~ 20
Dial (Up to eight digits)
Dial (Up to four digits)
Tables 1 ~ 20 = No Setting
Tables 1 ~ 20 = No Setting
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-233
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level:
SA
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and * .
Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Password
Item
Four Digits (Fixed)
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
21-01-07
20-08-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-234 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Repeat Redial Count
0 ~ 255
02
03
Repeat Redial Interval
Time
Repeat Dial Calling
Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Time for Send Busy
Tone for ISDN Trunk
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Sets how many times a Repeat Redial automatically repeats if the call does not go through.
Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts.
After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial maintains the call after this time. After this time, the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again.
Sets the time (sec) to send out Busy Tone with an ISDN line, when called party is busy.
Default
3
60
30
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
21
Programming Manual 2-235
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial
Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Toll Restriction Class
With Dial Block
1 ~ 15
Supervisor Password 0 ~ 9,
*
, #
(4-digit fixed)
Description
Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block feature is used.
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial
Block for other extensions.
Default
15
No Setting
Conditions
• This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-236 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction
Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll
Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Toll Restriction Class
0, 1 ~ 15
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
21
Programming Manual 2-237
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination number for each extension number.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Extension Number
Item
Hotline Destination Number
1 ~ 0,
*
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
, #, Pause, Hook Flash, @ (Code to wait for answer supervision) (maximum 36 digits)
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
20-08-09
21-01-09
Conditions
• The @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto
Attendant. This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not supported.
Feature Cross Reference
• Ringdown Extension (Hotline), Internal/External
2-238 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party
Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21-12.
If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Calling Party Number
Data
Maximum of 16 digits (0
~ 9, * , #)
Most Telco's will only accept 10 digits.
This program is used to assign a calling party number per trunk.
If CPN information is programmed on both the trunk and station when a call is made the CPN from the station will be sent to the
Telco.
Default
No Setting
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• ISDN Compatibility
Programming Manual 2-239
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Level:
IN
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a
Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling
Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in
Program 21-12.
If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Calling Party Number Data
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
Maximum of 16 digits (0 ~ 9,
*
, #)
Most Telco's will only accept 10 digits.
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• ISDN Compatibility
2-240 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll
Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code has six digits, using any combination of 0 ~
9, # and * .
Input Data
ID Table Number 1 ~ 100
Item
No.
01
02
Item
User ID
Walking Toll Restriction Class
Number
Dial (Six digits)
1 ~ 15
Input Data Default
No Setting
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Code Restriction/Toll Restriction
Program
21
Programming Manual 2-241
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to
Program
11-09 : Trunk Access Code on page 2-66
when setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing on page 2-115
to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table Number
Input Data
0 ~ 25
0 = No Setting (Calls will not route.)
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Placing
2-242 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking to assign Program 14-06 routes for a networked system. This is required to seize the trunk in a networked system (Extension in System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B).
The route number is specified for each system ID (01 ~ 04).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table
Number
System ID
Day/Night Mode
Input Data Description
0 ~ 25
0 = No Setting (Calls will not route.)
If a call comes in from across the network, this program determines the route table (PRG 14-06-01) that will be accessed in the local system.
01 ~ 04
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
14-06-01
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Networking, AspireNet
Programming Manual 2-243
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party number for individual trunks.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Calling Party Number (V2.0
Changed)
Up to 16 digits
(1 ~ 0, * , #)
Input Data
001 ~ 084
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
15-01-04
20-08-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-244 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension
Description
Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP calling party number for an individual extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Calling Party Number
Up to 16 Digits
(1 ~ 0, * , #)
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
15-01-04
20-08-13
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-245
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
SB
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension to set the SIP Trunk Call
Discernment.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Discernment Tone
Input Data
Up to eight digits
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-246 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis
Setting)
Description
Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to define the toll restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined by Programs 21-05 and 21-06.
This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Day/Night Mode 1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure mode)
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 = Toll Class 1 ~
15
Per Day/Night Mode assign a toll restriction class to each trunk.
It is recommended to not use class
2, because by default all stations are assigned in class 2.
Default
1
Related
Program
14-01-08
21-05
Program
21
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-247
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings
Level:
IN
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings to define the settings of
CO Message Waiting Indication.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data Description
CO MWI Call Back Enabling
0 = No VMWI Service
1 = Enable VMWI Service
CO MWI Call Back
Number Area Setting
0 ~ 999
Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back.
Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI
Call Back.
Default
0
999
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-248 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming calls.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
Item Input Data Description
Incoming Call
Priority
Incoming Call
Ring No Answer
Alarm
Ring No Answer
Alarm Time
DIL No Answer
Recall Time
DID Ring-No-Answer Time
0 = Intercom Call Priority
1 = Trunk Call Priority
Use this option to determine if Intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
If enabled, an incoming call that rings longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (22-01-03), changes to a unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ringing too long. If disabled, this does not occur.
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = No Overflow
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long.
A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this sets the Ring-
No-Answer time. This time is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group.
DID Incoming
Ring Group No
Answer Time
DID Pilot Call No
Answer Time
DID to Trunk to
Trunk no answer timer
VRS Waiting
Message Operation
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Enable Always
1 = Change by Manual
Operation
Set up the operation mode for Auto
Attendant and Queuing Message.
Default
1
Related
Program
15-02-22
0
60
0
20
20
60
20
0
22-01-03
22-01-04
22-01-02
22-12
22-14
22-15
22-08
22-04
22-01-04
20-15-11
15-07
Program
22
Programming Manual 2-249
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
11
Item Input Data
VRS Waiting
Message Interval
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
12
Mobile Extension answer time
0~ 64800 seconds
Description
Setup the sending duration time of the Auto - Attendant & Queuing.
The message is repeatedly sent out during the specified time.
Default
20
3
Related
Program
22-14-06
22-15-06
41-11-06
15-22-04
Program
22
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
2-250 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk.
There is one item for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Type
Input Data Description
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial tone if no VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID (DDI) Mode
Switching
Use this option to set the feature type for the trunk you are programming.
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Related
Program
14-04
Program
22
Conditions
• When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the Telco connected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 unit must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1 unit to sync.
• When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04 for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.
• When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming Manual 2-251
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level:
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available.
Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
Item
Ring Tone Pattern
Input Data Description
0 = Ring Tone Pattern
1
1 = Ring Tone Pattern
2
2 = Ring Tone Pattern
3
3 = Ring Tone Pattern
4
4 = Melody 1
5 = Melody 2
6 = Melody 3
7 = Melody 4
8 = Melody 5
9 = Ring Tone Pattern
5 (V3.0 Added)
10 = Ring Tone Pattern
6 (V3.0 Added)
11 = Ring Tone Pattern
7 (V3.0 Added)
12 = Ring Tone Pattern
8 (V3.0 Added)
Use this program to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available.
Default
0
Related
Program
15-02
Table 2-6 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
2000Hz
1400Hz
1100Hz
2000Hz
1400Hz
1100Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
760Hz
660Hz
540Hz
760Hz
660Hz
540Hz
Modulation
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
2-252 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 5 (V3.0 Added)
Pattern 6 (V3.0 Added)
Pattern 7 (V3.0 Added)
Pattern 8 (V3.0 Added)
Type
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Selectable Ring Tones
Frequency 1
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
2000Hz
2000Hz
1100Hz
2000Hz
2000Hz
1100Hz
Frequency 2
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
1100Hz
540Hz
760Hz
1100Hz
540Hz
760Hz
SL1100
Modulation
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Program
22
Programming Manual 2-253
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level:
SA
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring
Group (IRG) can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned.
There are 25 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Extension Number
Maximum eight Digits Use this program to assign extensions (up to 32) to Ring Groups.
Calls ring extensions according to
Ring Group programming.
01 ~ 25
Default
Group01 has
101, 102, 103,
104, 105, 106,
107, and 108
(First 8 ports ringing)
Related
Program
22-02
22-05
22-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Ring Groups
2-254 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring
Groups. There are 25 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Incoming Group
Number (V1.5
Changed)
0 = No Setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming
Ring group
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM
Use this program to assign Normal
Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming
Ring Groups (22-04).
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
22-04
22-06
Program
22
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Ring Groups
Programming Manual 2-255
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level:
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Group Number
0 = No Ring
1 = Ring
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
22-04
22-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
2-256 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling
Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or
Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. Use Program
22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
Item
Number of Transferring Destination
Input Data
Assign extension or department group number for DIL trunk
Extension Number (maximum eight digits)
Default
No Setting
Program
22
Conditions
• Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Programming Manual 2-257
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level:
IN
Program
22
Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL
No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires
(Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Group Number (V1.5
Changed)
Input Data
0 = No Setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring group
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
Group01 has 101, 102,
103, 104, 105, 106,
107, and 108 (First 8 ports ringing)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Line (DIL)
• Ring Group
2-258 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for each trunk group.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
Expected Number of
Digits
Received Vacant
Number Operation
Sub-Addressing
Mode
DID Receiving Mode for ISDN
Local Code Digits
Local Code
Pilot Code
T302 Time-out Operation
1 ~ 8
0 = Disconnect (call denied)
1 = Transfer (call routed to PRG 22-12) (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group. on page 2-265
)
Enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the Telco. Use this program to make the system compatible with 3- and 4-digit DID service. If ISDN trunks, we analyze the last digits that are set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID, it analyzes the first digits that are assigned here.
If the system receives a DID that is not routed this program sets what the system does with the call.
If the setting data is a (0), Disconnect, the system will deny the call.
If the setting data is a (1), Transfer, the call will be routed to the ring group specified in
PRG 22-12-01.
0 = Extension # Specify
(Intercom)
1 = DID Conversion Table
0 = Enbloc Receiving
1 = Overlap Receiving
0 ~ 15 (0 = No Local
Code)
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
Dial (maximum 16 digits) (Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
Dial (1 digit : 0 ~ 9) (Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
0 = Disconnect (Cut)
1 = Transfer (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group. on page 2-265
)
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
Default
4
0
0
0
0
No Setting
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Program
22
Programming Manual 2-259
Program
22
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
ISSUE 3.01
2-260 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables.
There are 800 (V1.5 or higher) Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation
Tables.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
Item
No.
01
Item
1st Area Setup (Start Address)
1st Area Setup (End Address)
2nd Area Setup (Start Address)
2nd Area Setup (End Address)
Input Data
0 ~ 800
(0 = No Setting)
01 ~ 20
Default
Refer below
Program
22
Default
Conversion Table Area
:
5
20
3
4
1
2
Start Table
1
201
401
601
0
:
0
1st
End Table
200
400
600
800
0
:
0
Conditions
None
Start Table
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
2nd
End Table
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual 2-261
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level:
SA
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry (800).
• The digits received by the system (eight maximum)
• The extension the system dials after translation (36 digits maximum)
• The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12 characters maximum)
• The Transfer Target - 1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination (Program 22-10).
• Operation Mode
Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
0
Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
*
#
Clear/Back
Flash
Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex :
TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Input Data
Conversion Table Number 001 ~ 800
2-262 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Received Number
Target Number
DID Name
Maximum eight digits
(0 ~ 9, * , #)
Maximum 36 digits
(0 ~ 9, * , #, @)
This is the received DID digits.
Enter the destination number to which the
DID number is sent.
Maximum 12 characters This is the name that is assigned to the
DID digits when it rings the extension.
Transfer Operation
Mode
Transfer Destination
Number 1
Transfer Destination
Number 2
0 = No Transfer
1 = Busy
2 = No Answer
3 = Busy/No Answer
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring
Group
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM
(V1.5 Added)
201 ~ 232 = Department
Group
400 = VRS
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = Valid Extension Number/VRS Message (V2.0 Change)
(VRS Message No.)
1000 ~ 1999 = Common
ABB Dial (000 ~ 999)
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring
Group
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM
(V1.5 Added)
201 ~ 232 = Department
Group
400 = VRS
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = Valid Extension Number/VRS Message (V2.0 Change)
(VRS Message No.)
1000 ~ 1999 = Common
ABB Dial (000 ~ 999)
Call Waiting
Maximum Number of
DID Calls
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 ~ 084 (0 = No limit)
0 = No Limit (Can receive as many calls as you have available trunks.)
Music on Hold Source 0 = IC/MOH Port
1 = BGM Port
The transfer operation mode allows DID calls to have more routing options than just the target number. If the transfer operation mode is set to "No Transfer" calls will only be delivered to the Target Number specified in PRG 22-11-02. If set to one of the three other modes, it will follow that mode through all assigned transfer destinations.
400 - Allow the outside party to dial a different extension number in the translation table (for example, ring no answer to a dialed number, the caller then hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter another Valid
Extension Number).
401 - Provide the caller with DISA dialing options (requires using the DISA password).
This applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.
Program 20-09-07 overrides this setting.
Per DID translation table a DID can be limited to only accept a certain amount of calls. If a call is delivered to the system when the limit has been reached, the outside caller will receive a busy tone.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
Program
22
Programming Manual 2-263
Program
22
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
11
Item Input Data Description
Incoming Ring Group
Transfer
0 = Disable (Calls will not be routed to PRG
22-12.)
1 = Enable (Calls will be routed to PRG 22-12.)
Enable (1) or disable (0) each conversation tables ability to follow the Ring Group programming defined in Program
22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group. If
Program 22-11-05 (DID Translation Number Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 1) and Program 22-11-06 (DID
Translation Number Conversion, Transfer
Destination Number 2) are set, the priority of transferring is in this order (Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06) then if
Program 22-11-11 is enabled, the calls will overflow from Transfer Destination Number 2 to the destination programmed in
PRG 22-12-01.
If the terminal is in Power Cutting mode from the ecology feature this command will not be applied.
Default
1
Conditions
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2-264 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level:
IN
Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first destination group for DID calls.
Depending on the entry in Programs 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route to the first destination group by the following:
• Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no station unit is installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
• Busy intercept
• Ring-no-answer intercept
If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk.
If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.
For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed, but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Group Number (V1.5
Changed)
Input Data
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring group
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM
01 ~ 20
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Program
22
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual 2-265
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level:
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk
Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a
Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Conversion Table Area Number
0 ~ 20
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
1 ~ 25
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2-266 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1 ~ 25
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
1 st
Delayed Message
Start Time
1 st
Delayed Message
Number
1 st
Delayed Message
Sending Count
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255 (time)
04
05
06
07
2 nd
Delayed Message
Number
2 nd
Delayed Message
Sending Count
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255 (time)
Tone Kind at Message Interval
Disconnect Time After the End of VRS
Delayed Message
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = No Disconnect
Description
Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for IRG.
VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed Message.
This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not played.
VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message.
This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay Message is not played.
What is heard between the Delay Message.
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played, before the caller is disconnected.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
22
Programming Manual 2-267
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level:
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department
(Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message. There are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number 01 ~ 32
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
1 st
Delayed Message
Start Time
1 st
Delayed Message
Number
1 st
Delayed Message
Sending Count
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0~255 (time)
04
05
06
07
2 nd
Delayed Message
Number
2 nd
Delayed Message
Sending Count
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255 (time)
Tone Kind at Message Interval
Disconnect Time After the End of VRS
Delayed Message
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = No Disconnect
Description
Time before the VRS Delay Message is played for Department Group.
VRS message that is used for the 1st Delayed Message.
This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st Delay Message is not played.
VRS message that is used for the 2nd Delayed Message.
This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd Delay Message is not played.
What is heard between the Delay Message.
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are played, before the caller is disconnected.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Group
2-268 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for
Private Call Refuse.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Speed Dial Group
Number
Input Data Description
0 ~ 32
0 = No Group Assigned
(Caller ID refuse will not function.)
This program is used to assign a speed dial group (1 ~ 32) to be used for the caller
ID refuse number matching storage.
Default
0
Program
22
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Department Group
Programming Manual 2-269
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time
Pattern
Level:
SA
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.
Input Data
Conversion Table Number 001 ~ 500 (V2.0 Changed)
Time Pattern Number 1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Received Dial
Start of Time
03
04
05
End of Time
Dial-In Conversion
Table Number
Day of week (V2.0
Added)
Input Data Description
Up to eight digits
0000 ~ 2359 (Time)
0000 ~ 2359 (Time)
Define the Starting Time for each DID
Translation table in PRG 22-17-01.
Define the Ending Time for each DID
Translation table in PRG 22-17-01.
1 ~ 800 (These are the table entries in PRG
22-11.)
1: Sun
2: Mon
3: Tue
4: Wed
5: Thu
6: Fri
8: Sun
9: Holiday
0 = Off
1 = On
Assign Day of Week for each DID conversion table.
Default
No Setting
0000
0000
0
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-270 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern for Private Calls.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data Description
Transfer Mode
0 = Not Defined (Private call will not transfer to a user in the system, can be routed to
VRS message in PRG
40-10-06.)
1 = Internal Dial (Specified in PRG 22-18-02)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group (Specified in
PRG 22-04)
Leave this program set to (0) Not
Defined to route the Private caller to a VRS message to refuse the call.
This program can also be used to route the Private caller to an internal destination (PRG 22-18-02) or a
Ring Group (PRG 22-04).
Destination Number
1 = Internal Dial (up to
36 digits)
0 ~ 9, * , #, P, R, @
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
0 ~ 25
Incoming Ring
Pattern
Incoming Ring Pattern
(0 ~ 13) (V3.0
Changed)
0 = Normal pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone pattern (1
~ 4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale pattern (1
~ 5)
10 ~ 13 = Tone pattern
(5 ~ 8) (V3.0 Added)
Default
0
No Setting
0
Related
Program
14-01-27
15-02-02
40-10-06
14-01-27
15-02-02
40-10-06
14-01-27
15-02-02
40-10-06
Program
22
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-271
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level:
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer pattern mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Flexible Ringing
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Input Data
001 ~ 084
01 ~ 08
Default
1
Related
Program
13-04
14-01-30
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-272 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.
There are 32 available Call Pickup Groups.
Program
23
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Priority
Extension Number
Group Number
Input Data
1 ~ 999
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 32
Description
Use this program to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups other than the extension group set up by a
Program 16-02.
Default Related
Program
1 - xxx
(Note; default value follows the port order of
PRG11-02 or
PRG11-04.)
11-12-26
11-12-27
11-12-28
15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Group Call Pickup
Programming Manual 2-273
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level:
IN
Program
23
Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call.
You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line
Preference feature in the SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information.
Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table
Number
0 ~ 25
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 8
Description
Use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions.
When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).
Default
0
Related
Program
14-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Line Preference
• Night Service
2-274 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone.
There are 50 available Virtual Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Priority Order
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Extension Group
Number
0 ~ 32
(0 = No Setting)
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 4
Description
When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key, this program determines the priority for automatically answering the ringing calls when the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, when the user lifts the handset, the user answers a ringing call from any group.
Default
0
Related
Program
16-02
Program
23
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Virtual Extensions
Programming Manual 2-275
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level:
IN
Program
24
Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Hold Recall Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
Hold Recall Callback Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
04
05
Exclusive Hold
Recall Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Exclusive Hold
Recall Callback
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Forced Release of Held Call
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
07
Park Hold Time -
Normal
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Park Hold Time -
Extended (Recall)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time.
This time works with the Hold Recall
Callback Time (Item 2).
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time. This time works with Hold Recall Time or
Park Hold Time. After this time, the system invokes the Hold recall time again. Cycling between time 01 and
02 and 06 and 07 continues until a user answers the call.
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time.
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
Depending on the setting of Program 14-01-16, the system disconnects calls on Hold longer than this time.
A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it.
A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it.
Default
60 (V1.5
Changed)
30
90
30
1800
Related
Program
14-01-16
60 (V1.5
Changed)
300
20-31-14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Hold
• Park
2-276 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Busy Transfer
Input Data
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
02
MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls
0 = Hold Tone
1 = Ring Back Tone
03
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
05
Transfer Recall
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Message Wait
Ring Interval
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Release
Warning Tone
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
Delayed Transfer
Time for all Department Groups
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to Transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to busy extensions recall immediately.
Use this option to enable or disable
MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller hears MOH while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension.
If activated at an extension, Delayed
Call Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets how long a
Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox.
An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this time.
For Single Line Telephones (SLTs) without message waiting lamps, this is the time between intermittent ringing. If this value is set to 0, the system rings once.
Time starts when a trunk begins talking with another trunk (for example : trunk-to-trunk transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking).
When this time expires, a warning tone is heard. If Program 24-02-10 is set, the conversation disconnects after time expires. This time is set again when the external digit timer expires. One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or leased line).
Default
1
10
Related
Program
1 (V1.5
Changed)
20-03-02
20 (V1.5
Changed)
30
20-31-16
1800
10
20-31-15
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-10
11-11-28
11-11-29
15-07-59
Program
24
Programming Manual 2-277
Program
24
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
09
10
Item
Two B-Channel
Transfer Retry
Timer
Disconnect
Trunk-to-Trunk
Input Data
0 ~ 30 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
11
12
13
15
No Answer Step
Transfer
No Answer
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Hook Flash
Sending Timer
When the System Answers Automatically
0 ~ 64800 seconds
SIP Out of Range
Timer (V3.0 Added)
0 ~ 30 seconds
Time before sending the hook flash for Call Forward Centrex.
When not receiving any response within this timer setting, the system determines that the SIP terminal is out of range. When set to 0, timer is invalid.
Default
10
0
10
0
Related
Program
10-03-16
(PRI)
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
14-01-26
14-01-26
2
4
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Transfer
2-278 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-03 : Park Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in own group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Park Group Number
1 ~ 64
Input Data Description
Maximum eight digits
Assign an extension to a Park
Group. The system allows a total of
64 Park Groups.
Default
1
Related
Program
15-07-01
Program
24
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Park
Programming Manual 2-279
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Level:
IN
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Program
24
Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Speed Dial Area Number
0 ~ 999
Default
999
Description
The destination telephone number of the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number registered into the Speed Dial. Use this program to setup the Speed Dial Bin
Number.
Related
Program
11-10-08
13-04
24-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2-280 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group.
There are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Speed Dial Area
Number
0 ~ 999
Description
The Speed Dialing area is used to program the destination number of the transferred telephone number when a Department Group call is transferred using the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding feature.
01 ~ 32
1 ~ 8
Default
999
Related
Program
11-11-27
13-04
24-04
Program
24
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Transfer
Programming Manual 2-281
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level:
IN
Program
24
Description
Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the destination number for each extension/virtual extension. The destination can have up to 24 digits, using 0 ~ 9, * , #, and @. Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-premise.
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol.
Pause can be set by LK 1.
Input Data
Extension Number Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Call Forwarding Type
CO Call Forwarding Destination for
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer
0 = No Call Forwarding
1 = Call Forward Both
2 = Call Forward No Answer
3 = Call Forward All
4 = Call Forward Busy No Answer
5 = Call Forward Busy
Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9,
Changed)
*
, #, @, P, R) (V1.5
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol
03
04
05
06
07
Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Call, No Answer
CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Call Forwarding Destination for
CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer
Call Forwarding Destination for
CTX/PBX for Busy
Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9,
Changed)
* , #, @, P, R) (V1.5
Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9,
Changed)
Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9,
Changed)
Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9,
Changed)
*
, #, @, P, R) (V1.5
* , #, @, P, R) (V1.5
* , #, @, P, R) (V1.5
Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, * , #, @, P, R) (V1.5
Changed)
Default
0
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
2-282 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
• Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
SL1100
Program
24
Programming Manual 2-283
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/
DISA line.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS/DISA Dial - In Mode
02
03
DISA User ID
VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm
001 ~ 084
Input Data
0 = Extension Number Service Code Specify (Intercom)
1 = Use Dial Conversion Table
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Normal (Off)
1 = Alarm (On)
Default
0
1
0
Related
Program
22-11
25-08
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-284 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the
Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Message (Talkie) Source 0 = No Talkie
1 = VRS
3 = SLT
Additional Data
1 = 01 ~ 100 (VRS Message Number)
3 = 01 ~ 32 (Station Group Number)
Default
Talkie Type = 1
Additional Data = 1
Program
25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual 2-285
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect
Dialing
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Group Number
Input Data
0 = Disconnect
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group
102 = VMI
103 = Centralized VM (V1.5 Added)
104 = Assign the Speed Dial Number (V3.0 Added)
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Related
Program
22-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-286 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
Level:
IN
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/
Busy
Description
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Group Number
Input Data
0 = Disconnect
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group
102 = VMI
103 = Centralized VM (V1.5 Added)
104 = Assign the Speed Dial Number (V3.0 Added)
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Related
Program
22-04
Program
25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual 2-287
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level:
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers, enter the VRS message (1 ~ 100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no error message), the call reroutes according to Programs 25-03 and 25-04.
For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS Message Number
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-288 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator,
Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (refer to Programs 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:
• The digit the VRS caller dials (0 ~ 9, * , #). Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits, outside callers cannot dial system extensions.
• The destination reached (Maximum eight digits ) when the caller dials the specified digit.
The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message.
Example:
Message Number = 01, Destination = 2, Next Message Number = 0, Dial = 399
In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to 399. This means that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users during/after VRS Message 01.
Input Data
Attendant Message Number 01 ~ 100
Received Dial 1 ~ 9, 0, * , #
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data Description
Next Attendant Message Number
0 ~ 100 (0 = No Setting)
101 = Voice Mail answers
105 = Dial the other extension
106 =record VRS
Defines the next attendant message number or destination number for each 1-digit access code in Automated Attendant service
Destination Number Up to eight digits
Must be a valid extension number that is programmed in command 11-02 or
11-04.
Default
0
No Setting
Program
25
Programming Manual 2-289
Program
25
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Conditions
• Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined here.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)
2-290 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system timers which affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS/DISA Dial
Tone Time
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
Disconnect after
VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
05
07
Calling Time to
Automatic Answering Telephone Set
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by Automatic Answering Telephone
Set
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial during this time, the system drops the call.
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No
Answer routing (set in Programs
25-03 and 25-04).
From DISA trunk, when the call may go to Incoming Ring Group of Programs 25-03 and 25-04. This setting determines how long the call is ringing in the IRG.
Set the answering waiting time of the automatic answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is received.
Set the announcement time of the automatic answering extension after which an incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected.
Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard.
This time determines how long the system waits before disconnecting a
DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard.
Default
10
Related
Program
25-04
0
60
10
10
3600
10
25-04
20-31-17
20-31-18
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
20-31-19
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
Program
25
Programming Manual 2-291
Program
25
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
09
Item
DISA Internal
Paging Time
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10
DISA External
Paging Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
11
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
13
VRS/DISA Busy
Tone Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
14
Delayed VRS Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.
This is the maximum length of an
External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this time, the system terminates the DISA call.
Sets up the time the system waits after receiving an incoming VRS/
DISA call before the system automatically answers the call.
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this time before disconnecting.
Assign the delay time from switching from a normal incoming status to
DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the call switches to DID mode immediately.
Default
30
Related
Program
20-31-21
30
0
5
10
20-31-22
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-292 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are
15 users each with one 6-digit password.
Input Data
DISA User Number
Item
No.
01
Password
Item Input Data
Dial (Fixed - six digits)
0 ~ 9, * , #
01 ~ 15
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Program
25
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual 2-293
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level:
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of
Service options in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Function Class
Item
1 ~ 15
Input Data
1 ~ 15
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Conditions
• DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.
• Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-294 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06.
Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA
Class of Service (1 ~ 15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Program
25
Input Data
DISA User Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table Number
0 ~ 25
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
1 ~ 15
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual 2-295
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Program
25
Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a
Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the
DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Toll Restriction Class
1 ~ 15
Input Data
1 ~ 15
1 ~ 8
Default
2
Conditions
• Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-296 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk routes.
Input Data
DISA User Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table Number
0 ~ 25
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data
1 ~ 15
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Conditions
• You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Trunk Group Routing
Program
25
Programming Manual 2-297
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level:
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
VRS Message Access
Password
1 ~ 9, 0, * , #
(Fixed six digits)
Description
Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and/or erase the VRS messages.
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)
2-298 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial tone times-out, or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is busy.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
DISA Transfer Target Area At
Wrong Dial
Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999
DISA Transfer Target Area At
No Answer or Busy
Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
999
999
Related
Program
25-03-01
25-04-01
Program
25
Conditions
• Related to Programs 25-03-01 25-04-01.
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual 2-299
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service
Level:
IN
Program
26
Description
Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service (ARS/F-Route) to define the system options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
06
07
Item Input Data Description
ARS Service
Network Outgoing Inter-Digit
ARS Time
ARS Misdialed
Number Handling
Class of Service
Match Access
F-Route Access
COS Reference
0 = Disabled (ARS service is OFF.)
1 = Enabled (ARS service is ON.)
Enable or disable ARS.
0 ~ 64800 seconds With Networking, this time replaces
20-03-04 when determining if all network protocol digits have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this time can be programmed for
5 (500 ms) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for outbound dialing, this time should be programmed for 30 (three seconds) at Site A.
0 = Route to Trunk
Group 1
1 = Play Warning Tone to Dialer
0 = Disabled (ARS service is OFF.)
1 = Enabled (ARS service is ON.)
0 = F-Route
1 = ARS
If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should route over Trunk Group 1 or play error tone.
Default
0
30
Related
Program
26-02
26-03
26-04
20-03-04
0
0
0
21-02
26-02
26-02
44-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-300 Program 26 : ARS Service
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS to set pre-transaction tables for selecting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
• Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk group.
• Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 1 ~ 400
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
07
Item Input Data
Dial
ARS Service Type
Maximum of 16 digits (0 ~ 9,
*
, #, @)
0 = No Service (Call Restricted)
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access
Additional Data/Service
Number
ARS Class of Service
If Service Type 1 (in 26-02) : Select Trunk Group
Number
0 ~ 25 (Trunk Group Number 0 = No Route)
101 ~ 104 (Networking ID) (V1.5 Added)
If Service Type 2 (in 26-02) :
F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0 ~ 100
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on page 2-387 .
F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0 ~ 100
(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule on page 2-386
.
0 ~ 16
0 = No ARS Class (Call Restricted)
Dial Treatment for ARS
Network Specified Parameter
Table
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 16
Default
No Setting
0
Related
Program
0
0
0
0
44-04
44-05
26-12
Program
26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual 2-301
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level:
IN
Program
26
Description
Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The
ARS Dial Treatment options are:
• An - For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1 ~ 4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a
Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks.
• DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0 ~ 9, #, * , Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like :
D05P1234.
• Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
• P - Pause in analog trunk.
• R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.
• E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
• X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature.
Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number
Item
No.
01
Treatment Code
Item Input Data
Maximum 36 characters
1 ~ 15
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-302 Program 26 : ARS Service
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route extension calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Day/Night Mode
Up to eight digits
1 ~ 8
Item
No.
01
Class
Item
0 ~ 16
0 = No Class
Input Data Default
0
Program
26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual 2-303
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level:
IN
Program
26
Description
Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier access, which is referred from Program 26-03.
Input Data
Transit Network ID Table
Item
No.
01
Item
Transit Network ID (Carrier ID)
Input Data
0000 ~ 9999
(Fixed four digits or No Setting)
1 ~ 4
Default
Table No. 1 ~ 4 = No
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-304 Program 26 : ARS Service
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific
Parameter Table.
Input Data
Network Specific Parameter Table 1 ~ 16
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data Description
Called Party Number -
Type of Number Selection
0 = System Default
1 = Unknown
2 = International No.
3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.
This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07 and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
Called Party number -
Numbering Plan Identification Selection
0 = System Default
1 = Unknown
2 = ISDN Plan
3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard
Plan
6 = Private Plan
This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07 and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
26
Programming Manual 2-305
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level:
IN
Program
30
Description
Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles.
The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles. The available options are:
• Regular (Business) Mode (0)
• Hotel Mode (1)
Input Data
DSS Console Number
Item
No.
01
Item
DSS Operation Mode
Input Data
0 = Business Mode
1 = Hotel Mode
01 ~ 12
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
• Hotel/Motel
2-306 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS
Consoles connected.
• Up to 12 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (12 is the maximum allowed per system).
When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. There are 12 Console Numbers (01 ~ 12). Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions. When entering data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first.
Input Data
60-button DSS Console Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Up to eight digits
01 ~ 12
Description
The extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the DSS console.
Default
No Setting
Program
30
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming Manual 2-307
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level:
SA
Program
30
Description
Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function with up to eight digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code).
To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an extension programmed key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be cleared + 00 or * 00 (If using WebPro or
PC Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)] Without clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display, although the DSS function works correctly.
If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected, either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping.
Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12
Index 2
Item No.
01
Key Number
001 ~ 114
Function Number
0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99 (General
Functional Level)
* 00 ~ * 99 (Appearance
Functional Level)
Additional Data
Table 2-7 Function Number List
[1] General functional level (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99)
Function
Number
01
Function
DSS/One-Touch
Additional Data LED Indication
02
03
04
05
06
Microphone Key (ON/
OFF)
DND Key
BGM (ON/OFF)
Headset
Transfer Key
Extension Number or any Numbers (up to
36 digits)
On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy
Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND
Transfer, CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW
Busy/Noans, CFW Both, CFW FL ME
Fast Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND
All, CFW Imm
On (Red) : Mic On
Off : Mic Off
On (Red) : DND Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Headset Operation
None
Note
2-308 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
34
35
36
37
38
39
Function
Number
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Conference Key
Incoming Call ID List
Call Forward - Busy/No
Answer
Call Forward - Both
Ring
Follow Me
On (Red) : Conference Operation
Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID
On (Red) : Existing Checked CID
Off : No CID
Day/Night Mode Switch Mode Number (1 ~ 8) On : While each mode
Call Forward - Immediate
Call Forward - Busy
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
Call Forward - No Answer
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup
Slow Blink (Red) : To be setup
On (Red) : Setup Text Message Setup Message Numbers
(01 ~ 20)
External Group Paging External Paging Number (1 ~ 6)
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
External All Call Paging
Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Number (01 ~ 32)
Internal All Call Paging
Meet-Me Answer to Internal Paging
Call Pickup
Call Pickup for Another
Group
Call Pickup for Specified
Group
Call Pickup Group
Number (1 ~ 32)
Speed Dial - System/
Private
Speed Dial - Group
None or Speed Dial
Number (00 ~ 99 or
000 ~ 999)
None or Speed Dial
Number (00 ~ 99 or
000 ~ 999)
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Repeat Redial
Saved Number Redial
Memo Dial
Meet-me Conference
Override (Off-Hook Signaling)
Barge-In
Camp On
Department Step Call
DND/FWD Override Call
Message Waiting
Room Monitoring
On (Red) : Repeat Dialing
None
None
None
None
None
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring
Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored
Note
Program
30
Programming Manual 2-309
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
30
75
76
77
66
72
73
74
Function
Number
41
42
43
44
45
46
49
50
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
62
63
78
79
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Secretary Buzzer
Boss - Secretary Call
Pickup
Series Call
Common Hold
Exclusive Hold
Department Group Log
Out
Call Redirect
Extension Number (8 digits)
Extension Number (8 digits)
On (Red) : Calling party
Fast Blink : Called party
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
On (Red) : Withdrawing
Account Code
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Setup
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Starting
External Call Forward by Door Box Setup
Extension Name Edit
Extension Number or
Voice Mail Number ( 8 digits)
None
Incoming Group Number (01 ~ 25)
None
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Delay Message Answering
On (Red) : Setup
General Purpose LED
Operation
General Purpose LED
Indication
Department Incoming
Call - Immediate
Department Incoming
Call - Delay
001 ~ 100 :
001 ~ 100 :
Extension Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
Extension Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
None
(Red) On
(Red) On
Off
Off
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Department Incoming
Call - DND
Flash Key
Outgoing Call Without
Caller ID (ISDN)
CTI (V3.0 Deleted)
Keypad Facility Key
Keypad Hold Key
Keypad Retrieve Key
Keypad Conference Key
Application Key
Voice Mail (In-Skin)
Conversation Recording
(In0skin VM)
Automated Attendant
(In-Skin)
Extension Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
None
On (Red) : Mode enabled
On (Red) : CTI active
None
Extension Number or
Pilot Number (8 digits)
Fast Blink (Red) : Existing new message
0 = Conversation recording
1 = Delete, Re-recording
2 = Delete
Extension Number or
Pilot Number (8 digits)
Fast Blink (Red) : Recording
On (Red) : Setup - All calls
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/
625msec off) (Red) : Setup - busy calls
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup – busy/noans calls
Note
2-310 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Function
Number
80
81
83
84
86
87
88
91
92
93
94
95
97
98
99
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Tandem Ringing Set Up
Key
Automatic Transfer to
Transfer Key
Conversation Recording
Function
0 = Cancel
1 = Set
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring (8 digits)
Trunk Line Number
001 ~ 084
0 = Pause
1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
Line Drop (send long flash)
Private Call Refuse None
On (Red) : Master Side
Slow Blink (Red) : Slave Side
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Caller ID Refuse
Live Monitoring Key
Message Waiting Indication Key
Alternate Answer Key
Wake Up Call Indication None
Room Status Indication
Call Attendant
Page Switching
Door Box Access Key
None
Dial-In Mode Switching Program 22-17, Table
No. 1 ~ 500
None
None
Doorphone No. (1 ~
6)
None
None
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : pattern 1, pattern 5 ~ 8
On (Red) : pattern 2
Slow Blink (Red) : pattern 3
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Set : On
No Set : Off
No answer : Blink(On (125ms)/Off
(125ms)
ON : Checked In and Clean
OFF : Checked Out (clean and available)
SLOW blink : Maid Required [On
(500ms)/Off (500ms)]
MEDIUM blink : Maid in Room [On
(250ms)/Off (250ms)]
FAST blink : Inspect Room [On
(125ms)/Off (125ms)]
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125msec:on
125msec:off
125msec:on
625msec:off) (Red) : Setup - Busy calls
On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls
Red On : Page 1
Slow Blink (Red) Page 2
On (Red) : Door Box Busy
Off : Door Box Idle
Fast Blink (Red) : Door Box Incoming
ON : New Message
OFF : No Message
Note
Program
30
Programming Manual 2-311
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Table 2-8 Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level ( * 00 - * 99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Number
* 01 Trunk Key
Function Additional Data
* 04
* 07
Park Key
Station Park Hold
LED Indication
Trunk Line Number 001 ~ 084 Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming
On (Red) : Speaking
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding/
Transferring/Recall
Park Number (01 ~ 64) Slow Blink (Red) : Holding/
Recall
None
Program
30
Default
• The DSS keys 001 ~ 060 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101 ~ 160.
• The DSS keys 061 ~ 114 of all DSS consoles = No Setting.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2-312 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console).
Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number
Index 2
Item
No.
01
Item
DSS Console Alternate Answer
Input Data
Alternate DSS No. 01 ~ 12
(0 = No setting)
01 ~ 12
Default
0 = No Setting
Program
30
Conditions
• Related extension is assigned in Program 30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is assigned at
Program 30-03.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-313
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level:
IN
Program
30
Description
Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS consoles.
Input Data
13
14
15
16
17
09
10
11
12
18
19
20
21
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Item
Idle Extension
Busy Extension
DND Extension
ACD Agent Busy (V1.5 Added)
Out of Schedule (ACD DSS) (V1.5
Added)
ACD Agent log Out (ACD DSS)
(V1.5 Added)
ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS) (V1.5
Added)
Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code * (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS)
VM Message Indication
Input Data
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
1 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data)
Default
3
7
0
7
0
5
4
6
4
3
5
3
2
3
7
1
5
3
0
4
2-314 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 3.01
L E D P a tte rn 0 :[O F F ]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 1 :[F L : O n (5 0 0 m s)/Off(5 0 0 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 2 :[W K : O n (2 5 0 m s)/Off(2 5 0 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 3 :[R W : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 4 :[IR : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/ O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(6 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 5 :[IL O n (8 7 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 6 :[IW O n (6 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]
O n
O ff
L E D P a tte rn 7 :[O N ]
O n
O ff
LED Patterns for DSS Console
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
SL1100
Program
30
Programming Manual 2-315
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level:
IN
Program
31
Description
Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options for
Internal/External Paging.
The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
0
Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
*
#
Clear/Back
Flash
Enter characters :
* + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
All Call Paging
Zone Name
Input Data
Up to 12 Characters
02
Page Announcement Duration
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone. The name shows on the display of the telephone making the announcement.
This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only)
Default
Group all
Related
Program
11-12-19
31-02-02
1200
2-316 Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
04
Item Input Data
Privacy Release
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Once the user initiates a Meet-Me
Conference or Voice Call Conference, the system waits this time for the Paged party to join the call.
Default
90 seconds
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, External
• Paging, Internal
Program
31
Programming Manual 2-317
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Program
31
Description
Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 32 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Internal Paging Group
Number
0 ~ 32
(0 = No setting)
02
Internal All Call Paging Receiving
0 = Off
1 = On
Maximum eight digits
Description Default
Assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system allows up to 32 Internal Paging Groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group.
Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for each extension. If allowed, extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extensions can only make (not receive) All Call Internal Paging announcements. If combined,
Paging zones should be restricted as well, change the internal page zone group in
Program 31-07-01 to 0.
Port 1 ~ 16 = 1
(Group 1),
Port 17 ~ = 0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, Internal
2-318 Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups
(i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.
The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
0
Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
Á À Â Ã Å Æ Ç É Ê ì ó 0
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
*
#
Clear/Back
Flash
Enter characters :
* + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Program
31
Input Data
Internal Paging Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Internal Paging Group
Name
Up to 12 Characters
01 ~ 32
Description
Assign name to Internal Paging Groups
(i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the name you program on the telephone display.
Default
Refer below
Programming Manual 2-319
SL1100
Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name
Extension Paging Group
01
02
:
32
Program
31
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, Internal
Name
Group 1
Group 2
:
Group 32
ISSUE 3.01
2-320 Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an
External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the external zone.
To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).
Input Data
External Speaker Number 1 ~ 3
Item
No.
01
Item
Paging Group Number
Input Data
0 ~ 3 (0 = No setting, 1 ~ 3= Group number)
Default
Speaker 1 (Basic) = 1
(Group 1)
Speaker 2 (Expansion1) = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 (Expansion2) = 3 (Group 3)
Conditions
None
Program
31
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, External
Programming Manual 2-321
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level:
IN
Program
31
Description
Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for each External
Paging zone. For UNA ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Universal Night Answer/Ring
Input Data
0 = No Ringing (No)
1 = Ringing (Yes)
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
1 ~ 3
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Night Service
• Paging, External
2-322 Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using an amplifier.
Input Data
External Speaker Number 1 ~ 3
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description
Broadcast Splash
Tone Before Paging
(Paging Start Tone)
Broadcast Splash
Tone After Paging
(Paging End Time)
Speech Path
0 = No Tone (None)
1 = Splash Tone
2 = Chime Tone
0 = No Tone (None)
1 = Splash Tone
2 = Chime Tone
0 = Both Way (Duplex)
1 = One Way (Simplex)
Use this option to enable or disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone.
If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement.
Use this option to enable or disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone. If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement.
Determine if the external speaker will be used for talkback (As this option is not available with the CPU external page zone, speaker 9 should be left at 1).
CODEC Transmit
Gain Setup
CODEC Receive Gain
Setup
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5
dB)
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5
dB)
Default
2
2
1
32
32
Program
31
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, External
Programming Manual 2-323
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level:
IN
Program
31
Description
Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0 ~ 3) to an Internal Paging Zone (0 ~ 32) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined
Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone.
Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1 ~ 3) to an External Page Group (0 ~ 3).
Input Data
External Paging Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Internal Paging Group Number
0 ~ 3 (0 = All External Paging)
Input Data
0 ~ 32 (0 = All Internal Paging)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, External
• Paging, Internal
2-324 Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External
Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle.
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
BGM
Item Input Data Description
1 ~ 3
0 = BGM Prevented (No)
1 = BGM allowed (Yes)
Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting Background Music when it is idle.
Default
0
Program
31
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Background Music
• Paging, External
Programming Manual 2-325
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting
Level:
IN
Program
31
Description
Use Program 31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting assigns the name of external paging group and defines the splash tone for external paging.
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
Item
External Speaker Name
Input Data
Up to 12 Characters
01 ~ 03
Default
External Speaker Number 01 = Group 1
External Speaker Number 02 = Group 2
External Speaker Number 03 = Group 3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-326 Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Door Box Answer
Time
Door Lock Cancel
Time
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box
Disconnect Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
A user can answer the door box during the time specified in this program.
When a user activates the door lock release relay, this program specifies the amount of time the door strike remains open.
Define the conversation period for an Off-
Premise Call Forward by Door Box call.
When this timer expires, the caller hears busy tone for three seconds (fixed time), and the call is then disconnected.
Default
30 seconds
10 seconds
60 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Door Box
Program
32
Programming Manual 2-327
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Program
32
Description
Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller presses the associated Door Box call button.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
Day/Night Mode
Door Box Ring Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
1 ~ 6
1 ~ 8
01 ~ 32
Default
Door Box Ringing
Member 1 = 101
Other : No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Door Box
2-328 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door
Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in 80-01 : Service Tone
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Chime Pattern
CODEC Transmit
Gain Setup
CODEC Receive Gain
Setup
0 = None
1 = Door Box Ring 1
2 = Door Box Ring 2
3 = Door Box Ring 3
4 = Door Box Ring 4
5 = Door Box Ring 5
6 = Door Box Ring 6
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ +
15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ +
15.5 dB)
1 ~ 6
Description Default
This program controls the gain levels from the system to the door box.
This program controls the gain levels from the door box to the system.
Door Box 1 = 1
Door Box 2 = 2
Door Box 3 = 3
Door Box 4 = 4
Door Box 5 = 5
Door Box 6 = 6
32
32
Program
32
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Door Box
Programming Manual 2-329
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level:
IN
Program
32
Description
Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
Item
No.
01
Door Box Name
Item Input Data
Up to 12 characters
1 ~ 6
Default
Door Box Name 1 =
DOOR-1
Door Box Name 2 =
DOOR-2
Door Box Name 3 =
DOOR-3
Door Box Name 4 =
DOOR-4
Door Box Name 5 =
DOOR-5
Door Box Name 6 =
DOOR-6
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Door Box
2-330 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E&M Tie line.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description
DID/E&M Start
Signaling
Receive Dial
Type for E&M Tie
Line
E&M Dial-In
Mode
E&M Line Dial
Tone
0 = 2 nd
Dial Tone
1 = Wink
2 = Immediate
3 = Delay
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
2 = MF
0 = Specify Extension
Number (Intercom)
1 = Use Conversion
Table (NTT)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
System Toll Restriction
0 = System
1 = Each Extension
Set the start signaling mode for DID and Tie trunks. DID and Tie trunks can use either immediate start or wink start signaling.
Determine if the incoming Tie Line call should be directed as an intercom call or if it should follow the DID
Translation Table in Program 22-11.
Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up. Enter 0 if the Tie
Line should not send dial tone.
Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should be subject to Toll Restriction. If it is set to 0 then it will use the Program 21-05-13, if it is set to 1 then it will used Programs
21-05-01 ~ 21-05-13.
Default
1
1
0
1
0
Related
Program
22-02
10-09
22-11
21-05
Program
34
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-331
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level:
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line (there are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Class
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
1 ~ 15
Input Data
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Related
Program
20-14
Conditions
• Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-332 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 01 ~
25) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route), dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each Tie Line - for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Route Table Number
00 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
Input Data
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
1
Program
34
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-333
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each
Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
Toll Restriction Class
1 ~ 15
Input Data
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
2
Related
Program
21-05
14-01-08
Conditions
• Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-334 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line). For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Outgoing Trunk Group Number
Input Data
0 = Enable (Y-Tandem)
1 = Restricted (N-Tandem)
01 ~ 25
01～25
Default
0
Program
34
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-335
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level:
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or delete for Tie Lines.
• Delete Digit
Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.
If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could delete all digits including the extension number.
• Add Digit
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the location can be added to the received digits.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Delete Digit
Additional Dial Digits
Input Data
0 ~ 255 (255 = delete all digits)
Up to four digits (0 ~ 9, * , #)
01 ~ 25
Default
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-336 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers.
Input Data
02
03
04
05
Item
No.
01
Item
First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate
Start)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
First Digit Pause (LD Trunk)
LD Trunk Guard Time
Trunk Answer Detect Timer for
E&M
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Input Data Default
3
0
3
0
30
Conditions
• If Program 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the station that performed the transfer when not answered.
Program
34
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-337
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for
E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program
21-05-13.
Input Data
Class of Service
Table No.
Item
No.
01
Dial Data
Item Input Data
Up to 10 Digits (0 ~ 9, * , #)
01 ~ 15
01 ~ 20
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
21-05-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-338 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI/DNIS service option setup for
E&M Class of Service.
Input Data
Class of Service 01 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Delimiter Dial
Code
Route Setup of
Receive Dial
Input Data
Receive Format
0 = Address
1 = * ANI *
2 = * DNIS *
3 = * ANI * Address *
4 = * ANI * DNIS *
5 =
*
DNIS
*
ANI
*
( * = Delimiter Code)
1 ~ 9, 0, #,
*
0 = Fixed Route (Item
08) (No Routing)
1 = Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data
2 = Routes on Received ANI Data
Description
Use this option to specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received from the Telco. Make sure your entry is compatible with the service the Telco provides. The character * indicates a delimiter.
If Program 34-01-02 is selected to 2 (MF), this Program works only as 4 =
*
ANI
*
DNIS
*
.
This option defines the character
Telco uses as a delimiter (see entries 1 ~ 5 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0 ~ 9, #, and * .
This option specifies the source of the data the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. If option 2 is selected, refer to Program 34-09-04.
Default Related
Program
COS 01 = 0
COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
34-01-02
34-09-02
COS 01 =
*
COS 02 ~ 15 = *
34-09-01
COS 01 = 0
COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
22-09-01
22-11-01
34-09-04
34-09-08
Program
34
Programming Manual 2-339
Program
34
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data
Route Table Setup of Target Dial
0 = SPD Table
(Program 13-03)
1 = DID Table
(Program 22-11)
ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial
Name
0 = Display Off
1 = Display On
Routing SPD Table Setup
Start = 0, 100 ~ 900
End = 0, 99 ~ 999
Description
The option sets how the system uses the route data (gathered in
Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls.
If option 2 is selected, and the call is to be routed using the DID table (1), up to eight digits can be matched.
The number of expected digits set in
Program 22-09-01 must match the
ANI digits defined in Program
22-11-01. For example, if an ANI/
DNIS number received was
*
2035551234
*
3001
*
and Program
22-09- 01 = 4, the entry in 22-11-01 must be 1234 with the defined target extension.
If the call is to be routed using the
ABB table (0), up to 36 digits can be matched. Define the range of the
ABB table to be used in Program
34-09-06. The data is compared to the entries in Program 13-04-01 and then routed according to Program
13-04-03.
Use this option to set whether or not
ANI data should appear on telephone displays as part of Caller ID display.
Use this option to define which part of the ABB Table set up in Program
13-04 the system uses for ANI/DNIS
Caller ID look-ups and ANI/DNIS routing.
This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1 (Caller ID on). When you specify a starting and end address, the system uses the part of the table for look-ups.
When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number data matches the Number entry in the table, the system routes according to the associated Name data. That data can be an extension, Department
Group pilot number, the voice mail master number or a trunk ring group.
This option lets you determine how the system handles an ANI/DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string.
Default Related
Program
COS 01 = 0
COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
13-04
22-11-03
34-09-05
COS 01 = 1
COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
13-04
20-09-02
22-11-03
23-09-04
COS 01 =
Start = 900
End = 999
COS 02 ~ 15 =
Start = 0
End = 0
13-04
COS 01 = 1
COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
25-03
Routing on ANI/
DNIS Error
Routing When
Destination Busy or No Answer
0 = Play Busy Tone to
Caller
1 = Route Caller to
Ring Group Specified in Program 25-03
(Transfer)
0 = Play Busy or Ringback Tone to Caller
(Busy/ NoAns)
1 = Route Caller to
Ring Group Specified in Program 25-04
(Transfer)
This option lets you determine how the system handles an ANI/DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer.
COS 01 = 0
COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
25-04
2-340 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
09
Item
Calling Number
Address Length
1 ~ 8
Input Data Description
When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is the address), use this option to specify the address length. The choices are from 1 ~ 8 digits.
Default Related
Program
COS 01 = 7
COS 02 ~ 15 = 7
34-09-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
34
Programming Manual 2-341
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI
Level:
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI to delete the Information Digits received from the
Network on Feature Group D Trunks.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete digit
Input Data
0 ~ 9 (0 = No delete)
001 ~ 025
Description
Example :
ANI Information = 111222
Delete = 2 digits
After digit been deleted = 1222
Default
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-342 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
SMDR Port Number 1 ~ 2
Item
No.
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description Default
Output Port Type
Header Language
Omit Digits
Minimum Digits
Minimum Call Duration
Minimum Ring Time
(For Incoming Calls)
Format Selection
0 = No Setting (SMDR disabled)
3 = LAN (SMDR enabled and sent out of the LAN port.)
0 = English
1 = German
2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish
This option specifies the type of connection used for SMDR. The baud rate for the
COM port should be set in Program
10-21-02 or 15-02-19.
Specify the language in which the SMDR header should be printed.
0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied) The number of digits entered in this option does not print on the SMDR report. For example, if the entry is 10, the first 10 digits a user dials do not appear on the SMDR report.
0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied) Outgoing calls must be at least this number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR report.
0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 =
All)
0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 =
All)
The duration of the call must be at least this time to be included on the SMDR report.
A call must ring for at least this time to be included on the SMDR report.
0 = Format1 Type (North
America)
1 = Format2 Type (Overseas)
SMDR port1 : 3
SMDR port2 : 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Program
35
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-343
Program
35
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Station Message Detail Recording
ISSUE 3.01
2-344 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
SMDR Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Toll Restricted Call
02
PBX Calls
03
Trunk Number or
Name
Input Data
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Name
1 = Number
04
05
06
07
08
Summary (Daily)
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
Summary (Weekly)
Toll Charge Cost
Incoming Call
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
Summary (Monthly)
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
09
Extension Number or
Name
0 = Name
1 = Number
10
11
12
All Lines Busy (ALB)
Output
Walking Toll Restriction Table Number
DID Table Name Output
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
1 ~ 2
Description
SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by Toll Restriction.
When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can include all calls (1) or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access code (0).
Select whether the system should display the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on
SMDR reports.
If this option is set to 1, Program
35-02-14 must be set to 0.
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report provides a daily summary (at midnight every night).
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report provides a weekly summary (every
Saturday at midnight).
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report provides a monthly summary (at midnight on the last day of the month).
Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report include toll charges.
Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report include incoming calls. If you disable this option (0), incoming calls do not print.
Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report include extension numbers. Set this option (0) to have the SMDR report include extension names.
Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication should be displayed.
Determine if the DID table name should be displayed.
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Program
35
Programming Manual 2-345
Program
35
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Item Input Data Description
CLI Output When DID to Trunk
Date
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
Determine if the CLI output should be displayed for DID.
Determine whether or not the date should be displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program
35-02-03.
Determine whether or not the CLI/DID
Number Switching should be displayed.
CLI/DID Number
Switching
Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number
0 = CLI (CLIP)
1 = DID Calling Number
2 = Calling Party Name
0 = Trunk Port Name
1 = Received Dialed
Number
2 = Both
Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. If set to (0) trunk names are printed instead.
Determine if SMDR should print Account
Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call.
Print Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call
Print Mode for Caller
Name of Incoming
Call
Dialed Number Output Format
Watch Auto Dialing
0 = ACC
1 = CNAME
0 = Normal
1 = Line Feed
Determine how SMDR should print Caller
Name of Incoming Call.
External Information
CFW Mode
0 = Display from the first digit
1 = Display from the last digit
0 = Transfer Information
1 = Incoming Information
Determine if the dialed number should display from the first digits or from the last digits. This option is only available for outgoing calls.
Determine which information is displayed in the "STATION" area for a transferred call when the extension has Call Forward set with an Abbreviated Dial number as the destination. Selecting "0" (Transfer Info) will display the extension number which called the extension with external Call Forward set. Selecting "1" (Incoming Info) will display the extension number which has the external Call Forward set.
This option only applies when Call Forward is set using a service code (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-07) and the destination uses an Abbreviated Dial bin. It does not include Off-Premise or Centrex transfers.
S-Point Terminal
Number
0 = MSN Number
1 = Extension Number
Security Auto Dialing
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
Emergency call from Watch Mode. Define
SMDR output on/off. Output is SAD (Security auto dialing).
Emergency call from Remote Inspection.
Define SMDR output on/off. Output is
WAD (Watch auto dialing )
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Station Message Detail Recording
2-346 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where the incoming SMDR information should be sent.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25
Item
No.
01
Item
SMDR Port No.
Input Data
1 ~ 2
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Station Message Detail Recording
• Trunk Group Routing
Program
35
Programming Manual 2-347
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
Program
35
Description
Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the SMDR port where the outgoing
SMDR information should be sent.
There are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Department Group Number 01 ~ 32
Item
No.
01
Item
SMDR Port No.
Input Data
1 ~ 2
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Station Message Detail Recording
2-348 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension
Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06.
Input Data
Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Account Code Mode
0 = Account Codes Disabled
1 = Account Codes Optional (This is for the account code entry feature.)
2 = Account Code Required Not Verified
(Forced Account Codes enabled, no verification with the system required)
3 = Account Code Required and Verified
(Forced Account Codes enabled, verification with
PRG 35-06-01 required)
Use this option to select the Account Code
Mode (0 ~ 3).
Forced Account Code
Toll Call Setup
0 = Account Codes for
ALL calls
1 = Account Codes for
TOLL calls
Use this option enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in
Item 01 above).
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
Hiding Account Codes
0 = Disabled (User cannot enter an account code.)
1 = Enabled (User can enter an account code while on an incoming call.)
0 = Account Codes displayed
1 = Account Codes not displayed
Use this option to allow users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes entered dial out on the connected trunk.
Use this option to either hide or show the
Account codes on a telephone display.
Default
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Program
35
Programming Manual 2-349
Program
35
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
ISSUE 3.01
2-350 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account
Code list. You can enter up to 800 codes with 1 ~ 16 digits, using the characters 0 ~ 9 or #. Use the
LK1 to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234 means the user can enter 0234-9234.
Input Data
Verified Account Code Bin Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Verified Account
Code
1 ~ 800
Input Data Description
1 ~ 9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card)
(Up to 16 digits)
If PRG 35-05-01 is set to a (3), required and verified, this is where the verified account code list is created in the system.
Up to 800 account codes with 1 ~ 16 digits can be entered.
Wild cards can be entered by using the @ symbol. For example @234 means the user can enter 0234 ~ 9234 as valid account codes.
The digit * cannot be used in the account code because this digit is used to start and end the account code entry.
Default
No Setting
Program
35
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified
Programming Manual 2-351
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Program
40
Description
Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to set the Basic setting of Voice Mail.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
Item
Fixed Channel for Voice Mail
Time Stamp
Conversation recording mode after
Transfer
Automated Attendant
0 = Stop
1 = Continue
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Maintenance Time
0 ~ 16
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Automatic Erase Mail
Escape from DSPDB-VM while Attendant Message
Display caller ID while recording message playing
Department group call when the automated attendant is activate
0000 ~ 2359
(0000 = No setting)
0 ~ 180 (Day)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Input Data Default
0
1
1
1
0000
0
0
1
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-352 Program 40 : Voice Recording System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be used for the VRS prompts.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Program
40
Feature Cross Reference
• Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming Manual 2-353
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level:
IN
Program
40
Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice
Announcement feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
VRS Fixed Message
General Message
Number
VRS No Answer
Destination
VRS No Answer
Time
0 = Disable (VRS fixed message will not be played.)
1 = Enable (VRS fixed message will be played.)
0 ~ 100
(0 = No General Message Service)
0 ~ 25
(Incoming Ring Group
Number)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to play the fixed VRS messages (such as You have a message).
This item assigns the VRS message number to use for the General Message.
This item assigns the transferred
Ring Group when the VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with
Personal Greeting Message.
If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension waits this time for a VRS port to become free.
If a Park and Page is not picked up during this time, the Paging announcement repeats.
Park and Page
Repeat Timer
(VRS Msg Resend)
Set VRS Message for Private
Call Refuse (VRS
Msg Private Call)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = No Message
Played
1 ~ 100 = VRS Message 1 ~ 100
101 = VRS Fixed message (Message will only play if PRG 40-10-01 is enabled.)
Set VRS Message for Caller ID
Refuse (VRS Msg
CID)
0 = No Message
Played
1 ~ 100 = VRS Message 1 ~ 100
101 = VRS Fixed message (Message will only play if PRG 40-10-01 is enabled.)
Call Attendant
Busy Message
0 ~ 100
(0 = No message)
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be used as Private Call
Refuse.
When Fixed message is set, VRS message guidance is: “Your call cannot go through.”
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be used as Caller ID Refuse.
When Fixed Message is set, VRS message guidance is: “Your call cannot go through.”
Default
0
0
0
(No Setting)
0
0
0
0
0
Related
Program
14-01-27
14-01-27
15-01-08
2-354 Program 40 : Voice Recording System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
09
10
11
Item Input Data
Call Attendant
No Answer Message
Call Forward Remainder Announcement
(V2.0 Added)
Call Forward Notification Announcement
(V2.0 Added)
0 ~ 100
(0 = No message)
0 = Do not play
1 = Play
0 = Do not play
1 = Play
Description
Flag that control the playback of the
VRS announcements for 'on the forwarded phone'.
Flag that control the playback of the
VRS announcements for 'towards the incoming call'.
Default
0
Related
Program
15-01-09
1
1
40-10-01
40-10-01
Conditions
None
Program
40
Feature Cross Reference
• Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual 2-355
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level:
IN
Program
40
Description
In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS Message Number
Input Data
0 ~ 100 (0 = No Service)
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Voice Response System (VRS)
2-356 Program 40 : Voice Recording System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group
Name. for each ACD extension number, assign an ACD Group (01 ~ 02). An ACD Group number is assigned to each Work Period number (1 ~ 8).
The assigned extension works as an ACD agent extension in the following cases:
• The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent is logged in.
• An extension transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number.
• An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an ACD pilot number.
Input Data
Extension Number
ACD Work Period Mode Number
Item
No.
01
ACD Group No.
Item
0 ~ 2
0 = No Setting
Input Data
Up to eight digits
01 ~ 08
Default
0
Program
41
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual 2-357
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
41
Description
In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group for each incoming trunk group set up in Program 22-05, designate which ACD Group (01 ~ 02) the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal. Use Program 41-06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use
Program 41-07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
ACD Work Period Mode Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
ACD Group Number
0 ~ 2
0 = No Setting
Night Announcement
Service
Priority Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
0, 1 ~ 7
0 = No Priority
1 = Highest Priority
7 = Lowest Priority
01 ~ 25
1 ~ 8
Description
Determine whether or not an incoming call to a trunk ring group should follow a priority assignment.
Default
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
• Ring Groups
2-358 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules in this program, assign them to days of the week in
Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)
ACD extensions can log in only during their work period. ACD extensions receive the following calls when they are logged in.
• ACD Call on a Trunk
When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Programs 41-03 and 41-06).
• ACD Pilot Number Call
Any time - if ACD extensions are available.
Input Data
ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern
Item No.
01
Start Time
End Time
Item
Work Period
Mode Number
1 ~ 8
0000 ~ 2359
0000 ~ 2359
Input Data
1 ~ 4
Default
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
Program
41
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual 2-359
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules
Program
41
Description
Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each
Work Schedule (1 ~ 4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules.)
Input Data
ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number
Item No.
01
Work Period
Mode Number
Start Time
End Time
Item
1 ~ 8
0000 ~ 2359
0000 ~ 2359
Input Data
1 ~ 4
Default
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2-360 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules (1 ~ 4) to days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work
Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06).
Input Data
Item No.
01
Day Number
Item Default
0
Time Pattern
Input Data
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
0 ~ 4
0 = No ACD
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Program
41
Programming Manual 2-361
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options
Program
41
Description
For each ACD Group (01 ~ 02), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the overflow mode (0~9), destination and announcement message types. Delay Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls. Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options. The table below outlines the entry options.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
01 ~ 02
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Input Data
Overflow Operation Mode
0 = No Overflow (None)
1 = Overflow with No Announcement
2 = No Overflow with First Announcement Only
3 = No Overflow with First & Second Announcements
4 = Overflow with First Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First & Second Announcement
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = No Overflow with Second Announcement Only
9 = Overflow with Second Announcement Only
ACD Overflow Destination
0 = No Setting
1 ~ 2 = ACD Group
3 = Overflow Table (Program 41-09)
4 = Voice Mail Integration
5 = System Speed (Program 41-08-05)
6 = Incoming Ring Group (Program 41-08-06)
Delay Announcemen Source Type
1 = VRS
2 = InMail
ACD Overflow Transfer Time
System Speed Dial Bin
Incoming Ring Group when Overflow
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
0 ~ 999 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 5)
01 ~ 25 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 6)
Default
0
0
1
30
999
1
Conditions
None
2-362 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
SL1100
Program
41
Programming Manual 2-363
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
41
Description
Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call is transferred when overflow occurs.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
01 ~ 02
Item
No.
01
1 ~ 3
Input Data
0 ~ 3
0 = No Setting
3 = In-Skin Voice Mail Integration
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2-364 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to use as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages. Refer to Program 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options.
This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in
Program 41-08-03.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
01 ~ 02
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Delay Message Start
Timer
1st Delay Message
Number
1st Delay Message
Sending Count
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255
04
05
06
07
08
2nd Delay Message
Number
2nd Waiting Message
Sending Count
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255
Tone Kind at Message Interval
ACD Forced Disconnect Time after the
2nd DelayMessage
Queue Depth Announcement
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
(0 = No Disconnect)
0 = Disable
1 = After 1st (1st)
2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)
Description
Input the time before the 1st Delay Message Starts.
Input the VRS Message to be played as the 1st Delay Message.
Input the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is sent. If set to 0, the message is not played.
Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay Message.
Input the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is sent. If set to 0, the message is not played.
Input what is heard between the Delay messages.
Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Message is played, before the call is disconnected.
Input when the Queue Depth Announcement is played.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
0
Program
41
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-365
Program
41
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ISSUE 3.01
2-366 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to set Night Announce time for each ACD group.
Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number calls.
Input Data
ACD Group Number
Item
No.
03
Item Input Data
ACD Night Announce
Sending Time
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
01 ~ 02
Description
Define the time the ACD night Announcement plays. Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program
41-03-02.
Default
30
Program
41
Conditions
• The Night Announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual 2-367
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
41
Description
Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define the VRS message number to use as the night announcement. This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12-01.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
02
Item
VRS Message Number
Tone Kind at Message Interval
Input Data
0 ~ 100
0 = No Message
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
01 ~ 02
Description
Input the VRS message number to be used as the night announcement.
Input what is heard between the Night Announcements.
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2-368 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-14 : ACD Options Setup
Description
Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options Setup to set various options for ACD Groups. When you set an option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all agents in the group. The chart below shows each of the ACD options, the entries available, and the default entry.
Input Data
ACD Group No 01 ~ 02
Item
No.
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
12
Item Input Data Description
Automatic Wrap Up
Mode
ACD Priority for Overflow Calls
Automatic Answer at
Headset
Call Queuing after
2nd Announcement
Automatic Off Duty for SLT
ACD Off Duty Mode
Automatic Wrap Up
End Time
ACD No Answer Skip
Time
Start Headset Ear
Piece Ringing (for
SLT)
0 = After wrap up the mode key is pressed.
(Manual)
1 = After call is finished automatically. (Auto)
0 = Own group priority
1 = Priority order by Program 41-03-03
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Enable (Yes)
1 = Disable (No)
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
Enable/Disable Automatic Wrap Up mode.
Determines whether the ACD group should use its own priority assignment or if it should follow the priority assigned in Program 41-03-03.
Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic Answer for agents using headsets.
Determine whether the caller should hear the 2nd Delay Announcement and then be taken out of queue (1), or be placed back into queue (0).
Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic Off Duty
(rest) mode for agents with single line telephones.
0 = No change to Off
Duty mode
1 = Change to Off Duty mode automatically
(Skip)
0 = Cannot receive internal call
1 = Can receive internal call
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
Enable (1)/Disable (0) the agent's ability to receive internal calls in ACD Off Duty
Mode.
Input the time the agent is in Automatic
Wrap Up End Time when Wrap key is pressed, or automatically put into Wrap mode.
Set the time a call to the ACD Group rings an idle extension before routing to the next agent.
Set the ringing start time for the headset ear piece on a single line telephone.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
Program
41
Programming Manual 2-369
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
17
Item Input Data
CTI : Operation mode when transfer no login ACD groups
0 = Transfer to ACD group
1 = Error notice (Program 99-01-40)
Description
This program allows CTI Server transfers a trunk call to ACD Pilot number which group has no login agent in 3rd Party CTI.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Program
41
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2-370 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow
Description
Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD threshold call overflow and the mode for each ACD group.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
01 ~ 02
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Number of Calls in
Queue
Operation Mode for
ACD Queue
Input Data Description
0 ~ 84
0 = No Limitation
0 = The last waiting call is transferred
1 = The longest waiting call is transferred
2 = Send Busy Tone
Define the maximum number of calls allowed in the ACD queue before overflow occurs.
Define how the system should handle calls when the number of calls in queue exceeds the threshold.
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Program
41
Programming Manual 2-371
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
41
Description
Use Program 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign InMail Master Mailboxes
(Program 47-03) as ACD Delay Announcement Mailboxes.
Input Data
ACD Group Number 01 ~ 02
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item Input Data Description
Delay Message Start
Timer
Mailbox Number for
1st Announcement
Message
1st Delay Message
Sending Count
Mailbox Number for
2nd Announcement
Message
2nd Delay Message
Sending Count
Wait Tone Type at
Message Interval
ACD Forced Disconnect Time after 2nd
Announcement
Delay Message Interval Time
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
Dial (up to eight digits)
1 ~ 255
0 = No message is played.
Dial (up to eight digits)
1 ~ 255
0 = No message is played.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = Music On Hold Tone
2 = Background Music
Source
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
Determine the time the system waits before playing the Delay Message.
Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement
Mailbox as the message source for the 1st
Announcement Message.
Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending
Count. This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play.
Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement
Mailboxes as the message source for the
2nd Announcement Message.
Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play.
Determine what the caller hears between the messages.
Assign the time the system should wait after the end of the ACD Delay Message before disconnecting.
Set the time for the interval between the
Delay Messages.
Default
0
No Setting
0
No Setting
0
0
0
20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-372 Program 41 : ACD Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
Use Program 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD Queue Status
Display feature. This program allows the Queue Status Display, and causes an alarm to sound, when the parameters in this program are met.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
Item
Number of Calls in
Queue
Input Data
0 ~ 84
0 = No Display
02
03
Queue Status Display
Time
Queue Status Display
Interval
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
04
05
ACD Call Waiting
Alarm
ACD Call Waiting
Alarm Hold Time
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
01 ~ 02
Description
Set the number of calls that can accumulate in the ACD queue before the Queue
Status Display (and optional queue alarm) occurs.
Set the time the Queue Status display remains on the telephone display.
Determine whether or not an incoming call to a trunk ring group should follow a priority assignment. Set the time that refreshes the Queue Status Alarm time in queue display and causes the optional queue alarm to occur on phones active on a call, logged out, or in wrap-up.
Enable/Disable the queue alarm.
Set the time the Call Waiting Alarm should sound.
Default
0
0
0
5
60
Program
41
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual 2-373
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level:
IN
Program
42
Description
Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/Motel
Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Input Data Description
Answering Message
Mode for Wake Up
Call (Hotel Mode)
Wake Up Call Message Assignment
Wake Up Call No Answer
Setup Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode)
Wake Up Call Message Assignment
Flexible Room Status
(V2.0 Added)
0 = MOH (Hold Time)
1 = VAU Message
2 = VAU Message +
Time
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
0 = No Transfer
1 = Transfer to the Operator
0 = Confirmation Tone
1 = VAU Message
2 = Time Stamp + VAU
Message
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
0 = Off
1 = On
VAU Message for Wake Up Calls. You must make an entry for this program if you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above.
When PRG42-01-06 is set to on, any room status change from any status can be made.
Ex)
Hotel Status Code 4 -> 3
Hotel Status Code 4 -> 4
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Hotel/Motel
2-374 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/Motel extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data Description
Hotel Mode
0 = Normal
1 = Hotel
Toll Restriction Class
When Check In
1 ~ 15
Room Status (Refer-
ence Only) (V2.0 Added)
Read Only:
1 = Room Clean (Occupied)
2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of Order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)
* = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
If you want an extension to operate in the
Hotel/Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone to operate in the business mode, enter 0.
Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class when it is checked in. The system has 15
Toll Restriction Classes (1 ~ 15). The entry you make in this option affects the telephone in all Night Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05 and 21-06 to set up the
Toll Restriction dialing options.) When the extension is checked out, it uses the Toll
Restriction Class set in Program 21-04.
This Program shows the hotel room status of each Hotel extension.
Default
0
1
-
Program
42
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual 2-375
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level:
IN
Program
42
Description
Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service
(COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone
Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Item
Check-In Operation
0 = Off
1 = On
Check-Out Operation
0 = Off
1 = On
Room Status Output
0 = Off
1 = On
DND Setting for Other
Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension
Room Status Change for Other Extension
Restriction Class
Changing for Other
Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Room to Room Call
Restriction
DND Setting for Own
Extension
Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension
Change Room Status for Own Extension
SLT Room Monitor
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
01 ~ 15
Description Default
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line telephone ability to use Room Monitor.
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Class 01 ~ 15 =
1
Conditions
None
2-376 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
• Hotel/Motel
SL1100
Program
42
Programming Manual 2-377
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level:
IN
Program
42
Description
Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (01 ~ 32), you enter the destination for each single digit code (1 ~ 9, 0, * , #). The destination can be any code with up to eight digits, such as an extension number or access code.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Received Dial
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Destination Number
Up to eight digits
01 ~ 32
1 ~ 9, 0, * , #
Default
No Setting
Conditions
• The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before executing.
Feature Cross Reference
• Hotel/Motel
2-378 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the LAN port to output the Hotel Data
(Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/ Motel feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
03
04
Wake Up Call No Answer Data
Check-Out Sheet
0 = No Setting
3 = LAN
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
Input Data Default
0
0
0
Conditions
• Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port.
Feature Cross Reference
• Hotel/Motel
Program
42
Programming Manual 2-379
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)
Program
42
Description
Use Program 42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status to enable dial room status codes. Note the code definitions only apply to the system itself.
Input Data
Room Status
Item
No.
01
Item
Flexible Setup for Room Status
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0,
*
, #
Input Data
1 = Room Clean (Occupied)
2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)
*
= Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
Default
1 - # = None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Hotel/Motel
2-380 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the ARS/F-
Route feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
ARS/F-Route Time
Schedule
02
03
Input Data
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
Dial Tone Simulation
(V2.0 Added)
1 digit (0 ~ 9)
*
, # cant be used
Tone Kind (V2.0 Added)
0 = Internal DT
1 = External DT
Description
If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call.
If this option is set to 1, the system first refers to PRG 44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that program is used. If not, the F-Route pattern in PRG 44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.
When first dialed digit matches with the data set in this Program, system send simulated DT to calling party after receiving first digit. Numbering plan for the dial needs to configure as F-Route at PRG
11-01.
Set simulated DT kind which can change the tone used at PRG 44-01-02 and PRG
44-02-04.
Default
0
None
0
Program
44
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual 2-381
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction
Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number
Item
No.
01
Dial
Item
02
Service Type
03
Additional Data
Input Data Description
001 ~ 120
Up to eight digits
(Use line key 1 for a
Don’t Care digit, @)
Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing.
0 = No setting (None)
1 = Extension Call (Own)
2 = ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)
3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table (Option)
• Service Type 1 (Extension Number)
The number goes to an extension after deleting the front digit(s).
Additional Data
Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the number for extension number usage. At least one digit must be deleted.
• Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)
The number is controlled by ARS/F-
Route table.
Additional Data:
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not used, assign the ARS/F-Route table number for Program 44-05.
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used, assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for Program 44-04.
• Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze
Table)
The total length of the number exceeds more than 8 digits.
Additional Data:
Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table number to be used in Program
44-03.
1 = Delete Digit = 0 ~
255 (255 = Delete All
Digits)
2 = 0 ~ 100 (0 = No Setting)
3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0 ~
4 (0 = No Setting)
For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter the additional data required.
• 1 : Delete Digit = 0 ~ 255
(255 = Delete All Digits)
• 2 : [Program 44-01 : 0]
ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100
(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-05.
[Program 44-01 : 1]
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0
~ 100 (0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-04.
• 3 : Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0 ~ 4 (0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-03.
Default
No Setting
0
0
2-382 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
04
Item
Dial Tone Simulation
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data Description
If enabled, this option sends dial tone to the calling party after the routing is determined. This may be required if the central office at the destination does not send dial tone.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Program
44
Programming Manual 2-383
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level:
IN
Program
44
Description
When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1 ~ 250, table number 252 is used to refer to the next Extension Table Area (1 ~ 4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified in tables 1 ~ 250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.
Input Data
Extension Table Area Number
Dial Analysis Table Number
1 ~ 4
1 ~ 252
Dial Analysis Table Number : 1 ~ 250
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Dial
Up to 36 digits
Digits = 1 ~ 9, 0, * , #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number
0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is checked.
Dial Analysis Table Number : 251
Item
No.
03
Item Input Data
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number
0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is checked.
Dial Analysis Table Number : 252
Item
No.
04
Item
Next Table Area Number
0 ~ 4
Input Data
Default
No Setting
0
Default
0
Default
0
2-384 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
SL1100
Program
44
Programming Manual 2-385
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level:
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/ F-Route
Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
Input Data
ARS/F-Route Selection Number
ARS/F-Route Time Mode
Item
No.
01
Item
ARS/F-Route Table Number
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Service)
Input Data
001 ~ 100
1 ~ 8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-386 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is used. If a lower priority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.
Input Data
ARS/F-Route Table Number
Priority Number
001 ~ 100
1 ~ 4
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
Item Input Data Description
Trunk Group Number
0 = No Setting
1 ~ 25 = Trunk Group
101 ~ 104 = Networking
(V1.5 Added)
255 = Extension Call
Delete Digits
Additional Dial Number Table
0 ~ 255
(255 = Delete All)
0 ~ 100
Beep Tone
Gain Table Number for Internal Calls
Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections
0 = Off
1 = On
0 ~ 100
0 = No setting
0 ~ 100
0 = No setting
ARS Class of Service
0 ~ 16
0 = No ARS Class (Call
Restricted)
Dial Treatment
0 ~ 15
Maximum Digit
Network Specified Parameter Table
0 ~ 24
0 ~ 16
Select the trunk group number to use for the outgoing ARS call.
Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number.
Enter the table number (defined in Program 44-06) for additional digits to be dialed.
Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used to dial out.
Select the gain table number to use for the internal call (defined in Program 44-07).
Select the gain table number to use for the tandem call (defined in Program 44-07).
Select the ARS Class of Service to use for the table. An extension ARS COS is determined in Program 26-04-01.
Select the Dial Treatment to use for the table. If a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02 and 44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in Program
26-03-01 is used instead.
Input the maximum number of digits to send when using the F-Route.
Enter a table number from Program 26-12.
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Program
44
Programming Manual 2-387
Program
44
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
ISSUE 3.01
2-388 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed
ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03.
Input Data
Additional Dial Table Number
Item
No.
01
Additional Dial
Item
001 ~ 100
Input Data
Up to 36 digits
Enter : 1 ~ 9, 0, * , #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a pause)
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Program
44
Programming Manual 2-389
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension dials ARS/F-Route number:
• The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
• The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings.
If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route:
• The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
• The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Programs 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not activated.
Input Data
Gain Table Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Transmit
02
03
04
Incoming Receive
Outgoing Transmit
Outgoing Receive
Input Data
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
001 ~ 100
Default
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-390 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-
Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 44-09 and
44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Schedule Pattern Number
Item
Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01 ~ 20
0000 ~ 2359
0000 ~ 2359
1 ~ 8
01 ~ 10
Input Data
Default
All Schedule Patterns = 0 : 00 - 0 : 00, Mode 1
Example :
Pattern 1
0 :0 0
M o d e 3
8 :0 0
M o d e 1
Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 08 : 00 Mode 3
Time Number 02 = 08 : 00 - 18 : 00 Mode 1
Time Number 03 = 18 : 00 - 22 : 00 Mode 2
Time Number 04 = 22 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 3
Pattern 2
0:00
Mode 2
Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 2
1 8 :0 0
M o d e 2
2 2:0 0
M o d e 3
0 :0 0
0:00
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-391
Program
44
Program
44
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
ISSUE 3.01
2-392 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using
ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
Input Data
Day Number 1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Item
No.
01
Item
Schedule Pattern Number
0 ~ 10
(0 = No Setting)
Input Data Default
Sunday ~ Saturday =
Pattern 1
Program
44
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual 2-393
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-
Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Date
Schedule Pattern Number
Input Data
0101 ~ 1231
0 ~ 10 (0 = No Setting)
Default
-
Date 0101 - 1231 = Pattern 0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-394 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Voice Mail Department Group
Number
Voice Mail Master Name
Voice Mail Call
Screening
0 ~ 32
0 = No Voice Mail
Up to 12 Characters
0 = Off
1 = On
Assign which Extension (Department) Group number is to be assigned as the voice mail group.
Enter the Voice Mail Master Name.
Park and Page
Message Wait
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Record Alert
Tone Interval
Time
Centralized
Voice mail Pilot
No. (V1.5 Added)
Centralized
Voice Mail Department Group
Number (V1.5
Added)
Centralized
Voice Mail mas-
ter Name (V1.5
Added)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
0 ~ 32
0 = No Voice Mail Assigned
Up to 12 characters
Enable/disable the ability to process the Call Screening commands (1 + extension number) sent from the
Voice Mail. You should normally enable this option to allow for Voice
Mail Call Screening. Disable this option if your system has been modified so that extensions begin with the digit 1(e.g., 101, 102, etc.). Also see the “Flexible System Numbering” feature.
Enable/disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Park and
Page ( * ) commands. You should normally enable this option.
Enable/disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Message
Wait (#) commands. You should normally enable this option. If enabled, be sure that the programmed
Message Notification strings don’t contain the code for trunk access.
This time sets the interval between
Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts.
Assign this number the same as the extension number or pilot number.
Assign which Extension (Department) Group Number is used as the
Centralized Voice Mail group.
Assign the Centralized Voice Mail
Master Name.
Default
0
VOICE MAIL
0
1
1
30
No Setting
0
C.V.M.
Related
Program
45-01-11
45-01-12
45-01-13
Program
45
Programming Manual 2-395
Program
45
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
10
11
12
13
15
Item Input Data
New NSL Protocol support
Prefix for Call
Screening
Prefix for Park and Page
Prefix for Message Wait
Analog Voice
Mail Protocol Selection
0 = Off (Disable)
1 = On (Enable)
Dial (One digit)
Dial (One digit)
Dial (One digit)
0 = Fixed
1 = Program
16
Up to four digits
17
18
Voice Mail Fax
Digit Add Assignment
Reply Mailbox
Number
Trunk Number
Mapping
0 = No
1 = Yes
2 ~ 3
Description
Assigns whether fixed codes are used or the codes used in Program
45-04 are used for analog voice mail protocol.
Assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to the SLT port when a call is forwarded.
Whether or not to include the mailbox number in the analog voice mail protocol.
Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.
*
#
0
0
1
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
45-01-03
45-01-04
45-01-05
45-04
11-11-50/5
1
15-03-16
1
2
45-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2-396 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data
Send DTMF tone or 6KD message
0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port
1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port
Forced Send Dial Tone
Send 51A Message
0 = Normal
1 = Forced
0 = Off
1 = On
NSL over LAN
Send 4PM message
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
1
1
0
0
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
45
Programming Manual 2-397
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level:
IN
Program
45
Description
Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item
Remote Logon (Internal)
Direct Logon
Transfer Message
Forward-All
Forward-Busy
Forward RNA
Remote Logon
Conversation Recording
Clear Down String
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Input Data Default
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Related
Program
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-398 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional
Digits
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45-04-XX is left blank and 45-01-15 is set to "Program".
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Remote Log-On Internal
08
09
06
07
04
05
02
03
Direct Log-On
Transfer Message/QVM
Forward-All
Forward-Busy
Forward RNA
Remote Log-On
Conversation Recording
Clear Down String
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Related
Program
45-01-15
45-04-01
45-01-15
45-04-02
45-01-15
45-04-03
45-01-15
45-04-04
45-01-15
45-04-05
45-01-15
45-04-06
45-01-15
45-04-07
45-01-15
45-04-08
45-01-15
45-04-09
Program
45
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-399
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : InMail System Options
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-01 : InMail System Options to set up the InMail system-wide options.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
InMail Master Name
Input Data
Up to 12 characters
03
Subscriber Message
Length
1 ~ 4095 seconds
04
Non-Subscriber Message Length
1 ~ 4095 seconds
Description Default
(MasterName)
The CPU must be reset for a change to this program to take effect.
Use this option to modify the name for all
InMail ports. The system briefly displays this name when a display multiline terminal user calls a Voice Mail port (either by pressing Message, their voice mail key, or by dialing the master number). You should always end the name with the ## characters. The system substitutes the port number for the last #. Using the default name
InMail ##, for example, the telephone display shows InMail #1 when calling port 1.
(Subs Msg Length)
Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for:
• Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
• Extension users leaving a message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.
• Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO command and then dialing RS to record and send a message.
• Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.
• Announcement Messages.
• Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.
The length of a Conversation Record is 10 times the Subscriber Message
Length. Since the Conversation Record time cannot exceed 4095 seconds, any setting in Subscriber Message Length larger than 409 has no effect on the length of recorded conversations.
(Mbox Msg Length)
Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for:
• Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailbox.
• Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox.
InMail ##
(The system substitutes the port number for the # when calling the port.)
120
120
2-400 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
05
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Message Backup/Go
Ahead Time
1 ~ 6015 seconds
Digital Pager Callback
Number
Digits
(12 maximum, using 0 ~
9, # and * )
M (Number of messages
- entered by pressing
LK1)
X (Extension number entered by pressing
LK2)
InMail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension that initially received the message.
(Pager CBack)
Use this option to set the Digital Pager
Callback Number portion of the Message
Notification callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number. Normally, this
• option should be X * M#, where:
• X is the number of the extension that generated the notification.
* is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read).
• M is the number of new messages in the extension mailbox.
• # is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect.
Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback
Number
0 ~ 99 seconds
(Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
Use this option to set the backup/ go ahead time. This time sets how far InMail backs up when a user dials B while listening to a message. This interval also sets how far InMail jumps ahead when a user dials G while listening to a message.
Wait Between Digital
Pager Callout Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
(Pager Dial Delay)
Use this option to set the delay (0 ~ 99 seconds) that occurs just before InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager.
Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number.
Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for this option (0 ~ 99 seconds).
By default, this option is 9 seconds. When placing a digital pager notification, the system: Seizes the trunk specified. Dials the user-entered notification number (in Mes-
sage + OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digi-
tal Pager Callback Number interval.
Dials the number entered in 47-01-07:
Digital Pager Callback Number.
The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing approximately 4 seconds after trunk seizure. This means that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback
Number is dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after trunk seizure.
(Notify Pager Intvl)
Use this option to set the minimum time (1
~ 255 minutes) between unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager Message Notification callouts. (A subscriber acknowledges a digital pager notification by logging onto their mailbox.)
After this time expires, InMail tries the callout again (for up to the number of times set in 47-01-14: Number of Callout At-
tempts).
If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy, it retries the number in one minute.
Default
5
X * M#
30
15
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-401
Program
47
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
10
Item
Wait Between Non-
Pager Callout Attempts
Input Data
1 ~ 255 minutes
11
Wait Between Busy
Non-Pager Callout Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
12
Wait Between RNA
Non-Pager Callout Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
13
Number of RNA rings
(V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 99 rings
14
Number of Cascading
Attempts (V1.5
Changed)
1 ~ 99 rings
15
Send Pager Callout
Until Acknowledged
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
16
Name Format
0 = First-Last
1 = Last-First
Description
(Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Use this option to set the minimum time (1
~ 255 minutes) between non-pager Message Notification callouts in which the destination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security code.
(Notify Busy Intvl)
Use this option to set how long InMail waits (1 ~ 255 minutes) after it dials a busy non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number.
(Notify RNA Intvl)
Use this option to set how long InMail waits (1 ~ 255 minutes), after it dials an unanswered non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered non-pager callouts:
• If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-
Pager Callout Attempts option.
• If the destination answers, says Hello (or the system detects answer supervision) and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox. This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with notification answers the callout, or if the callout is picked up by an answering machine.
• If the destination answers and then hangs up without saying Hello. This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with the notification answers the callout (like the above example), or if the call is picked up by an answering machine with insufficient outgoing message volume.
If a non-pager callout rings the destination longer than this interval (1 ~ 99 rings), In-
Mail marks the call as unanswered (Ring
No Answer) and hangs up.
Use this option to set how many times (1 ~
99 rings) InMail retries an incomplete Message Notification callout.
This total includes unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an unanswered destination.
This option applies to pager and non-pager callouts.
(Retry Until Ack)
When this option is enabled (1), InMail continues to retry a digital pager Message
Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged.
If this option is disabled (0), InMail retries a digital pager Message Notification the number of times specified in 47-01-14
Number of Callout Attempts. This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is considered acknowledged when the recipient logs onto the mailbox.
Specify if names are displayed in First-
Last format or Last-First.
Default
20
15
30
5
1
0
0
2-402 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
17
18
19
Item Input Data Description
InMail Port
Play PAD Control
Record PAD Control
(for Networking)
0 ~ 85 (V2.0 Changed)
(Can only use the port numbers provided in the description section.)
When using V2.0 or higher software the In-
Mail can be assigned to ports 85-100 and will not affect the total station and trunk ports. In addition when the SL1100 is defaulted with an InMail CF mounted the In-
Mail is automatically assigned to ports
85-100 and when a SL1100 is upgraded to
V2.0 or higher software the InMail ports can be moved to 85-100.
The first port of InMail must start with one of the following ports:
5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49,
53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77, 79, 81, 85. Only able to set 61~85 with V2.0 or higher
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5
dBm)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5
dBm)
Default
0
32
32
Program
47
Conditions
• When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new setting to take effect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-403
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. Normally, InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1 ~ 64 should correspond to extensions 101-164.
Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or Master. You can also set up
Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.
Input Data
Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description Default
Mailbox Type
Mailbox Number
0 = None
1 = Personal
2 = Group
Up to eight digits
Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox. An extension mailbox is not accessible when it is disabled (even though its stored messages and configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a user pressing Message initiates a remote logon and is asked to enter their mailbox number. A voice prompt then announces: “That mailbox does not exist.”
To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds to extension 101.
Use this option to select the extension number associated with the mailbox you are programming. Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number 101, mailbox
2 should use Mailbox Number 201, 101 etc.
To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds to extension 101.
Number of Messages
0 ~ 99 messages
Message Playback
Order
To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes.
0 (FIFO = first-in/ firstout, or oldest messages first).
1 (LIFO = last-in/ firstout, or newest messages first)
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the
Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached, they hear : “That mailbox is full.” InMail then hangs up.
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, InMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in/ first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).
Mailbox 1 ~ 64 :
1
Mailbox 65 ~ : 0
Mailbox 1 = 101
Mailbox 2 ~ 64 =
102 ~ 164
Mailbox 65 ~ =
No Setting
Mailbox 1 = 99
Mailbox 2 ~ = 20
0
2-404 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
05
06
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Auto Erase/Save of
Messages
Message Retention
Recording Conversation Beep
Message Waiting
Lamp
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
0 = Erase
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up,
InMail erases the message.
1 = Save
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up,
InMail saves the message.
0 ~ 99 Days
(0 = Indefinite)
Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of this option, InMail either automatically saves or erases the message.
If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new message, InMail retains the message as a new message.
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to determine how long a
Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval,
InMail deletes it.
(Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while
InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
Provides an additional Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice
Mail Integration Options : Record Alert
Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds).
To disable the Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option.
(Update MW Lamp)
Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For
Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.
(Auto-ATT DND)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a message.
A subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting.
Default
1
0
1
1
0
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-405
Program
47
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Item Input Data Description Default
Forced Unscreened
Transfer
Auto Time Stamp
System Administrator 0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Dialing Option
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Call Routing Mailbox
Number (1 ~ 3 digits, 00
~ 32)
(00 = Undefined)
No entry (Entered by pressing CLEAR)
Directory List Number 0 = None
1 ~ 8 = List Number
*
= All
Voice Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default
.
Enable Paging
Paging Option
Telephone User Interface Type
Enable E-mail Notification
E-mail Address
Include Message as
Attachment
All Message Notification Enabled
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 = RNA
1 = Immediately
0 = Numeric
1 = Mnemonic
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
(Forced UTRF)
Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened
Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened
Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened
Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally.
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Time
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp also announces the message sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time
Stamp from their mailbox.
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the SA options after logging onto their mailbox.
Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls
(see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any of the options in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next
Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).
(Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber
Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depend on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.
0
0
Mailbox 1 (200)
= 1
Mailbox 2 ~= 0
0
1
0
Station Mailbox
Number
1
0
0
0
0
No Setting
1
1
2-406 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
24
25
26
27
28
Item Input Data Description
All Find-Me Follow-
Me Enabled
0 = No
1 = Yes
Security Code Option 0 = Always
1 = Remote Logon only
Auto Play (V1.5 Added)
Email message Save/
Delete Option (V1.5
Added)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
0 = No Change
1 = Save
2 = Delete
Queuing (V3.0 Added) 0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
Use this option to enable or disable Message Notification Queuing. If enabled,
Message Notification is stored in queue when there is no active notification destination.
47-02-16
Item
0
Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default Table
Name
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)
Default
0
0
0
0
Program
47
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-407
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01 ~ 32). A
Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
Mailbox Number
03
Mailbox Type
Group Mailbox Number
03
Routing Mailbox
Number
Input Data Description
01 ~ 32
Up to eight digits
No Setting (entered by pressing Hold)
0 = None
1 = Subscriber
2 = Routing
01 ~ 32
(Mailbox Number)
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master (pilot) number. Use this option to select the Department Group master (pilot) number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming.
(Mailbox Type)
Use this option to set the Group Mailbox type. There are three types of InMail mailboxes : None (0), Subscriber (1) and Routing (2).
Default
No Setting
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-408 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a
Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03 : Master Mailbox Type.
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Number of Messages
00 ~ 99 messages
Message Playback
Order
To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes.
0 (FIFO = first-in/ firstout, or oldest messages first).
1 (LIFO = last-in/ firstout, or newest messages first).
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the
Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” InMail then hangs up.
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, InMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in/ first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).
Auto Erase/Save of
Messages
Message Retention
0 = Erase
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up,
InMail erases the message.
1 = Save
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up,
InMail saves the message.
0 ~ 90 days
(0 = Indefinite)
Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of this option, InMail either automatically saves or erases the message.
If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new message, InMail retains the message as a new message.
Use this option to determine how long a
Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval,
InMail deletes it.
Default
20
0
1
0
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-409
Program
47
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
05
Item Input Data
Recording Conversation Beep
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
06
Message Waiting
Lamp
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
07
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
08
Forced Unscreened
Transfer
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
09
Auto Time Stamp
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
10 System Administrator 0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Description
(Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while
InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
Provides an additional Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice
Mail Integration Options : Record Alert
Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds).
To disable Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option.
(Update MW Lamp)
Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting light at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Attendant Direct to VM. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM, an
Automated Attendant caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to
VM while recording their mailbox greeting.
(Forced UTRF)
Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened
Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened
Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened
Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally.
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp also announces the message sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time
Stamp from their mailbox.
(System Admin)
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the options after logging onto their mailbox.
Default
1
1
0
0
0
0
2-410 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Item Input Data Description Default
Dialing Option
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 ~ 32
(0 = Undefined)
Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls
(see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call
Routing Mailbox 0 action).
(Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber
Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.
Specify the Directory List number to which the Group Mailbox belongs.
0
1
(Call Routing
Mailbox 01)
By default, Call
Routing Mailbox numbers are 01
= 16.
0 Directory List Number 0 = None
1 ~ 8 = List Number
* = All
Voice Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-10 47-06-14 Default Table on page 2-412
.
Enable Paging
Paging Option
Telephone User Interface
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = RNA
1 = Immediate
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
Enable Email Notification
Email Address
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
Include Msg as Attachment
0 = No
1 = Yes
All Message Notification Enabled
All Find-Me Follow-
Me Enabled
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
Security Code Option 0 = Always
1 = Remote Logon only
Auto Play (V1.5 Added)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Email message Save /
Delete Option (V1.5
Added)
0 = No Change
1 = Save
2 = Delete
Queuing (V3.0 Added) 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or disable Message Notification Queuing. If enabled,
Message Notification is stored in queue when there is no active notification destination.
1
0
0
0
0
No Setting
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-411
Program
47
SL1100
47-06-14
Item
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
Table 2-10 47-06-14 Default Table
Name
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)
2-412 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes. Routing
Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes.
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32
Item
No.
02
03
04
Item Input Data
Routing Mailbox Type 0 = None
1 = Call Routing
2 = Announcement
3 = Directory
4 = Distribution
Prompt Language
Telephone User Interface
Refer to Table 2-11 47-07-03 Default Table on page 2-414
.
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
Description Default
(Mailbox Type)
Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox type.
Mailboxes 01 ~
08 = 1 (Call
Routing)
Mailboxes 09 ~
32 = 2 (Announcement)
1
0
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-413
Program
47
SL1100
47-07-03
Item
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
Table 2-11 47-07-03 Default Table
Name
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)
2-414 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as
Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Description Default
Dial Action Table
Screened Transfer
Timeout
Time Limit for Dialing
Commands
Fax Detection
Fax Extension
1 ~ 32 (Dial Action Table
1 ~ 32) (V3.0 Changed)
Use this option to assign the Dial Action
Table to the Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial
Action Table defines the dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox.
0 ~ 255 seconds
Entering 0 causes immediate recall.
(Scrn Trf Timeout)
Use this option to set how long a Screened
Transfer (TRF) from the Automated Attendant rings an unanswered extension before recalling.
This option has a similar function as Customize: Mailbox Options: Call Routing:
[Call Handling] Options: Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in InMail.
0 ~ 99 seconds
Entering 0 causes the
Automated Attendant to immediately route callers to the Timeout destination programmed in the active Dial Action Table.
(Dialing Timeout)
This option determines how long InMail waits for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination.
Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a
Timeout action programmed.
If the caller waits too long to dial:
When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed, the caller routes to that destination.
When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats three times and then InMail hangs up.
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Up to eight digits
Use this option to enable or disable Fax
Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox. In enabled, the InMail Automated Attendant
(when using this Call Routing Mailbox) detects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax call then routes to the company fax machine according to the setting of 47-01-06 : Fax
Extension. If disabled, the Automated Attendant does not detect incoming fax calls.
1 (Dial Action
Table 1)
15 seconds
5 seconds
0
No Setting
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-415
Program
47
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-416 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as
Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
02
Repeat Count
03
Hang Up After
Input Data Description
01 ~ 32
Call Routing Mailbox
Number (01 ~ 32)
Next Call Routing Mailbox 00 ~ 32
00 = Undefined
0 ~ 10 (Announcement repeats 1 ~ 10 times)
(0 = No Repeats)
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
(Next CR Mbox)
If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant calls, use this option to provide additional routing options to the Automated Attendant callers.
This option interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up After below.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide.
Enter the number of times you want the
Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to callers. After an Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to the message, it repeats the number of times specified in this option. This option interacts with Next Call
Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when providing routing options.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide.
(HangUp)
Use this option along with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide additional routing options to Automated Attendant callers.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide.
Default
0
0
0
Program
47
Conditions
None
Programming Manual 2-417
Program
47
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-418 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : InMail Trunk Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-10 : InMail Trunk Options to assign InMail options for each trunk. Currently, only
47-10-01 : Answer Table Assignment is available.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data Description
Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table (1 ~ 16)
(V3.0 Changed)
Record PAD Control
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dBm ~ +
15.5 dBm)
Voice Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-12 47-10-03 Default Table on page 2-420
.
Telephone User Interface
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
(Answer Table)
Use this option to assign an InMail Answer
Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the
Automated Attendant should answer. The
Automated Attendant follows the routing specified by the selected Answer Table.
Default
1
32
1
0
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-419
Program
47
SL1100
47-10-03
Item
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
Table 2-12 47-10-03 Default Table
Name
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)
2-420 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. InMail provides eight Answer Tables (1 ~ 16 (V3.0 higher) ). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 : InMail Answer Table Schedule.
Input Data
Answer Table Number
Item
No.
Item
01 Answer Schedule Override (Schedule Override)
Use this option to enable or disable
Answer Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table. If enabled (and you make an entry for Override Mailbox below), the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override Mailbox.
Input Data
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
1 ~ 16 (V3.0 Changed)
Description Default
0
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-421
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
47
Item
No.
Item Input Data Description
02 Override Mailbox Category (Override MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override.
• If the Override Mailbox is a Sub-
scriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.
• If the Override Mailbox is a Master
Mailbox, the outside caller shears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement
Mailbox is programmed, InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options.
• If the Override Mailbox is a Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.
0 = Undefined
1 = Subscriber Mailbox -
STA
2 = Master Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the
Override Mailbox Number selection (below).
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 84. refer to <
Mail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404
>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408
>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-413
>
Override Mailbox Number (Override
MB Num)
Use this option to specify the mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer
Schedule Override. The mailbox number you select in this option should match the mailbox category specified in 47-11-02 : Override Mailbox Cate-
gory above.
Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ 9) Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 84. refer to <
Mail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404
>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408
>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-413
>
Default
0
No setting
2-422 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
Item Input Data Description
03 Default Mailbox Category(Default
MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of mailbox used as the Default Mailbox.
• If the Default Mailbox is a Sub-
scriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.
• If the Default Mailbox is a Master
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement
Mailbox is programmed, InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options.
• If the Default Mailbox is a Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.
0 = Undefined
1 = Subscriber Mailbox -
STA
2 = Master Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 84. refer to <
Mail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404
>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408
>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-413
>
If any of the Input Data values are entered, the terminal displays the
Override Mailbox Number selection (below). If any of the Input
Data values are entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number (Default
MB Num)
Use this option to set the Answer Table Default Mailbox number. InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect. By default, this occurs at all times other than Monday through Friday from
8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.
Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ 9) Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 84. refer to <
Mail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404
>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408
>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer to <
Mail Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-413
>
04
Next Answer Table
When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are not sufficient, use this option to link two Answer Tables together. InMail treats the two linked tables as a single 20 entry Answer Table.
Answer Table (0 ~ 16) (V3.0
Changed)
0 = Undefined
Default
Answer Table 1 = 3
Answer Table 2 ~ 8 = 0
Answer Table 1 = 1
Answer Table 2 ~ 8 =
No setting
0
Program
47
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-423
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules to set up the InMail Automated Attendant Answer
Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table.
Input Data
Answer Table Number
Schedule Entry Number
1 ~ 16 (V3.0 Changed)
1 ~ 10
2-424 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
01
Item
Schedule Type
SL1100
Input Data
0 = Undefined
1 = Day of the Week
2 = Range of Days
3 = Date
Default Description
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
All other schedules =
0
(Entryxx Schedule Type)
Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer
Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the Answer Schedule answers calls.
The schedule can be one of the following types:
• 1. Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week.
For this type of schedule, you select:
- The day of the week the schedule should run:
- The schedule start time.
- The schedule end time.
- The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer calls.
• 2. Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days. For this type of schedule, you select:
- The day of the week the schedule should start.
- The day of the week the schedule should stop.
- The time on the start day the schedule should start.
- The time on the stop day the schedule should stop.
- The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls.
• 3. Date
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day of the year. For this type of schedule, you select:
- The specific date the schedule should run.
- On the selected date, the time the schedule should start.
- On the selected date, the time the schedule should stop.
- The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls.
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-425
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
47
Item
No.
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data Default Description
Answering Mailbox Category
(Entryxx MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of mailbox to which
Automated Attendant calls should route when the schedule is in effect.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Master Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides additional dialing options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.
0 = Undefined
1 = Subscriber Mailbox
- STA
2 = Master Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
Answering Mailbox Number
(Entryxx MB Num)
Use this option to set the number of the Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant uses when the selected schedule is in effect. This mailbox is defined in 47-12-02 : Answering
Mailbox Category.
Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~
9)
Day of the Week
(Entryxx Day)
For Day of the Week (Type 1)
Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should be active.
Start Day
(Entryxx Start Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2)
Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should start.
End Day
(Entryxx End Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2)
Answer Schedules, use this option to select the day of the week the Answer Schedule should end.
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 3
All Other Schedules
= 0
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
All Other Schedules
= 1
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 6
All Other Answer
Schedules = 1
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 84. refer to < 47-02 : InMail
Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404 >
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to < 47-03 : InMail
Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408 >
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to < 47-07 : InMail
Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-413 >
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 1
All Other Answer
Schedules = No setting
All Schedules = 1
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 84. refer to < 47-02 : InMail
Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404 >
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to < 47-03 : InMail
Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408 >
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to < 47-07 : InMail
Routing Mailbox Options on page 2-413 >
2-426 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
06
07
08
Item Input Data
Date
(Entryxx Date)
For Date (Type 3) Answer
Schedules, use this option to select the date the Answer
Schedule should be active.
Schedule Start Time
(Entryxx Start Time)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer Schedule should start. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same entry for
47-12-07 : Schedule Start
Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule
End Time.)
Schedule End Time
(Entryxx End Time)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer Schedule should end. It applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same entry for
47-12-07 : Schedule Start
Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule
End Time.)
MMDD
For example :
- 0101 = January 1
- 1231 = December 31
(0000 = Undefined)
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example :
- 0130 = 1 : 30 AM
- 1700 = 5 : 00 PM
(0000 = Undefined)
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example :
- 0130 = 1 : 30 AM
- 1700 = 5 : 00 PM
(0000 = Undefined)
Default
All Schedule = 0000
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 0830
All other schedules are 0000.
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 1700
All Other Schedules
= 0000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Description
SL1100
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-427
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the InMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial
Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an
Answer Table is active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default InMail system. There are 32 (V3.0 or higher) Dial Action Tables.
Input Data
Dial Action Table Number
Key Number
01 ~ 32 (V3.0 Changed)
0 ~ 9, * , #, TIMEOUT
2-428 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item No.
01
Name
Action
Data
Input Data
0 = UND (Undefined)
1 = TRF (Transfer)
2 = UTRF (Unscreened Transfer)
3 = REC1
4 = REC2
5 = LOGON
6 = Hang Up
7 = GOTO
Up to 8 digits
(0 ~ 9, * , #)
X = Caller Dialed Digits
I = Ignore Digits
N = No Routing
P = Pause
Description
• TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
• UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
• REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1)
• REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4)
(REC2)
• LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)
• Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
• GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
• UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
• Digits
Entry : 0 ~ 9, #, and * (8 digits max.)
Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant call to a specific location (such as an extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to extension 305, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.
• Caller Dialed Digits
Entry : X(Entered by pressing LK2)
Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents one caller dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the 301 ~ 399 range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
• Ignore Digits
Entry : I(Entered by pressing LK3)
Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the Automated Attendant caller that PZ-VM21 InMail ignores for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned to the * key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action is REC2 and the Number is IXXX. This means that a caller can dial
* + any mailbox number to leave a Quick Message in that mailbox. InMail ignores the first digit dialed by the caller
( * ), and routes according to the next 3 digits dialed.
• No Routing
Entry : N(Entered by pressing LK1)
Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the
LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the caller dials #, they hear,
Please enter the mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.
• Pause
Entry : P(Entered by pressing LK4)
Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant to pause while dialing.
Program
47
Defaults
Key
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16
Action Data Action Data
2 (UTRF)
0 (UND)
2 (UTRF)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
XXX
0
XXXX
0
0
0
0
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Programming Manual 2-429
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
47
Key
8
9
0
*
#
TIMEOUT
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Dial Action Table 1
Action Data
Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16
Action Data
0 (UND)
6 (Hang Up)
2 (UTRF)
3 (REC1)
5 (LOGON)
2 (UTRF)
0
0
101
IXXX
IXXX
101
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0
0
0
0
0
0
TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.
Note
If Action is set 0 or 6 skip Data setting.
"XXX"= change as it fit
The “Data” data needs to follow these rules below.
0 (UND) = none
1 (TRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P
2 (UTRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P
3 (REC1) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
4 (REC2) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
5 (LOGON) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
6 (HANGUP) = none
7 (GOTO) = routing mailbox number index (1 ~ 32)
Otherwise it will not be routed properly.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-430 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox
Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type) was set to Type 4
(Directory).
Input Data
Master Mailbox Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item
Minimum Number of Letters Required
Directory List Number to Use
Name Match
1 ~ 3
1 ~ 8
0 = First
1 = Last
Transfer Option
Screened Transfer Timeout
0 ~ 255
Time Limit for Dialing Commands
0 ~ 99
Fax Detection
0 = TRF
1 = UTRF
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Fax Extension
0 ~ 32
Up to eight digits
Input Data
01 ~ 32
Default
15
5
0
0
No Setting
1
1
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-431
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47-07-02 is set to 4 (Distribution).
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32
01 ~ 20 Entry Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Distribution Mailbox Category
Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox
Number setting.
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting
Mailbox Number to 1 ~ 84
(Program 47-02).
Use Group Number (2) for setting
Group Mailbox (1 ~ 32)
(Program 47-03).
Distribution Mailbox Number
Input Data Description
0 = Undefined
1 = Station
Mailbox
2 = Group
Mailbox
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 84. refer
to < 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404 >
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer
to < 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408 >
Up to 3 digits Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 84. refer
to < 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options on page 2-404 >
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer
to < 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on page 2-408 >
Default
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-432 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-18 : InMail SMTP Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-18 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
SMTP Enabled
Item
02
03
04
05
Server Name
SMTP Port
Encryption
Authentication
06
07
08
09
User Name
Password
E-mail Address
Reply to Address
Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
0 ~ 65535
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
2 = POP3
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Default
0
No Setting
25
0
0
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-433
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Server Name
POP3 Port
Encryption
Item
04
05
User Name
Password
Input Data
Up to 48 characters
0 ~ 65535
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Default
No Setting
110
0
No Setting
No Setting
2-434 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 47 : InMail
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options
Description
Use Program 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Station
Mailbox Message Notification Options.
Input Data
Station Mailbox Number
Index Number 1 ~ 5
05
06
07
08
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Item Input Data
Notification
Notification Begin Hour
Notification End Hour
Notification Type
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
0 = Undefined
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
Notification Number
Notification Busy Attempts
Notification RNA Attempts
Notification Security
Notification Day of week - Sunday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Monday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Tuesday
(V1.5 Added)
Up to 16 digits
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notification Day of week - Wednes-
day (V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Thurs-
day (V1.5 Added)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notification Day of week - Friday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Saturday
(V1.5 Added)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
001 ~ 084
1
1
1
1
No Setting
5
5
1
1
1
1
Default
0
00
00
1
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-435
Program
47
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-436 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Station
Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options.
Input Data
Station Mailbox Number
Index Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Find-Me Follow-Me
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Input Data
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Sunday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Monday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Tuesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Wednesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Thursday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Friday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Saturday (V1.5 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
Up to 16 digits
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
001 ~ 084
1 ~ 3
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
00
00
No Setting
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-437
Program
47
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Group
Mailbox Message Notification Options.
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number
Index Number
05
06
07
08
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Item Input Data
Notification
Notification Begin Hour
Notification End Hour
Notification Type
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
0 = Undefined
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
Notification Number
Notification Busy Attempts
Notification RNA Attempts
Notification Security
Notification Day of week - Sunday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Monday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Tuesday
(V1.5 Added)
Up to 16 digits
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notification Day of week - Wednes-
day (V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Thurs-
day (V1.5 Added)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notification Day of week - Friday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Saturday
(V1.5 Added)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1 ~ 5
01 ~ 32
1
1
1
1
No Setting
5
5
1
1
1
1
Default
0
00
00
1
2-438 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
47
Programming Manual 2-439
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 47 : InMail
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level:
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Group
Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options.
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number
Index Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Find-Me Follow-Me
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Input Data
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Sunday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Monday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Tuesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Wednesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Thursday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Friday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week -
Saturday (V1.5 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
Up to 16 digits
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1 ~ 3
01 ~ 32
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
00
00
No Setting
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-440 Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.
Input Data
Service Tone Number
Item
No.
01
Repeat Count
Item
Unit Number
Input Data
0 ~ 255 (0 = Endless)
Item
No.
02
Item
Basic Tone Number
03
04
Duration Count
Gain Level (dB)
Basic Tone No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Input Data
0 ~ 33
(0 = No Tone)
(33 = Default Time Slot)
0 ~ 255 (0, 100 ~ 25500 ms)
0 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5)
Table 2-13 Basic Tones
Frequency (Hz)
400
520
580
660
700
800
880
1050
350 / 440
440 / 480
480 / 620
440
-- Reserve --
520 / 650
01 ~ 64
1 ~ 8
Default
Refer below
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Level (dB)
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 16 / - 16
- 16 / - 16
- 21 / - 21
-16
-
-19 / -13
Programming Manual 2-441
Program
80
Program
80
SL1100
Basic Tone No.
19
20
21
22
23
15
16
17
18
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Frequency (Hz)
650 / 780
780 / 1040
520 / 650
650 / 780
780 / 1040
1040
450
950
1800
400 / 450
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
Default
Service
Tone
No.
1
2
3
Service Tone Name
No tone
Internal Dial Tone
Stutter Dial Tone
(Special Dial Tone)
4
5
6
7
Internal Recall Dial Tone
(Transfer Dial Tone)
Trunk Dial Tone
Internal Busy Tone
(Busy Tone)
DND Busy Tone
8 B-busy Tone
9 Internal Reorder Tone
(Congestion Tone)
10 Internal Interrupt Tone
(Warning Tone)
11 Internal Confirmation Tone
(Confirmation Tone)
12 Internal Hold Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit Count Basic Tone
No.
Duration Gain Level (dB)
2
1
2
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
6
5
5
2
2
5
5
1
1
10
10
10
1
1
2
1
1
77
3
2
3
2
1
1
0
0
11
0
1
0
11
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
11
0
11
0
0
9
0
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
2-442 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
Level (dB)
-19 / -13
-19 / -13
-13 / -19
-13 / -19
-13 / -19
-13
-13
-13
-13
-13/-13
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ISSUE 3.01
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone Name
13 External Hold Tone
14 Internal Ring-back Tone
(Internal Audible Ring)
(Ring Back Tone)
15 Override Tone
16 Lock-out Tone
17 Clock alarm tone
18 BGM
19 Doorphone chime 1
20 Doorphone chime 2
21 Doorphone chime 3
22 Doorphone chime 4
23 Doorphone chime 5
24 Doorphone chime 6
25 Service Set Tone
26 Service Clear Tone
27 Talk-Back Tone
28 Speaker Monitor Tone
29 Door Relay Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit Count Basic Tone
No.
Duration Gain Level (dB)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
1
0
3
1
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
0
6
1
2
4
0
2
6
6
6
6
6
2
2
3
4
6
5
4
6
5
2
2
3
3
4
6
2
2
5
1
1
2
2
3
2
1
1
2
2
3
2
1
7
1
1
0
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
0
10
30
32 (0 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
20 (- 6 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
8
8
6
6
6
0
5
5
0
7
7
5
2
2
2
4
4
0
7
7
5
5
5
0
4
4
2
2
2
0
6
0
6
0
0
12
0
6
0
9
0
9
0
6
6
6
8
8
6
0
0
6
0
6
0
10
0
Programming Manual 2-443
Program
80
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
80
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone Name
30 Doorphone Call Tone
31 Paging Tone
32 Splash Tone 1
33 Splash Tone 2
34 Splash Tone 3
35 1 Sec Signal Tone
36 External audible ring tone
37 External reorder tone
38 External busy tone
39 Special audible ring-busy tone
40 Internal Call Waiting Tone
(Transfer, Call Waiting
Tone)
41 Intrusion tone
42 Conference tone
43 Intrusion tone 2
44 External Dial Tone
(DUD,DISA Dial Tone)
45 External Ring Back Tone
(Ring Tone DDI)
46 External Busy Tone
(Busy Tone DDI)
47 Number unobtainable tone
48 VM message indication tone
50 External special audible ring tone
51 External intercept tone
52 External call waiting tone
53 External executive override tone
55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1
56 Warning Beep Tone Signaling
Repeat
Count
Unit Count Basic Tone
No.
Duration Gain Level (dB)
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
3
1
0
1
2
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
2
30
3
2
3
10
10
30
5
5
0
0
8
0
1
5
0
9
0
10
12
0
12
4
12
12
10
0
0
11
11
3
2
0
9
12
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
30
5
5
5
5
10
20
2
5
5
2
3
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
6
10
0
0
11
0
11
10
0
12
0
11
0
11
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
2-444 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone Name
57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing
Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit Count Basic Tone
No.
0 5
58 Opening Chime tone
59 Ending Chime tone
60 Splash tone 1 (Mute)
61 Splash tone 2 (Mute)
62 Splash tone 3 (Mute)
63 EXT SPK Ring-back Tone
64 Special Hold Tone
1
1
1
2
3
0
0
8
8
2
2
2
2
4
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
0
6
2
2
14
14
15
15
16
16
0
2
0
2
0
10
0
11
0
11
0
0
6
0
6
Duration
2
2
2
6
4
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
2
1
1
1
20
10
30
2
3
2
12
1
1
1
1
Gain Level (dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
8 (- 12dB)
8 (- 12 dB)
8 (- 12dB)
8 (- 12 dB)
8 (- 12dB)
8 (- 12 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
35 (+ 1.5 dB)
32 (0 dB)
35 (+ 1.5 dB)
32 (0 dB)
Program
80
Conditions
• The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
• Selectable Ring Tones
Programming Manual 2-445
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
Level:
MF
Program
80
Description
Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for
DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make separate entries for duration and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Duration
Pause
Tone Level (Low) (dB)
04
Tone Level (High)
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 97
(- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)
1 ~ 97
(- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)
Input Data Default
5 (100 ms)
5 (100 ms)
65 (- 13 dB)
69 (- 11 dB)
Duration
Pause
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-446 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the
DTMF Tone Receiver.
DTMF Tone Receiver Type :
• 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
• 2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk
• 3 ~ 5 = Reserved
Input Data
Item
No.
01
DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number
Item
Detect Level
02
03
Start Delay Time
Min. Detect Level
1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk
3 = --- Reserved ---
4 = --- Reserved ---
5 = --- Reserved ---
Input Data Description Default
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
0 ~ 255 (0.25 ms ~ 64 ms)
0 ~ 15
DTMF Tone 0 = - 10 dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 1 = - 15 dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 2 = - 20 dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 3 = - 25 dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 4 = - 30 dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 5 = - 35 dBm (0) to - 50 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 6 = - 40 dBm (0) to - 55 dBm (15)
Used to select the systems DTMF tone detection levels.
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Program
80
Programming Manual 2-447
Program
80
SL1100
Item
No.
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item Input Data
Max. Detect Level
Forward Twist Level
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
Backward Twist Level 0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
ON Detect Time
0 ~ 15
DTMF Tone 0 = 0 dBm
(0) to - 15 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 1 = - 5 dBm
(0) to - 20 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 2 = - 10 dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 3 = - 15 dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 4 = - 20 dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 5 = - 25 dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 6 = - 30 dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15)
OFF Detect Time
Area Type
1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~
3825 ms)
1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~
3825 ms)
0 = Other
1 = Aust
Description
ISSUE 3.01
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Default
Item
No
04
05
06
07
08
09
01
02
03
Item
Detect Level
Start delay time
Min. detect level
Max. detect level
Forward twist level
Backward twist level
ON detect time
OFF detect time
Area Type
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
0 (1 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
0 (1 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
0 (1 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
0 (1 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
0 (1 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-448 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector.
Tone Detector Type :
• 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
• 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
• 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
• 4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
• 5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk
Input Data
Tone Detector Type Number
Item
No.
01
Detection Level
Item
02
Min. Detection Level
03
04
S/N Ratio
No Tone Time
05
06
07
Pulse Count
ON Minimum Time
ON Maximum Time
1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk
Input Data
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
0 ~ 15
0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15)
6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15)
0 ~ 4 (0 dB ~ - 20 dB)
0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
(0 = not detect)
1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680 ms
The formula is 30 + 30N
When set to N = 1, it means 30 + 30
*
1 = 60.
When set to N = 255, it means 30 + 30 * 255 =
7680.
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Program
80
Programming Manual 2-449
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
08
09
12
Item
OFF Minimum Time
OFF Maximum Time
Frequency No. 1
13
14
Frequency No. 2
Twist Level
Program
80
Default
Item Name
3
4
5
1
2
Detect Level
Min. detect level
S/N ratio
No tone time
Pulse Count
8
9
6
7
ON min. time
ON max. time
OFF min. time
OFF max. time
12 Frequency No 1
13 Frequency No 2
14 Twist Level
Type 1 (DT)
0 (- 25 dBm)
15 (- 25 dBm)
4 (- 20 dB)
132 (3990 ms)
1
9 (300 ms)
0
1 (60 ms)
1 (60 ms)
1
2
0
Input Data
1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
1 ~ 8
(Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
0 ~ 8 (0 = Not Used)
(Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
0 ~ 10 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
(0 = Not Used)
Type 2 (BT)
0 (- 25 dBm)
15 (- 25 dBm)
4 (- 20 dB)
132 (3990 ms)
1
12 (390 ms)
20 (630 ms)
12 (390 ms)
20 (630 ms)
3
4
0
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Type 3 (RBT)
0 (- 25 dBm)
15 (- 25 dBm)
4 (- 20 dB)
132 (3990 ms)
1
25 (780 ms)
40 (1230 ms)
83 (2520 ms)
115 (3480 ms)
2
3
0
Type 4
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Type 5
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-450 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Date Format
Item Input Data
0 = American Format (Month / Day / Year)
1 = Japanese Format (Year / Month / Day)
2 = European Format (Day / Month / Year)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
80
Programming Manual 2-451
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level:
MF
Program
80
Description
Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.
Input Data
Frequency Table Number
Item
No.
01
Frequency
Item
0, 10 ~ 255
(100 ~ 2550 Hz)
(0 = Not used)
Input Data
1 ~ 8
Default
Frequency Table No. 1
= 35 (350 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 2
= 44 (440 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 3
= 48 (480 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 4
= 62 (620 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 5
= 0
Frequency Table No. 6
= 0
Frequency Table No. 7
= 0
Frequency Table No. 8
= 0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-452 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-08 : MFC Tone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 80-08 : MFC Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for MFC dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. And also it is possible to adjust the level of tone.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Duration (On time)
Pause (Off time)
Tone Level
Duration
Input Data
1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms)
1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms)
1 ~ 97 (- 45 dB ~ + 3 dB)
Default
5 (100 ms)
5 (100 ms)
77 (- 7 dB)
Program
80
Pause
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-453
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-09 : Short Ring Setup
Level:
IN
Program
80
Description
Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SL1100 multiline terminals.
Input Data
Short Ring Number 01 ~ 32
Data
01
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Item
No.
01
Item
Frequency 1
Input Data Description
02
03
Frequency 2
Ring Cycle
00 = No setting, 01 ~ 15
Refer to Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table
00 = No setting, 01 ~ 15
Refer to Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table
00 = No setting, 01 ~ 14
Refer to Table 2-15 Ring Cycle Table on page 2-455 .
When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value.
Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table
Frequency (Hz)
392
880
988
1046
1175
1318
1397
1568
440
494
523
587
659
698
784
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
2-454 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Data
05
06
07
08
09
01
02
03
04
10
11
12
13
14
Table 2-15 Ring Cycle Table
Ring Cycle (ms)
125 (On) / Off
125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
250 (On) / Off
250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
325 (On) / Off
325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / Off
325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / Off
500 (On) / Off
500 (On) / 500 (Off) / 500 (On) / Off
1000 (On) / Off
Short Ring No.
Short Tone Name
1 Confirmation Tone
:
4
32
2
3
Error Tone
Alarm Tone for long conversation call
Not defined
:
Not defined
Table 2-16 Default Table
Frequency 1
8
8
4
Frequency 2
8
8
4
:
0
0
:
0
0
Ring Cycle
1
14
14
0
:
0
Program
80
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-455
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF
Program
80
Description
Use Program 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various level and time for MF Tone
Receiver.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
MF Tone Receiver Type Number
Detect Level
05
06
07
08
twist level
S/N ratio
ON detect time
OFF detect time
Item
02
03
Start delay time
Min. detect level
04
Max. detect level
Input Data
1 = MF Receiver for Extension
2 = MF Receiver for Trunk
3 = -- Reserve --
4 = -- Reserve --
5 = -- Reserve --
Default
Refer below 0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
0 ~ 255 (0.25 step, 0 ms ~ 64 ms)
0 ~ 15 detect level 0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15) detect level 1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15) detect level 2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15) detect level 3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15) detect level 4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15) detect level 5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15) detect level 6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15)
0 ~ 15 detect level 0 = 0 dBm (0) ~ - 15 dBm (15) detect level 1 = - 5 dBm (0) ~ - 20 dBm (15) detect level 2 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15) detect level 3 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15) detect level 4 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15) detect level 5 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15) detect level 6 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
0 ~ 4 (- 5 step, 0 dB ~ - 20 dB)
1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms)
1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms)
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
2-456 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Default
Item
No.
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
Item Name Type 1
Detect Level
Start delay time
0
0
Min. detect level 10 (- 20 dBm)
Max. detect level 2 (- 2 dBm) twist level
S/N ratio
ON detect time
OFF detect time
5 (6 dBm)
2 (- 10 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
Type 2
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 ( 6 dBm)
2 (- 10 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
Type 3
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
2 (- 10 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
Type 4
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
2 (- 10 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
Type 5
0
0
10 (- 20 dBm)
2 (- 2 dBm)
5 (6 dBm)
2 (- 10 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
Program
80
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-457
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup
Level:
IN
Program
80
Description
Use Program 80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup defines the type and level for Caller ID detection of
DSP.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Type
Item
05
06
07
02
03
04
Level (Mark)
Level (Space)
Bit Sampling Type
1st Bit Offset
Minimum Seizure Count
Guard Time when Mark
0 = NTT
1 = Other
2 = Korea
0 ~ 32766
0 ~ 32766
0 = Other
1 = Malaysia
0 ~ 32766
0 ~ 32766
0 ~ 32766
Input Data Default
1
10
10
1
50
50
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-458 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the
COIU.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
Item
PCM Encoding Method Specification
Loop Current Detection Time
Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time
Ringing Signal Detection Minimum
Time
Single Ringing Detection Minimum
Time
Double Ringing Detection Minimum Off Time
Double Ringing Detection Maximum Off Time
Ringing Signal not Detection Minimum
Time Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time
Continuous Ringing Minimum
Time
Continuous Ringing Maximum
Time
Hook Flash 1 Time
Hook Flash 2 Time
Pause Time
PFT Idle Detection Time
Loop Reverse Detect Minimum
Time
Loop Reverse Detect Maximum
Time
Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum
Time
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 = μ-law
1 = A-law
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
Input Data Default
0 (μ-law)
60 (600 ms)
61 (305 ms)
10 (100 ms)
66 (660 ms)
10 (100 ms)
40 (400 ms)
70 (700 ms)
60 (6000 ms)
30 (300 ms)
70 (700 ms)
80 (800 ms)
25 (2500 ms)
10 (1000 ms)
30 (3000 ms)
10 (100 ms)
86 (860 ms)
40 (400 ms)
Programming Manual 2-459
Program
81
SL1100
Item
No.
23
27
28
29
36
Item
Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum
Time
Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps)
Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps)
DP Inter-digit Time (10pps)
Long Ringing Detection Minimum
Time
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
Input Data
Program
81
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
Default
64 (640 ms)
12 (60 ms)
8 (40 ms)
80 (800 ms)
24 (2400 ms)
2-460 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-05 : ISDN PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 81-05 : ISDN PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data for layer 2 of ISDN PRI.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Timer T200
02
Timer T201
03
Timer T202
04
Timer T203
05
06
07
N200
N201
N202
Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 65535 (Byte)
1 ~ 255
Description Default
Specify the timer value in 1/100ths of a second at the end of which transmission of a frame may be initiated.
Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
Specify the maximum time in 1/100ths of a second allowed without exchanging frames.
Specify the retransmission count.
Specify the frame lengths in ocelots.
Specify the maximum number of transmissions from a TEI identity request message when the user requests a TEI.
10 (1 sec)
10 (1 sec)
20 (2 sec)
250 (25 sec)
3
260
3
Program
81
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-461
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-06 : ISDN PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN
Program
81
Description
Use Program 81-06 : ISDN PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04).
Input Data
02
T302
03
T303
04
T304
05
T305
06
T306
07
T307
08
T308
09
10
T309
T310
Layer 3 Timer Type Number
Item
No.
01
T301
Item Input Data
0, 180 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
0 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
0 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
0 ~ 180 seconds
1 ~ 5
Description
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when the
ALERT message is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when the
SETUP ACK is sent. Timer is also restarted when INFO is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
SETUP is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when the
SETUP ACK is received. Timer is also restarted when INFO is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
DISC without progress No. 8 is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
DISC with progress indicator No. 8 is sent.
This timer is valid for Network side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
SUSPEND ACK is sent. This timer is valid only for Network side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
REL is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second upon data link disconnection.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
CALL PROC is sent.
Default
180
15
4
30
30
30
180
4
90
180
2-462 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
11
T312
Item
12
T313
13
T314
14
T316
15
T317
16
T318
17
T319
18
T320
19
T321
20
T322
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• ISDN Compatibility
SL1100
Input Data
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
(T317 + 1) ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ (T316-1)
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
1 ~ 254 seconds
Description
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
SETUP is sent or re-sent on broadcast data link. This timer is only valid for Network side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when connection request is sent. Valid range 1 ~
4 seconds in 1 second increments. Value of 0 indicates timer not used.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when message segment is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when RE-
START is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when RE-
START is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
RES is sent. This timer is valid for user side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
SUSPEND is sent. This timer is valid for user side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second when B-channel access: connection is received or D-channel access: DL-
ESTABLISH confirmation or indication is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second of the timer to be started when
STATUS ENQ is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a second upon D-channel failure.
Default
6
4
4
120
60
4
4
30
30
4
Program
81
Programming Manual 2-463
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level:
IN
Program
81
Description
Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC (QSLAC)
Filter for each analog trunk port.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
CODEC Filter Type
0 = Type 0
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
6 = Type 6
7 = Type 7
8 = Type 8
9 = Type 9
10 = Type 10
11 = Type 11
12 = Type 12
13 = Type 13
14 = Type 14
15 = Type 15
Input Data
001 ~ 084
Default
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-464 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Item Input Data
Answer Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(DID)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Clear Signal Detection Time (Loop) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Clear Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Clear Signal Detection Time (DID)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Clear Signal Detection Time (OPX)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(DID)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (Loop)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (Ground)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (DID)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (E&M)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Default
15 (60 ms)
15 (60 ms)
15 (60 ms)
15 (60 ms)
15 (60 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
10 (80 ms)
10 (80 ms)
10 (80 ms)
10 (80 ms)
10 (80 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
Program
81
Programming Manual 2-465
Program
81
SL1100
47
48
49
50
51
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
26
27
28
29
37
38
39
40
41
Item
No.
20
21
22
23
24
25
42
43
44
45
46
52
53
Item Input Data
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (OPX)
Loop Current Detection Time
(Loop)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Loop Current Detection Time
(Ground)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Loop Current Detection Time (DID)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Loop Current Detection Time
(E&M)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Loop Current Detection Time
(OPX)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
DP Break Send Time (ALL)
DP Make Send Time (ALL)
DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL)
HookFlash Send Time (Loop)
HookFlash Send Time (Ground)
HookFlash Send Time (DID)
HookFlash Send Time (E&M)
HookFlash Send Time (OPX)
Pause Send Time (ALL)
Wink Send Duration Time (DID)
Delay Send Duration Time (DID)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (1 sec ~ 255 sec )
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID)
Wink Send Duration Time (E&M)
Delay Send Duration Time (E&M)
Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max.
Time (DID)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Receive Wink Duration Min. Time
(DID)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
Receive Wink Duration Max. Time
(DID)
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max.
Time (E&M)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
Receive Wink Duration Min. Time
(E&M)
Receive Wink Duration Max. Time
(E&M)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
Receive DP Make Min. Time (ALL)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Receive DP Make Max. Time (ALL)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Receive DP Break Min. Time (ALL)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Receive DP Break Max. Time (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time
(ALL)
Receive HookFlash Duration Min.
Time (E&M)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Receive HookFlash Duration Max.
Time (E&M)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
2-466 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 3.01
Default
50 (5000 ms)
40 (160 ms)
40 (160 ms)
40 (160 ms)
40 (160 ms)
12 (96 ms)
45 (360 ms)
3 (12 ms)
19 (76 ms)
3 (12 ms)
25 (100 ms)
125 (500 ms)
3 (300 ms)
6 (600 ms)
40 (160 ms)
15 (60 ms)
10 (40 ms)
7 (700 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
3 (3 sec)
25 (200 ms)
25 (200 ms)
3 (300 ms)
25 (200 ms)
25 (200 ms)
3 (300 ms)
48 (4800 ms)
12 (96 ms)
45 (360 ms)
48 (4800 ms)
ISSUE 3.01
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
67
68
69
70
78
79
80
81
82
Item
No.
54
55
63
64
65
66
Item Input Data
Receive HookFlash Duration Min.
Time (OPX)
Receive HookFlash Duration Max.
Time (OPX)
Loop Off Guard Time (Loop)
Loop Off Guard Time (Ground)
Loop Off Guard Time (DID)
Loop Off Guard Time (E&M)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Loop Off Guard Time (OPX)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Double Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Double Between Ringing Send
Time 1 (OPX)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Double Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Double Between Ringing Send
Time 2 (OPX)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Single Ringing Send Time (OPX)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Single Between Ringing Send Time
(OPX)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Guard Time 1 (LOOP)
Guard Time 1 (GROUND)
Guard Time 1 (DID)
Guard Time 1 (E&M)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Guard Time 1 (OPX)
Guard Time 2 (ALL)
Dial Sending Complete Time
ON-HOOK bit Send Time
Open Loop Time (LOOP)
Open Loop Time (GROUND)
Open Loop Time (DID)
Open Loop Time (E&M)
Open Loop Time (OPX)
Close Loop Time (LOOP)
Close Loop Time (DID)
Ring GND Time (GROUND)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
SL1100
Default
3 (300 ms)
6 (600 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
25 (2500 ms)
30 (3000 ms)
10 (1000 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
3 (12 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
40 (4000 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
13 (52 ms)
13 (52 ms)
13 (52 ms)
Program
81
2-467
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level:
IN
Program
81
Description
Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting data (when
Program 81-07 is set to 4).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
16
17
18
19
20
21
Item
B1 Filter Setup (1)
B1 Filter Setup (2)
B1 Filter Setup (3)
B1 Filter Setup (4)
B1 Filter Setup (5)
B1 Filter Setup (6)
B1 Filter Setup (7)
B1 Filter Setup (8)
B1 Filter Setup (9)
B1 Filter Setup (10)
B1 Filter Setup (11)
B1 Filter Setup (12)
B1 Filter Setup (13)
B1 Filter Setup (14)
B2 Filter Setup (1)
B2 Filter Setup (2)
AISN and Analog Gains
Z Filter Coefficients (1)
Z Filter Coefficients (2)
Z Filter Coefficients (3)
Z Filter Coefficients (4)
Z Filter Coefficients (5)
Z Filter Coefficients (6)
Z Filter Coefficients (7)
Z Filter Coefficients (8)
Z Filter Coefficients (9)
Z Filter Coefficients (10)
Z Filter Coefficients (11)
Z Filter Coefficients (12)
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Input Data Default
45
194
219
45
178
208
178
75
189
58
194
43
102
228
58
59
70
106
175
163
79
179
83
208
17
250
173
50
165
2-468 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
60
61
62
54
55
56
57
58
59
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
34
35
36
37
38
39
30
31
32
33
Item
Z Filter Coefficients (13)
Z Filter Coefficients (14)
Z Filter Coefficients (15)
R Filter Coefficients (1)
R Filter Coefficients (2)
R Filter Coefficients (3)
R Filter Coefficients (4)
R Filter Coefficients (5)
R Filter Coefficients (6)
R Filter Coefficients (7)
R Filter Coefficients (8)
R Filter Coefficients (9)
R Filter Coefficients (10)
R Filter Coefficients (11)
R Filter Coefficients (12)
R Filter Coefficients (13)
R Filter Coefficients (14)
X Filter Coefficients (1)
X Filter Coefficients (2)
X Filter Coefficients (3)
X Filter Coefficients (4)
X Filter Coefficients (5)
X Filter Coefficients (6)
X Filter Coefficients (7)
X Filter Coefficients (8)
X Filter Coefficients (9)
X Filter Coefficients (10)
X Filter Coefficients (11)
X Filter Coefficients (12)
GR Filter Coefficients (1)
GR Filter Coefficients (2)
GX Filter Coefficients (1)
GX Filter Coefficients (2)
Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Conditions
• This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
SL1100
Default
163
165
204
164
165
202
160
58
178
202
48
37
187
170
189
162
165
42
35
67
91
43
37
192
187
32
203
42
171
84
31
1
170
Program
81
2-469
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level:
MF
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1 ~ 4), also called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in
Program 22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each range there are three frequency
Types : High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each
Type, for each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each
Type in each Range.
Input Data
Incoming Ringing Tone Number
Ringing Tone Type Number
Item
No.
01
Frequency 1
Item
02
Frequency 2
1 = 520 Hz
2 = 540 Hz
3 = 660 Hz
4 = 760 Hz
5 = 1100 Hz
6 = 1400 Hz
7 = 2000 Hz
1 = 520 Hz
2 = 540 Hz
3 = 660 Hz
4 = 760 Hz
5 = 1100 Hz
6 = 1400 Hz
7 = 2000 Hz
1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)
2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern
6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern
7 = Pattern 5 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
8 = Pattern 6 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
9 = Pattern 7 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
10 = Pattern 8 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
1 = High
2 = Mid
3 = Low
Input Data Default
Refer below
Refer below
2-470 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
03
Modulation
Item Input Data
0 = No Modulation
1 = 8 Hz Modulation
2 = 16 Hz Modulation
3 = Envelope
SL1100
Default
Refer below
Default
Incoming Ringing
Tone Number
Pattern 1
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 2
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 3
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 4
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 5
(Intercom Incoming Pattern)
Pattern 6
(Alarm Sensor Pattern)
Pattern 7
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0
Added)
Pattern 8
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0
Added)
Pattern 9
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0
Added)
Pattern 10
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0
Added)
Table 2-17 82-01 Default Table
Tone Type
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
Frequency 1 (Hz) Frequency 2 (Hz)
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
2000Hz
2000Hz
1100Hz
2000Hz
2000Hz
1100Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
540Hz
1100Hz
540Hz
760Hz
1100Hz
540Hz
760Hz
Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
No Modulation
No Modulation
No Modulation
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
Program
82
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns
• Selectable Ring Tones
Programming Manual 2-471
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the SLT.
Input Data
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Item
No.
01
02
13
14
Item Input Data
Companding Method Type
Ringing Frequency
Minimum Break Time
Maximum Break Time
Minimum Make Time
Maximum Make Time
Minimum Hook Flash Time
Maximum Hook Flash Time
Minimum Ground Flash Time
0 = μ-law
1 = A-law
0 = 25 Hz
1 = 20 Hz
2 = 16 Hz
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
Minimum Off-Hook Time
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
No Detection Time after Off-Hook
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
No Detection Time after Pulse Dial
Detection
Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal
Time
Ring, Message Wait Period Time
1 ~ 255 (10 ms ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
Default
0
1 (20 Hz)
2 (10 ms)
20 (100 ms)
2 (10 ms)
20 (100 ms)
21 (105 ms)
200 (1000 ms)
21 (105 ms)
21 (105 ms)
60 (300 ms)
70 (350 ms)
60 (600 ms)
150 (750 ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-472 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-05 : ISDN PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 82-05 : ISDN PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup to set the basic data for the
Layer 2 of ISDN PRI S-Point.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Timer T200
Timer T201
Timer T202
Timer T203
N200
N201
N202
Item Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 65535 (Byte)
1 ~ 255
Default
10 (1 sec)
10 (1 sec)
20 (2 sec)
30 (3 sec)
3
260
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
82
Programming Manual 2-473
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-06 : ISDN PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-06 : ISDN PRI Layer3 (S-Point) Timer Setup to set the basic timer for the layer 3 of
ISDN PRI S-Point.
Input Data
Item
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
05
06
07
08
09
01
02
03
04
T310
T312
T313
T314
T316
T317
T318
T319
T320
T321
T322
T301
T302
T303
T304
T305
T306
T307
T308
T309
Layer3 Timer Type No.
Item Input Data
0, 180 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
0 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
0 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
0 ~ 180 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
(T317 + 1) ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ (T316 - 1) (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 5
Default
30 (sec)
6 (sec)
4 (sec)
4 (sec)
120 (sec)
60 (sec)
4 (sec)
4 (sec)
30 (sec)
30 (sec)
4 (sec)
180 (sec)
10 (sec)
4 (sec)
20 (sec)
30 (sec)
30 (sec)
180 (sec)
4 (sec)
90 (sec)
Conditions
None
2-474 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
82
Programming Manual 2-475
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level:
IN
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the
CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port.
Input Data
Station Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
CODEC Filter Type
0 = Type 0
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
6 = Type 6
7 = Type 7
8 = Type 8
9 = Type 9
10 = Type 10
11 = Type 11
12 = Type 12
13 = Type 13
14 = Type 14
15 = Type 15
Input Data
001 ~ 100 (V2.0 Changed)
Default
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Direct Station Selection (DSS)
2-476 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone volume. There are two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Sidetone Volume
Default
6
Input Data
Input Data ( Digital Sidetone Level : Analog Sidetone Level )
0 ( - 54 dB : - 54 dB )
1 ( - 48 dB : - 54 dB )
2 ( - 42 dB : - 54 dB )
3 ( - 36 dB : - 48 dB )
4 ( - 30 dB : - 42 dB )
5 ( - 24 dB : - 36 dB )
6 ( - 18 dB : - 30 dB )
7 ( - 12 dB : - 24 dB )
8 ( - 12 dB : - 18 dB )
9 ( - 12 dB : - 12 dB )
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing
Program
82
Programming Manual 2-477
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data (when Program
82-07 is set to 4).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
22
23
24
25
16
17
18
19
20
21
26
27
Item
B1 Filter Setup (1)
B1 Filter Setup (2)
B1 Filter Setup (3)
B1 Filter Setup (4)
B1 Filter Setup (5)
B1 Filter Setup (6)
B1 Filter Setup (7)
B1 Filter Setup (8)
B1 Filter Setup (9)
B1 Filter Setup (10)
B1 Filter Setup (11)
B1 Filter Setup (12)
B1 Filter Setup (13)
B1 Filter Setup (14)
B2 Filter Setup (1)
B2 Filter Setup (2)
AISN and Analog Gains
Z Filter Coefficients (1)
Z Filter Coefficients (2)
Z Filter Coefficients (3)
Z Filter Coefficients (4)
Z Filter Coefficients (5)
Z Filter Coefficients (6)
Z Filter Coefficients (7)
Z Filter Coefficients (8)
Z Filter Coefficients (9)
Z Filter Coefficients (10)
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Input Data Default
151
41
122
135
168
112
45
227
46
169
242
105
122
166
42
42
171
194
43
1
14
178
162
53
83
106
163
2-478 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
58
59
60
61
62
52
53
54
55
56
57
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
32
33
34
35
36
37
28
29
30
31
Item
Z Filter Coefficients (11)
Z Filter Coefficients (12)
Z Filter Coefficients (13)
Z Filter Coefficients (14)
Z Filter Coefficients (15)
R Filter Coefficients (1)
R Filter Coefficients (2)
R Filter Coefficients (3)
R Filter Coefficients (4)
R Filter Coefficients (5)
R Filter Coefficients (6)
R Filter Coefficients (7)
R Filter Coefficients (8)
R Filter Coefficients (9)
R Filter Coefficients (10)
R Filter Coefficients (11)
R Filter Coefficients (12)
R Filter Coefficients (13)
R Filter Coefficients (14)
X Filter Coefficients (1)
X Filter Coefficients (2)
X Filter Coefficients (3)
X Filter Coefficients (4)
X Filter Coefficients (5)
X Filter Coefficients (6)
X Filter Coefficients (7)
X Filter Coefficients (8)
X Filter Coefficients (9)
X Filter Coefficients (10)
X Filter Coefficients (11)
X Filter Coefficients (12)
GR Filter Coefficients (1)
GR Filter Coefficients (2)
GX Filter Coefficients (1)
GX Filter Coefficients (2)
Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Conditions
• This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).
Programming Manual
SL1100
Default
144
1
17
35
32
144
1
144
1
144
1
74
197
1
17
1
144
1
202
195
174
74
51
170
171
1
220
1
58
32
35
43
169
166
159
Program
82
2-479
Program
82
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-480 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-11 : SLIU Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 82-11 : SLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various timers for SLIU.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data Description
Bounce Protect Time
0 = No setting
1 ~ 15 = 100 ms ~ 1.5
sec
Specify a time for detection of a valid off-
Hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new Off-Hook indication from a Single Line Telephone.
HookFlash Start Time 0 = 40 ms
1 ~ 15 = 90 ms ~ 790 ms
Specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice
Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a valid hookflash.
HookFlash End Time
0 = HST + 0 ms
1 ~ 15 = HST + 100 ms
~ HST + 1500 ms
(HST = Hookflash Start
Time)
Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a Single Line Telephone to receive a second dial tone.
Default
3
(300 ms)
5
(290 ms)
7
(990 ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
82
Programming Manual 2-481
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup to define the various initial data for OPX packages.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data Description
Bounce Protect Time
0 = No setting
1 ~ 15 = 100 ms ~ 1.5
sec
Specify a time for detection of a valid off-
Hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new Off-Hook indication from a single line telephone.
HookFlash Start Time 0 = 40 ms
1 ~ 15 = 90 ms ~ 790 ms
Specify the minimum hookflash time from a single line telephone or analog Voice
Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a valid hookflash.
HookFlash End Time
0 = HST + 0 ms
1 ~ 15 = HST + 100 ms
~ HST + 1500 ms
(HST = Hookflash Start
Time)
Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a single line telephone to receive a second dial tone.
Default
3
(300 ms)
5
(290 ms)
7
(990 ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-482 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line
Telephone
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 82-14: Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone to define the Handset/
Headset Gain Level for Multi Line Telephone.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Handset/Headset Transmit Gain level
Handset/Headset Receive Gain level
0 = Fixed
(9 = + 12.5 dB)
1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 3.5 ~ + 58.5 dB
0 = Fixed
(13 = 0 dB)
1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 24 ~ + 38.0 dB
Up to eight digits
Default
0
0
Program
82
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-483
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-21 : Sensor Setup
Level:
IN
Program
82
Description
Use Program 82-21 : Sensor Setup to setup the Sensor for SL1100.
Input Data
Sensor Number 1 ~ 6
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Sensor Type
Sensor Alarm Detect
Minimum Level
Sensor Idle Detect
Minimum Level
0 = Close Detect
1 = Open Detect
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
Description
Set sensor type.
Set minimum level for Alarm detection.
Set minimum level for Idle detection.
Default
0
24 (120 ms)
24 (120 ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-484 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup information of H.225 and H.245.
Input Data
16
17
18
19
20
12
13
14
15
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
Item
H.225 Alerting Time
H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer
H.225 Setup Timer
H.225 Info Ack Timer
H.225 Call Proceeding Timer
H.245 Master Slave Determination
Timer
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Master Slave Determination
Retry Count
0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Capability Exchange Timer
0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer
0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Mode Request Procedures
Timer
0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer
0 ~ 255 seconds
H.245 Maintenance Loop
RAS GRQ Timer
GRQ Retry Count
RAS RRQ Timer
RRQ Retry Count
RAS URQ Timer
URQ Retry Count
RAS ARQ Timer
ARQ Retry Count
RAS BRQ Timer
BRQ Retry Count
RAS IRR Timer
IRR Retry Count
RAS DRQ Timer
DRQ Retry Count
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
Input Data Default
3
5
50
50
180
9
4
9
10
5
3
3
1
2
5
50
50
50
5
5
2
5
2
5
2
8
2
Programming Manual 2-485
Program
84
SL1100
Item
No.
29
30
31
32
33
Item
RAS LRQ Timer
LRQ Retry Count
RAS RAI Timer
RAI Retry Count
Call Signaling Port Number
35
Fast Start Mode
36
37
RAS Unicast Port Number
Terminal Type setting
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Input Data
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 65535 :
0 ~ 1719, 1721 ~ 65535
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 255
ISSUE 3.01
Default
5
2
3
2
1730
1
20001
60
2-486 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central
Firmware Download for IP Phones.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Server Mode
02
File Server IP Address
03
04
Login Name
Password
Input Data
0 = TFTP
1 = FTP
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.254.254
Up to 20 Characters
Up to 20 Characters
Description
Enable only 84-07-01 is 1
Enable only 84-07-01 is 1
Default
0
0.0.0.0
None
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-487
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data. I/F No.2 The packets send from LAN I/F on VoIPDB is set the VLAN tag.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
VLAN
02
03
VLAN ID
Priority
Interface Number
Item
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 ~ 4094
0 ~ 7
Input Data
1 ~ 2
Default
0
0
0
Conditions
• System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-488 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-10 : ToS Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data.
Input Data
Protocol Type 1 ~ 3 = Not used
4 = Networking (V1.5 Changed)
5 = RTP/RTCP
6 = SIP
7 = Not used
8 = SIP-MLT
9 = SIP Trunk
10 = Not used
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
07
Item Input Data Description
ToS Mode
Priority, IP Precedence
Low Delay
Wideband (Throughout)
High Reliability
Priority (D.S.C.P. -
Differentiated Services Code Point)
0 = Disable (Invalid)
1 = IP Precedence
2 = Diffserv
0 ~ 7
0 = Low
7 = High
0 ~ 1
0 = Normal Delay, Low
Delay
0 ~ 1
0 = Normal Throughput
1 = High Throughput
0 ~ 1
0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability
0 ~ 63
When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is invalid. When Data is set to 2, Item No. 02
~ 06 are invalid.
1 = Router queuing priority
1 = Optimize for low delay routing
1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing
1 = Optimize for reliability routing
DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point)
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
• The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-489
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice (RTP packet) encoding parameters.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
Item Input Data
Number of G.711 Audio Frames
G.711 VAD mode
G.711 Type
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = A-law
1 = µ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
G.711 Jitter Buffer
(min)
G.711 Jitter Buffer
(average)
G.711 Jitter Buffer
(max)
Number of G.729 Audio Frames
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
G.729 VAD mode
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
5 = 50 ms
6 = 60 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 300 ms
G.729 Jitter Buffer
(min)
G.729 Jitter Buffer
(average)
G.729 Jitter Buffer
(max)
Number of G.723 Audio Frames
G.723 Jitter Buffer
(min)
G.723 Jitter Buffer
(average)
G.723 Jitter Buffer
(max)
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = 30 ms
2 = 60 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
Description Default
3
30
60
0
1
120
3
1
30
60
120
0
30
60
120
2-490 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
17
18
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Item Input Data Description
Jitter Buffer Mode
VAD Threshold
Audio Capability Priority
1 = Static
3 = Adaptive Immediately
01 ~ 30 (19 db ~ +10 db)
:
1 = -19 dB (-49 dBm)
:
20 = 0 dB (-30 dBm)
29 = 9 dBm(-21 dBm)
30 = 10 dBm(-20 dBm)
0 = G.711_PT
1 = G.723_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
0 ~ 5
Echo Auto Gain Control
DTMF Relay Mode
Fax Relay
Number of G.722 Audio Frame
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
2 = VoIPU
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Each Port Mode
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
G.722 Jitter Buffer
(min)
G.722 Jitter Buffer
(average)
G.722 Jitter Buffer
(max)
RTP Filter
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
If VoIPU, the systems refers to PRG
84-06-10 setting.
DTMF Level Mode
To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, this Program checks the sending side address from received RTP packet at
VoIPDB.
DTMF Level High
DTMF Level Low
0 = VoIPU default value
1 = Main soft value
0 = Disable
:
1 = -33 dBm
28 = -6 dBm
0 = Disable
:
1 = -33 dBm
28 = -6 dBm
Default
3
20
0
0
1 (V2.0
Changed)
0
3
30
60
120
1
0
28
28
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual 2-491
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the basic CODEC options for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
Item Input Data Description
Number of G.711
Audio Frame
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
G.711 Silence
Detection (VAD)
Mode
G.711 Type
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum
G.729 Audio
Frame
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1 ~ 6
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms, etc.)
G.729 Silence
Compression
(VAD) Mode
G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 300 ms
G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard
G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum
Number of G.723
Audio Frame
G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = 30 msec
2 = 60 msec
0 ~ 300 ms
Maximum number of G711 Audio
Frames. When the voice is encoded using the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a frame of
10ms.
Select whether to compress silence with G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the type of G.711.
Set the minimum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.
711 Jitter Buffer.
Maximum number of G729 Audio
Frames. G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence with G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Maximum number of the G.723 Audio Frame.
Set the minimum value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.
Default
2
Related
Program
0
40
80
1
20
2
0
20
1
30
40
80
2-492 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
15
16
17
18
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
Item Input Data Description
G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard
G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum
Jitter Buffer
Mode
Silence Compression (VAD)
Threshold
Priority Codec
Setting
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = static
3 = adaptive immediately
Set the average value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.
723 Jitter Buffer.
Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer.
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used and adjusts at any time, regardless of silence.
Set the voice level judged to be silence. Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with
G.711 or 84-01-06 with G.729.
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and -
19 dB ~ + 10dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
:
:
20 = 0dB (- 30 dBm)
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10dBm (- 20 dBm)
0 = G.711 PT
1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT
5 = iLBC PT
6 = G.711 Only (V1.5
Added)
7 = G.729 Only (V1.5
Added)
0 ~ 5
The option selected here determines what other codec options are applied by priority.
Define the Auto Gain Control.
EchoAuto Gain
Control
DTMF Payload
Number
DTMF Relay
Mode
G.722 Audio
Frame
96 ~ 127
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
Define the DTMF Payload Number.
Determine the DTMF setup.
G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms
Maximum number of G.722 Audio
Frames. G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.
G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard
G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum
G.726 Audio
Frame
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
G.726 Silence
Compression
Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.
Maximum number of G.726 Audio
Frames. G.726 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence with G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
0
110
0
3
Default
60
120
3
Related
Program
20
0
30
60
120
3
0
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-493
Program
84
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
56
57
58
61
62
63
64
Item Input Data Description
G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer.
G.726 Jitter Buffer - Standard
G.726 Jitter Buffer - Maximum
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
iLBC Audio
Frame
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
iLBC Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer.
Maximum number of iLBC Audio
Frames. iLBC assumes the frame of
10 ms is a unit.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer.
iLBC Jitter Buffer
- Standard
0 ~ 255 ms
iLBC Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
0 ~ 255 ms
ILBC Payload
Number
96 ~ 127
Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer.
RTP Filter
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Fax Relay mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
T.38 Protocol mode
0 = R/U (V1.5
Changed)
1 = U/R (V1.5
Changed)
2 = RTP (V1.5
Changed)
3 = UDPTL (V1.5
Changed)
Fax Max Rate
1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5 = V.17, 14400 bps
0 ~ 2
Low Speed Data
Redundancy
High Speed Data
Redundancy
TCF Handling
0 ~ 2
0 = Local
1 = Network
96 ~ 127
T.38 RTP Format
Payload Number
DTMF Level mode
0 = VoIPDB Unit
1 = Main Soft
DTMF Level High 1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
DTMF Level Low
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
The payload number of iLBC is set.
However, the same number as Item
31 cannot be set.
Default
30
Related
Program
100
0
28
0
0
1
0
0
1
60
120
3
30
60
120
98
5
28
2-494 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
65
Item Input Data
VAD Negotiation
on SDP (Future)
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
66
Voice Band Data
(VBD) (Future)
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
67
VBD Payload
Type (Future)
(V2.0 Added)
96 ~ 127
Description
This PRG is used to determine the
VAD determination method setting
VAD information on SDP.
This PRG is effective when VAD is enabled on each codec.
G.711 and G.729 are targets at this time.
This PRG is used for setting VBD to is "Enable/Disable".
This PRG is necessary to set the 1:
Special in PRG15-03-03 for target terminal.
This PRG is specifies the Payload
Type number used by VBD.
Default
0
Related
Program
0
97
15-03-03
15-03-03
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-495
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
13
15
16
17
Item Input Data Description
INVITE ReTx Count
0 ~ 255 Specifies the number of times the INVITE message is sent.
Request ReTx Count
Response ReTx
Count
Request ReTx Start
Time
Request Maximum
ReTx Interval
SIP Trunk Port Number
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 65535
(0 ms ~ 6553.5 seconds)
0 ~ 65535
(0 ms ~ 6553.5 seconds)
1 ~ 65535
Specifies the number of times Request message except INVITE are sent.
Specifies the number of times the Response message is sent.
Session Timer Value
0 ~ 65535
Minimum Session
Timer Value
0 ~ 65535
Called Party Information
URL Type
URL/To HeaderSetting Information
0 = Request URI
1 = To Header
0 = SIP-URL
1 = TEL-URL
0 = Proxy Server Domain
1 = SIP UA Domain
SIP Trunk Incoming/
Outgoing via
E164SIP_URI (V1.5
Added)
100rel Settings (V1.5
Added)
SIP Trunk SIP-URI E.
164 Incoming Mode
(V2.0 Added)
Call Forward Moved
Temporarily Support
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = Mode 1 (V3.0
Changed)
2 = Mode 2 (V3.0
Changed)
3 = Mode 3 (V3.0 Added)
0 = Use default Settings
1 = Use opposite Default
Setting
0 = OFF
1 = Mode 1
2 = Mode 2
0 = Disabled
1 = 302 Return
When enabled a 302 Moved temporarily response is sent for external call forward destinations.
Default
5060
0
1800
0
0
0
7
11
7
5 (500 ms)
40 (4000 ms)
0
0
0
0
2-496 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-497
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-15 : SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-15 : SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the SIP phone.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item Input Data
Registration Information Automatic Deletion
Keep Alive Message
Interval
Keep Alive Message
Timeout
Keep Alive Timeout
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1 ~ 10 minutes
1 ~ 10 seconds
1 ~ 5 times
Description
When set to 1 (Enable), the registration information is automatically deleted (for H.
323).
Time interval that system sends a Ping to the terminal.
Time that system waits for a Ping response from the terminal.
How many times the system waits for a non response before determining the terminal is down.
Default
0
1
5
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-498 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup to set the Limiter Control Gain configuration of VoIPDB.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
RX Limiter Control
Gain
02
TX Limiter Control
Gain
03
RX Limiter Control
Gain (COIU)
04
TX Limiter Control
Gain (COIU)
Input Data Description
0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 dBm)
0 = - 15 dBm
:
1 = - 14 dBm
15 = 0 dBm
:
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 dBm)
0 = - 15 dBm
:
1 = - 14 dBm
:
15 = 0 dBm
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 dBm)
0 = - 15 dBm
:
1 = - 14 dBm
:
15 = 0 dBm
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 dBm)
0 = - 15 dBm
:
1 = - 14 dBm
:
15 = 0 dBm
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of IP PCM.
This option adds gain to the voice input from the LAN and removes it from the voice output to highway.
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of PCM IP.
This option adds the gain to the voice input from highway and removes it from the voice output to the LAN.
This option controls the limiter gain for a
COIU call in the IP to PCM direction.
This option controls the limiter gain for a
COIU call in the PCM to IP direction.
Default
15 (0 dBm)
15 (0 dBm)
15 (0 dBm)
15 (0 dBm)
Conditions
None
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-499
Program
84
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-500 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Description
Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC information for the SIP extensions.
10
14
15
11
12
Input Data
05
06
07
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Number of G.711 Audio Frame
G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
03
04
G.711 Type
G.711 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
G.711 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
G.729 Audio Frame
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1 ~ 6
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20ms, etc.)
08
09
G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G.729 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
0 ~ 300 ms
G.729 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
G.729 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
Number of G.723 Audio Frame
G.723 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
G.723 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = 30 msec
2 = 60 msec
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
Description
Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
When the voice is encoded using the PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a frame of 10ms.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the type of G.711.
Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames.
G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Maximum number of the G.723 Audio
Frame.
Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Default
2
0
40
80
2
1
20
0
20
40
30
60
80
1
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-501
Program
84
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
16
17
18
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Item Input Data Description
G.723 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
Jitter Buffer Mode
G.722 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
1 = static
3 = adaptive immediately
Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer.
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used and adjust at any time, regardless of silence.
Silence Compression
(VAD) Threshold
EchoAuto Gain Control
DTMF Payload Number
DTMF Relay Mode
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and - 19
: dB ~ + 10 dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
:
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10 dBm (- 20 dBm)
Set the voice level judged to be silence.
Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711 or
84-01-06 with G.729.
Priority Codec Setting 0 = G.711 PT
1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722
4 = G.726
5 = iLBC
0 ~ 5
96 ~ 127
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
The option selected here determines what other codec options are applied by priority.
For the system to utilize the G.723 or iLBC
Codecs, program 84-27-02 must be set to
G.723/iLBC.
Define the Auto Gain Control.
Define the DTMF Payload Number.
G.722 Audio Frame
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
Determine the DTMF setup used between the SIP extensions. It is effective when a terminal call is made through the VoIPDB.
Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames.
G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.
G.722 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
G.722 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
G.726 Audio Frame
0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.
G.726 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode
G.726 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
G.726 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Maximum number of G.726 Audio Frames.
G.726 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.726. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer.
Default
120
3
20
0
60
120
3
0
96
0
3
30
0
30
60
2-502 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
56
57
58
61
62
63
64
Item Input Data Description
G.726 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum iLBC Audio Frame
0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer.
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Maximum number of iLBC Audio Frames.
iLBC assumes the frame of 10ms is a unit.
iLBC Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer.
iLBC Jitter Buffer -
Standard iLBC Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
ILBC payload number 96 ~ 127
RTP Filter
Fax Relay mode
T.38 Protocol mode
Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = R/U (V1.5 Changed)
1 = U/R (V1.5 Changed)
2 = RTP (V1.5 Changed)
3 = UDPTL (V1.5
Changed)
The payload number of iLBC is set. However, the same number as Item 31 cannot be set.
Fax Max Rate
1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5 = V.17, 14400 bps
0 ~ 2
Low Speed Data Redundancy
High Speed Data Redundancy
TCF Handling
0 ~ 2
0 = Local
1= Network
96 ~ 127
T.38 RTP Format Payload Number
DTMF Level mode
DTMF Level High
DTMF Level Low
0 = VoIPDB Unit
1 = Main Soft
:
1 = - 33 dBm
28 = - 6 dBm
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
1
0
1
Default
120
3
30
60
120
98
5
28
1
100
0
0
0
28
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-503
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information, session timers, called party information and expire value of invite.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item Input Data
Registrar/Proxy Port
1 ~ 65535
Session Timer Value
0 ~ 65535
Minimum Session
Timer Value
Called Party Info
0 ~ 65535
0 = Request URI
1 = To Header
Expire Value of Invite
0 ~ 256 seconds
06
Expire Value of Invite
(send)
1 ~ 3600 seconds
Description
Arrival of a message is ended when this time expires and there is no cut from the caller.
The expiration time is set for the Invite message.
Default
5070
180
180
0
180
180
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-504 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DR700 Multiline logon information.
Input Data
Personal ID Index
Item
No.
01
User ID
Item
02
Password
Input Data
Up to 32 characters
Up to 16 characters
03
04
05
User ID Omission
Log Off
Nick Name
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Up to 32 characters
001 ~ 084
Description
Input the User ID when using manual or auto registration (10-46-01).
Input the Password when using manual or auto registration (10-46-01).
Web pro indicates password as
*
mark.
(V3.0 Added)
Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again.
Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again.
Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again.
Default
No Setting
No Setting
0
1
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-505
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for the
DR700 Multiline Terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
Item Input Data Description
Registration Expire
Timer
Subscribe Expire
Timer
Session Expire Timer
Minimum Session Expire Timer
Invite Expire Timer
Signal Type of Service
60 ~ 65535 seconds
60 ~ 65535 seconds
60 ~ 65535 seconds
60 ~ 65535 seconds
60 ~ 65535 seconds
0x00 ~ 0xFF
(0 ~ 9, A ~ F)
The Expires value of the REGISTER message which received from DR700 terminal is out of range or when the Expire value is not set up, in case it assigns the effective time to the DR700 terminal. The timer for supervising whether DR700 terminal is connected or not.
The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and receive the terminal operation instructions between the Main Device and DR700 terminal.
Set effective time for supervising the Voice
Path.
Set minimum value of effective time for supervising the Voice Path.
Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing call when the Expire value is not set in the
INVITE message received from DR700 terminal.
Set Type of Service value which applied to send SIP Message Packet from DR700 terminal to Main Device.
Error Display Timer
0 ~ 65535 seconds
Digest Authorization
Registration Expire
Timer
0 ~ 4294967295 seconds
Temporally Password Read Only:
Maximum 16 characters
(0 ~ 9, a ~ f, A ~ F)
Number of Password
Retries
0 ~ 255
(0 = No Limit)
Input the number of times an incorrect password can be entered when the security key is pressed.
Password Lock Time
0 ~ 120
(0 = No Limit)
Reference Number
Up to 32 digits
(0 ~ 9, * , #, P, R, @)
Media Type of Service 0x00 ~ 0xFF
(0 ~ 9, A ~ F)
Default
180
3600
180
180
180
00
0
0
None
0
0
No Setting
00
2-506 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
14
Item
Refer Expire Timer
Input Data
0 ~ 65535 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Description
SL1100
Default
60
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-507
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
Level:
IN
84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the codec of each type of DR700 Multiline Telephone.
Input Data
Type 1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Minimum
Standard
Item
G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode
G.711 Type
G.711 Jitter Buffer -
G.711 Jitter Buffer -
G.711 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
G.729 Audio Frame
Input Data
Number of G.711 Audio Frame
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
When the voice is encoded using the PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a frame of 10ms.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone communicates to a TDM device it will always use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms or 40 ms.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop sending silence packets but the IP phone will continue to transmit silence packets.
Set the type of G.711.
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1 ~ 4
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms, etc.)
Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of G.729 Audio Frames.
G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the encoding compressed method.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone communicates to a TDM device it will always use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms or 40 ms.
Default
2
0
40
80
1
20
2
2-508 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
35
36
37
Item
No.
08
09
10
11
17
18
28
30
31
32
Item Input Data Description
G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode
G.729 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 300 ms
Select whether to compress silence with
G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet is not sent.
When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop sending silence packets but the IP phone will continue to transmit silence packets.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
G.729 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
G.729 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Jitter Buffer Mode Set the mode of the Jitter
Buffer.
Silence Compression
(VAD) Threshold
:
1 = static
3 = adaptive immediately
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and - 19 dB ~ + 10dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10dBm (- 20dBm)
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the codec is used and adjust at any time, regardless of silence.
Set the voice level judged to be silence.
Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711, or
84-01-06 with G.729.
The option selected here determines what other codec options are applied by priority.
Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT
2 = G729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
0 ~ 5
EchoAuto Gain Control
DTMF Payload Number
96 ~ 127
Define the Auto Gain Control.
G.722 Audio Frame
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames.
G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a specimen by 16kHz and the frame of
10ms is assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by the encoding compressed method.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone communicates to a TDM device it will always use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms.
34
G.722 Jitter Buffer -
Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms
G.722 Jitter Buffer -
Standard
G.722 Jitter Buffer -
Maximum
RTP Filter
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time between packets arriving and the buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.
Default
0
20
0
96
3
60
120
1
40
80
3
20
0
30
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-509
SL1100
Item
No.
38
Item
DTMF Level mode
39
DTMF Level High
40
DTMF Level Low
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Input Data
0 = Use the Default of
VoIPDB Unit
1 = Use the Main System
:
1 = - 33 dBm
28 = - 6 dBm
:
1 = - 33 dBm
28 = - 6 dBm
Description
ISSUE 3.01
Default
0
28
28
2-510 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the IP address and the port of VoIP.
Input Data
Slot Number
VoIPDB GW Number
GW Number will not be shown in Telephone Programming mode.
0
1
Item
No.
01
02
Item
IP Address
RTP Port Number
03
RTCP Port Number
Input Data
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
0 ~ 65534
RTP Port Number + 1
Default
172.16.0.20 ~
VoIP GW １ =
10020~10051
VoIPDB GW1 = 10021
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-511
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the VoIPDB.
Input Data
Slot Number 0
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
Item Input Data Description
DTMF Relay Setup
0 = DTMF Relay disabled
1 = In-Band DTMF Relay
- Do not report to host processor
2 = Out Band Relay - Do not pass tones as voice
Setup CODEC Mode
0 = Default
1 = Mode 1 (G.723/ iLBC)
SRTP Mode Setup
Default means the system uses another
CODEC except G.723.
Mode 1 means the system uses all CO-
DECs, but the limitation of the total number of available DSP will be applied.
SRTP Mode Select
H.245 Port Number
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Mode1
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
Preparation Completion Response Port
Number
DTMF Duration
DTMF Pause
0 = Use RFC2833
25 ~ 2000 ms
0 = Use RFC2833
25 ~ 2000 ms
0 ~ 24 dB
DTMF Twist Positive
Level
DTMF Twist Negative
Level
0 ~ 24 dB
DTMF Duration
DTMF Level
30 ~ 2000 ms
1 ~ 61 (- 36 dB ~ + 24 dB
:
1 = - 36 dB
2 = - 35 dB
:
37 = 0 dB
60 = 23 dB
61 = 24 dB
Default
2
0
0
0
10100
4000
0
0
5
0
100
25 (- 12 dB)
2-512 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
14
Item
ICMP REDIRECT
15
DTMF Detect Minimum Duration
16
DTMF Detect Minimum Level
17
DTMF Detect Minimum S/N Ratio
Input Data Description Default
0: -40dbm
:
1: -39dbm
2: -38dbm
31: -9dbm
:
0: -9db
1: -8db
6: -3db
7: -2db
8: -1db
9: 0db
0 = Enabled, Voice packets will follow ICMP redirect messages.
1 = Disabled, Voice packets will NOT follow the ICMP redirect message.
23 ~ 2000 ms This setting is the minimal time setting to distinguish DTMF tones for the IPLB. If the signal is shorter than the value set, the signal is deemed not a DTMF.
This setting is the minimal level setting to distinguish DTMF tones. If the signal is shorter than the value set, the signal is deemed not a DTMF.
This is a frequency ratio setting of the
DTMF for the frequency other than the
DTMF tone. When this value comes to
0db, the DTMF is distinguished only when the signal level except DTMF is low. In case of wrong DTMF detection by a person’s voice, there is the possibility that the level except DTMF is large. The system will be able to protect a wrong DTMF detection by choosing 0db value or so.
1
30
2 (-38dbm)
6 (-3db)
Program
84
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-513
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to download for the IP Phone.
Input Data
Terminal Type
1 ~ 3 = Not used
4 = IP4WW-24TIXH
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Firmware Directory
Firmware File Name
Input Data
Maximum 64 characters
Maximum 30 characters
Default
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-514 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Level:
IN
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Description
Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of the SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast.
Input Data
03
RTP Filter
Type
Item
No.
01
Item
Audio Capability
02
Number of Audio Frames
Input Data
1 = G.711 A-law
2 = G.711 μ-law
3 = G.729
5 = G.722
1 ~ 4 (V2.0 Changed)
1 = 10 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
2 = 20 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
3 = 30 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
4 = 40 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
5 = 50 ms (G.729) (V2.0 Deleted)
6 = 60 ms (G.729) (V2.0 Deleted)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1 = Type 1 (Multicast)
2 = Type 2 (reserved)
3 = Type 3 (reserved)
4 = Type 4 (reserved)
5 = Type 5 (reserved)
Default
2
2
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-515
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup
Level:
IN
Program
84
Description
Use Program 84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup to sets VoIPDB echo canceller value.
Input Data
Type 1 = H.323 Trunk
2 ~ 6 = Not Used (V1.5 Changed)
7 = Networking (V1.5 Changed)
8 = SIP Trunk
9 = SIP Extension
10 = Not used
11 = DR700 Type 1
12 = DR700 Type 2
13 = DR700 Type 3
14 = DR700 Type 4
15 = DR700 Type 5
16 = Not used
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
Item Input Data Description
TDM Echo Canceller mode
TDM Echo Canceller NLP mode(2W)
TDM Echo Canceller ComfortNoise mode
(V2.0 Added)
TDM Echo Canceller NLP
Threshold
TDM Echo Canceller Tail Dis-
placement (V2.0
Added)
TDM Echo canceller tail length
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Echo Path Mode
3 = Echo Path Auto Detect Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 15
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer. Select comfort noise as background noise.
Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
0 ~ 89 (0 ms ~ 890 ms) Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
1 = 32 ms
2 = 48 ms
3 = 64 ms
4 = 80 ms
5 = 96 ms
6 = 112 ms
7 = 128 ms
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select length of echo. Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
Default
1
1
Related
Program
1
12
0
7
84-31-01
84-31-01
84-31-01
2-516 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Item Input Data Description
TDM Echo Canceller Default
ERL Level (V2.0
Added)
TDM Echo Canceller Echo Type
TDM Max ERLE
(V2.0 Added)
TDM Tx Level
Control
TDM Tx Level-
Control Level
TDM Tx AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
TDM Tx HLC
Threshold
:
0 ~ 6 (- 9 db ~ 9 db)
0 = - 9 db
:
1 = - 6 db
2 = - 3 db
5 = 6 db
6 = 9 db
0 = Disable
1 = Line Echo Canceller
2 = Acoustic Echo Canceller
0 ~ 6 (- 9 db ~ 9 db)
0 = - 9 db
1 = - 6 db
2 = - 3 db
5 = 6 db
6 = 9 db
0 = Disable
1 = TxLevelControl mode
2 = TxAutomaticLevel-
Control mode
3 = HLC
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select length of echo. Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select maximum echo return loss level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB)
0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
:
2 = - 18 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
14 = 18 dB
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
0 ~ 12 (- 42 ~ - 6 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
:
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 ~ 42 (- 42 ~ 0 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
:
1 = - 41 dBm
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-10 = 2
TDM Tx Gain
Compression mode
TDM Tx Gain
Compression
Threshold
TDM Rx Level
Control (V2.0
Added)
:
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 41 dBm
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = RX Level Control
Mode
2 = RX Automatic Level
Control Flag
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select receive level control mode.
SL1100
Default
5
Related
Program
84-31-01
1
2 (30 db) 84-31-01
3
8
7
41
1
41
0
84-31-10
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-517
Program
84
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Item Input Data Description
TDM Rx Level-
Control Level
(V2.0 Added)
TDM Rx AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 db)
0 = - 24 db
:
1 = - 21 db
2 = - 18 db
:
8 = 0 db
14 = 18 db
15 = 21 db
16 = 24 db
0 ~ 12 (- 42 ~ - 6 dBm)
:
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select receive voice level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-16 = 1
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-16 = 2
RTP Echo Canceller mode
RTP Echo Canceller NLP mode
RTP Echo Canceller ComfortNoise mode
(V2.0 Added)
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select comfort noise as background noise on or off.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
RTP Echo Canceller NLP
Threshold
RTP Echo Canceller Tail Dis-
placement (V2.0
Added)
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 89 (0 ms ~ 890 ms) Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
RTP Echo Canceller Tail Length
(V2.0 Added)
1 = 32 ms
2 = 48 ms
3 = 64 ms
4 = 80 ms
5 = 96 ms
6 = 112 ms
7 = 128 ms
RTP Echo Canceller Default
ERL Level (V2.0
Added)
RTP Echo Canceller Echo Type
RTP Max ERLE
(V2.0 Added)
:
0 ~ 6 (- 9 dB ~ + 9 dB)
0 = - 9 dB
1 = - 6 dB
2 = - 3 dB
5 = 6 dB
6 = 9 dB
0 = Disable
1 = Line Echo Canceller
2 = Acoustic Echo Canceller
0 ~ 10 (24 ~ 54 dB)
0 = 24 dB
1 = 27 dB
:
9 = 51 dB
10 = 54 dB
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select length of echo.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select length of echo.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select maximum echo return loss level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
Default
8
Related
Program
84-31-16
7
0
0
1
12
0
7
5
0
2
84-31-16
84-31-19
84-31-19
84-31-19
84-31-19
84-31-19
2-518 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
28
29
30
31
32
Item Input Data Description
RTP Tx Level
Control
RTP Tx Level
Control Level
RTP Tx AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
RTP Tx HLC
Threshold
RTP Tx Gain
Compression mode
0 = Disable
1 = TxLevelControl mode
2 = TxAutomaticLevel-
Control mode
3 = HLC
0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB)
0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
:
2 = - 18 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
14 = 18 dB
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
0 ~ 12 (- 42 dbm~ - 6 dbm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 41 dBm
:
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-28 = 2
33
34
35
RTP Tx Gain
Compression
Threshold
RTP Rx Level
Control (V2.0
Added)
RTP Rx Level-
Control Level
(V2.0 Added)
Default
Type 1, Type 7 ~
8 = 3 (V1.5
Changed)
Type 9, 11~15 =
0
8
7
Related
Program
84-31-28
0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
:
1 = - 41 dBm
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = RX Level Control
Mode
2 = RX Automatic Level
Control
Flag
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select receive level control mode.
0 ~ 16 (- 24 dB ~ + 24 dB)
0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
:
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select receive voice level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-34 = 1
Type 1, Type 7 ~
8 = 36 (V1.5
Changed)
Type 9, 11~15 =
42
Type 1, Type 7 ~
8 = 1 (V1.5
Changed)
Type 9, 11~15 =
0
Type 1, Type 7 ~
8 = 36 (V1.5
Changed)
Type 9, 11~15 =
42
0
8 84-31-34
Program
84
Programming Manual 2-519
SL1100
Item
No.
36
37
Item Input Data Description
RTP Rx AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
TDM Echo Canceller NLP mode
(4W)
0 ~ 12 (- 42 dBm ~ - 6 dBm)
:
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Echo Path Mode
3 = Echo Path Auto Detect Mode
Do not change the setting unless asked to change by engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-34 = 2
Program
84
Conditions
None
ISSUE 3.01
Default
7
Related
Program
84-31-34
1
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-520 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Year
Month
Day
Item
00 ~ 99
01 ~ 12
01 ~ 31
Input Data Default
00 (No Setting)
00 (No Setting)
00 (No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-521
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For password entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a:
• Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
• Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0 ~ 9, # and * )
• Password level
The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The SA or SB level password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the
Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs, and SB level password can access to SB programs only.)
It is NOT recommended to change these data. If you must change these Data make sure you keep the ID/Password or you will never be able to enter the program unless you clear all the System Data/Setting.
Input Data
User Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
User Name
Password
User Level
Item
1 ~ 8
Input Data
Maximum 10 characters
Up to eight digits
0 = Prohibited User
2 = IN (Installer Level)
3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming Administer Mode
Level 1)
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Default
User No.
1
2
3
4
User Name necam sltech
ADMIN1
ADMIN2
Password
*****
12345678
0000
9999
Level
1 (MF)
2 (IN)
3 (SA)
4 (SB)
Level Description
Manufacture Level - Access to all system program
Installer Level - Access to all IN level programs.
System Administrator Level 1 - Restricted
Access
System Administrator Level 2 - More Restricted Access
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 2-522
ISSUE 3.01
User No.
5
User Name
USER1
Password
1111
SL1100
Level
5 (UA)
Level Description
User Programming Administer Mode Level 1
Conditions
• More than one extension can be in the programming mode.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-523
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-03 : Save Data
Level:
SA
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the CF Card. This program should be used after changing the programmed data.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Save Data
Item Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
• Before Uploading Customer Database please make sure you reset the system either by using 90-08 or Power down/up the system.
• When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ-VM21 the system MUST be powered off. Never install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-524 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-04 : Load Data
Level:
SA
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted CF Card into the PZ-VM21
Daughter Board installed to the system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Load Data
Item Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Program
90
Conditions
• After uploading the data the display will change to a next Program. Then make sure you EXIT the
Program order for upload to complete. Now some of the setting needs to have system reset order for setting to be effective (example: IP Address, Line Key Assignment) so we Recommend to reset the system.
• When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ-VM21 the system MUST be powered off. Never install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-525
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-05 : Slot Control
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC
Programming.
Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) units (slots 0 ~ 9).
Delete allows you to completely uninstall the unit. You should do this if you want to remove a unit and plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If a different type of interface unit is being installed in a slot previously used, the slot should be deleted (option 1) first before installing the new interface unit.
Reset allows you to send a reset code.
Input Data
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Slot Control
Item
1 = Delete
2 = Reset
3 = Set Busy Out
4 = Reset Busy Out
Input Data
Slot Number 0 ~ 12 (V1.5 Changed)
Default
-
Conditions
• When you delete or reset a unit, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05. When reusing the slot for another unit, you must plug the unit in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again.
• When you delete or reset a unit, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is set back to default.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-526 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-06 : Trunk Control
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a unit from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the unit switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on the unit can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down.
Input Data
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Trunk Control
Item
0 = Set Busy Out
1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)
Input Data
Trunk Port Number :
001 ~ 084
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-527
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-07 : Station Control
Level:
SA
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC
Programming.
Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance.
Input Data
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Control
1 = Hardware Reset
2 = Software Reset
Input Data
Extension Number (up to eight digits)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-528 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-08 : System Reset
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
System Reset
Item Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold key only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
• Some of changes made to a program may need to reset the system order for the change to be effective.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-529
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to automatically reset.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Month
Item Default
00
02
Day
03
04
Hour
Minute
Input Data
00 ~ 12
If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the system is automatically reset every month on the predefined day.
00 ~ 31
If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and
Minute) is set, the system automatically resets every day at the predefined time.
00 ~ 23
00 ~ 59
00
00
00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-530 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is reported to the pre-defined destination.
Input Data
Alarm Number 001 ~ 100
Item
No.
01
Alarm Type
Item
02
Report
Input Data
0 = Not Set
1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
0 = Not Report (No autodial)
1 = Report (autodial)
Default
-
-
Table 2-18 Description of Alarm
Alarm
No.
1
2
Type
2
2
Report
0
0
Name
PKG Initialize Error.
PKG
Mounting
Error
Content of
Alarm
Cause Action
1.
The PKG failed to initialize.
2.
The PKG did not start normally.
1.
PKG not inserted firmly.
2.
PKG was removed, but not reinserted firmly.
3.
Old PKG data still reported due to no initialization.
1.
Insert PKG firmly.
2.
Insert PKG firmly.
3.
Delete slot information in
Program
90-05 and insert the PKG again.
The unit did not step on a regular procedure and it was pulled out.
Or, it is not normally inserted.
1.
The package is not completely inserted.
2.
The package is out of order.
1.
Please insert the package firmly.
2.
Please try again after initializing the system data once when
LED doesn't blink normally.
3.
Exchange packages.
Recovery
During initialization, the
PKG is recognized.
When unit is reconfirmed, the error is recovered.
Alarm
Status
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-531
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
90
Alarm
No.
3
4
Type
2
2
Report
0
0
Name
Content of
Alarm
Cause Action Recovery
Connection fault between
CPU and other
PKGs.
PKG S/W
Download
Error
The error occurred when communicating with the package.
When the package is broken, it recognizes it as a communication fault.
The unit program could not be downloaded normally.
The unit could not able to be started normally.
1.
The unit is not completely inserted.
2.
The powersupply voltage of the system is outside ratings.
3.
The equipment that generates the noise in the same power supply system as the power supply origin of the system is connected, and it malfunctions because of the power supply noise.
4.
The equipment to which it is adjacent to of a main device, and has put out the radiation noise exists, and it malfunctions because of the radiation noise.
5.
The chassis is not properly grounded.
1.
Please insert the unit firmly.
2.
The powersupply voltage must use another power supply when is in the range of ratings or measuring with the voltmeter, and deviating from the rated range.
3.
Please use the power supply besides the equipment with the possibility of the noise source.
4.
Please separate as much as possible and use a main device from the equipment by which you seem may generate the radiation noise.
5.
Please ground the chassis correctly.
When unit is confirmed, the error is recovered.
1.
The package software is not stored in the downloaded
USB memory.
2.
The stored package software is illegal.
Package information that was installed before remains.
1.
Delete slot information that corresponds by Program
90-05-01 to delete package information that was installed before.
2.
There is a possibility that the unit program is broken though an external factor of the noise etc.
is thought.
3.
Please load into the USB memory and try again when you back up the unit program.
4.
Please Check with maker on uncertain points.
Please exchange units, though it is likely to restore by mounting the unit again.
When the unit program is normally downloaded, the error is recovered.
Alarm
Status
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
2-532 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Alarm
No.
6
8
10
11
14
15
Type
0
1
0
0
0
0
Report
0
0
0
0
0
0
Name
Blocking The link of terminals connected with the ESI package came off.
RAM
Backup
Battery
Error
ISDN Link
Error
CTI Link
Error
RAM backup battery on the
CPU unit is unplugged or defective.
Layer1 link of
ISDN lines came off.
1.
Check Connection between main device and
ISDN line.
2.
DSU Breakdown.
3.
The setting of
Program
10-03 does not correspond to an actual line.
The link with the
CTI server came off.
1.
LAN cable defective.
2.
Connected
HUB broken.
3.
The CTI server doesn't start normally.
LAN Link
Error
Network
Keep
Alive
(V1.5
Added)
Content of
Alarm
The link with
LAN on CPU came off.
1.
The network connection has been cut.
2.
Network
Keep Alive restoration.
3.
Response notification on network
Keep Alive.
1.
2.
Faulty wiring
3.
4.
Cause
Terminal
Breakdown.
and wiring termination.
External noise.
ESI package
Breakdown.
1.
LAN cable defective.
2.
Connected
HUB broken.
3.
Defective
CPU.
1.
LAN cable is defective.
2.
Net side trouble.
3.
Packet blocked by firewall.
4.
Repetition of
IP address.
tery.
Action
Confirm the terminal connected with same ESI. If they work normally, confirm the breakdown or the wiring for the terminal.
Exchange the terminal that doesn't work and the working terminal, and confirm it’s working. An external factor of the noise etc. is thought.
Please reconfirm wiring and the installation, etc.
Please inquire of the manufacturer when the problem occurs after it confirms it.
Check the battery connector. If it is connected correctly, replace the bat-
Recovery
The error is recovered when connecting or exchanging it.
The error is recovered once the battery is replaced.
1.
Confirm the data of Program 10-03.
2.
Confirm wiring and the installation of DSU.
3.
Check with the manufacturer if the problem occurs again.
When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.
1.
Confirm the
CTI server, wiring, and the connection.
2.
Check the manufacturer if the problem occurs again.
Confirm the operation of LAN connector, LAN cable, and HUB again.
1.
Confirm that the defect is on the Network side.
2.
Confirm the settings of
HUB and the router, etc.
When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.
When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.
When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.
Alarm
Status
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
WAR
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-533
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
90
Alarm
No.
17
18
30
31
32
50
51
54
55
Type
1
1
2
1
1
1
0
2
2
Report
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Name
Content of
Alarm
Cause
Denial of service
Connection Error
SMDR
Buffer full
The system received illegal packet.
Digital Station
Wiring Error
Service outage
(Dos attack)
The wiring connection between the
Multiline terminal and the system has an issue.
The temporary buffer for SMDR in main device overflowed, and a part of output
SMDR data disappeared because it could not output
SMDR data.
1.
Problem of wiring to connect main device with PC.
2.
PC Problem.
Sensor detected abnormality.
Sensor detected abnormality.
Security
Sensor detected
Automatic
Transmission from
Remote
Surveillance
Remote watch function did auto dialing.
Remote watch function did auto dialing.
System
Start Notification
The system started.
The system was started.
System
Data change
License
Management Table Full
Regular maintenance exchange notification.
CPU Upgrade is performed or
Programming change is made.
A new TCP/IP terminal and the
DSP board were not able to be added to the application license management table.
• The license management table is registering full.
Maximum 512 license information on the TCP/IP terminal is registered, and a new terminal cannot be registered.
The regular maintenance exchange day has passed.
• The regular maintenance exchange day that had been set with Program
90-51 exceeded it.
Action
Confirm whether to find abnormality on the net side.
Check all wiring in between the Multiline terminal and the digital station card.
1.
Confirm whether there is problem in wiring to connect a main device with
PC.
2.
Execute the reactivation of
PC.
Especially, anything need not be done.
Especially, anything need not be done.
When the output is restarted, the error is recovered.
However, the
SMDR data after the error occurs is not recorded.
No action needed.
No action needed.
Please delete license information on an unnecessary
TCP/IP terminal with Program
90-44.
Please do the maintenance exchanges of pertinent parts, and set the next regular maintenance exchange day with
Program 90-51.
Recovery
The excess on the regular maintenance exchange day is canceled by changing
Program
90-51 or when the function is invalidated, the error is recovered.
Alarm
Status
WAR
MAJ
ERR
REC
INF
INF
WAR
ERR
REC
2-534 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Alarm
No.
57
59
60
61
Type
2
2
2
0
Report
0
0
0
0
Name
Content of
Alarm
Cause Action Recovery
IP Collision error
Networking port limit exceeded
(V1.5
Added)
SIP Registration
Error Notification.
Check the IP
Address collision (CPU,
VOIPDB, Program 84-26-01
GW : 1 ~ 8).
Total number of ports exceeded the limit of 168 ports in the network.
1.
3.
The registration of the SIP trunk to the
SIP server failed.
2.
The registration of the SIP trunk to the
SIP server failed in the authentication.
There is no response from the
SIP server to the SIP registration request.
Collision IP Address in the network.
Check the IP Address in the network.
Recover the
IP Address collision.
• New extension or trunk ports are added.
• A new system is added in Program 10-27-01.
• A new system is connected to the network.
• EXIFU is connected.
Reduce extensions or trunks not to exceed 168 ports in the network.
When the total number of ports becomes 168 or less, the error is recoverd.
1.
The setting of the system data is wrong.
2.
The setting of the router is wrong.
3.
It is an error to the link of
LAN.
4.
Net side trouble.
1.
Confirm the following system data setting -- Programs 10-12,
10-28, 10-29,
10-30, and
10-36.
2.
Confirm the setting of routers.
3.
Confirm whether abnormality occurs on the net side.
4.
Confirm the authentication system data setting.
5.
Confirm wiring and the system data setting. Please inquire on uncertain points of the maker.
The error is recovered when normally connecting it.
SIP extension trouble information.
1.
Failed registration of the SIP extension terminal.
2.
The SIP extension terminal was not acquired:
• At Regist of the SIP extension terminal to SL1100.
• When you cannot acquire the DSP resource when it sent.
1.
The registered port is used by other extension.
2.
The license is insufficient.
3.
DSP of
VoIPDB not acquired.
1.
Confirm wiring and the system data setting.
2.
Confirm whether each equipment such as access points works normally.
Alarm
Status
WAR
ERR
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-535
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
90
Alarm
No.
63
64
65
66
67
68
Type
0
1
0
2
0
2
Report
0
0
0
0
0
0
Name
Content of
Alarm
Cause Action Recovery
SIP-MLT trouble information.
1.
The trouble occurred by the SIP-
MLT relation.
2.
The DSP resource could not be acquired at incoming/outgoing.
3.
The negotiation with
VoIPDB failed.
1.
The packet loss occurred on the network or the wiring cutting occurred.
2.
DSP of
VoIPDB not acquired.
Confirm whether each equipment such as wirings and HUB is normal.
VoIPDB
LAN Link
Error.
VOIPDB trouble information.
SIP extension
License
Error.
SIP illegal
Packet received
VoIPDB
DSP All
Busy
Alarm
The link of LAN of VoIPDB came off.
The system received illegal packet.
1.
Provides alert when all DSP resources are being used.
2.
Used to troubleshoot or alerting when upgrade is needed.
1.
2.
3.
LAN cable is defective.
Connected
HUB broken.
Defect CPU.
Not enough DSP resources in system.
1.
Confirm LAN connector and wiring.
2.
Check with maker on uncertain points.
When DSP of
VoIPDB notifies
Error.
More than the number of licenses to which the
SIP extension terminal was turned on at
REGISTER.
VoIPDB. Defective. 1.
Possibility of defective hardware.
2.
Check with maker on uncertain points.
• Wrong number of licenses.
1.
Confirm the number of licenses for SIP extension terminals.
2.
Check with maker on uncertain points.
When the number of registration of
SIP extension terminals falls below the number of licenses.
A client or network was illegal state.
Check with maker on uncertain point, when happening frequently when operating it.
Install VMDB with more DSP resources.
When the connection returns normally, the error is recovered.
Alarm
Status
WAR
ERR
REC
WAR
WAR
INF
Conditions
• The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at Program 90-50-01.
• System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90-10-01. If multiple Alarm Display Setting is set, only one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display.
• The priority level (highest -> lowest) : Alarm 55 > Alarm 7 > Alarm 5 > Alarm 30 > Alarm 8 > Alarm
52> Alarm 29 > Free Demo License Period.
2-536 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Feature Cross Reference
None
SL1100
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-537
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-11 : System Alarm Report
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm report.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Item Input Data Description
Report Method
SMTP Host Port
Number
0 = No Report
1 = E-mail Address
When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this option to 1. E-mail address set in 90-11-08.
SMTP Host Name Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP name (ex : smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry if needed.
0 ~ 65535 When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the SMTP host port number.
Contact your ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry if needed.
To E-mail Address
Reply Address
Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail address to which the report should be sent.
Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the e-mail address where replies should be e-mailed.
From Address
DNS Primary Address
Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, set this e-mail address for the station sending the report.
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS primary address.
DNS Secondary
Address
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
When alarm reports are e-mailed, set the DNS secondary address.
Customer Name
Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, enter a name to identify the particular system.
Change SMTP
Client (V2.0 Added)
0 = No
1 = Yes
In case of YES uses a PRG47-18
SMTP client.( MEMDB/CF mounting is required.)
To Address (PRG 90-11-08), CC
Mail Address (PRG 90-25-01) Up to
48 characters.
In case of No uses a PRG 90-11
SMTP client.
Default
0
No Setting
25
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
No Setting
0
Related
Program
90-11-08
90-25-01
47-18
90-11
2-538 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Item
No.
15
Item Input Data
DIMLOG Notifica-
tion (V2.0 Added)
0 = No
1 = Yes
Description
PRG 90-11-14=YES (PRG 47-18
SMTP Client uses) and CF mount are necessary.
In the case of System Fault, Dimlast.gz and Dimdump.gz are notified.
Conditions
None
SL1100
Default
0
Related
Program
90-11-14
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-539
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program has six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options. The system can have up to 50 reports.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
Input Data
0 = No setting
5 = Compact Flash
Description
Indicate the type of connection used for the System Alarms.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-540 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-13 : System Information Output
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system information output.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
05
Output Command
Input Data Description
0 = No setting
5 = Compact Flash
Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Indicate the type of connection used to print the system information.
This program only be able to access by
Telephone programming.
Default
0
-
Program
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-541
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-16 : Main Software Information
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the
CPU.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Version Number
02
Software Release Date
Input Data
Read Only:
01.00 ~ 99.99
Read Only:
May 22 2002 17 : 53 : 46
Default
ASCII Code
(5 Bytes)
ASCII Code
(20 Bytes)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-542 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-17 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system units.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
DSP Firmware Version No.
Input Data
Read Only:
00.00.00.00 ~ 15.15.15.15
Default
BCD Code (2 Byte)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-543
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level:
SA
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC
Programming.
When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension is released from the Dial Block restriction.
Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Delete IP Telephone
[Release ?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
This assignment removes the station number association with the MAC address of the IP station.
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Code Restriction/Toll Restriction
2-544 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
03
04
05
06
07
09
11
Item Input Data Description
Call Traffic Output
DTMF Receiver Busy
Output
0 = Not Measured
1 = Measure
All Line Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
Dial Tone Detector
Busy Output
Caller ID Receiver
Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
Voice Mail Channel
All Busy Output
Attendant Channel All
Busy Output
Security Sensor Dial
Record
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Recorded
1 = Recorded
Record Security sensor dialing and Remote Inspection dialing to security report
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Conditions
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-545
Program
90
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
• Traffic Reports
ISSUE 3.01
2-546 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report output.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
0 = No setting
3 = LAN
Input Data Default
0
Conditions
None
Program
90
Feature Cross Reference
• Traffic Reports
Programming Manual 2-547
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC
Programming.
Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone from the system.
Input Data
Extension Number Up to eight digits
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data Description
Delete IP Telephone
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press
Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
This assignment removes the station number association with the MAC address of the IP station.
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-548 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Description
Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the alarm report to print.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Notification Number
Item Input Data
00 ~ 12 (0 = Not Set)
00 ~ 31 (0 = Not Set)
00 ~ 23
00 ~ 59
1 ~ 12
Default
00
00
00
00
Program
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-549
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup.
Input Data
CC Number
Item
No.
01
Item
CC Mail Address
Input Data
Up to 255 Characters
1 ~ 5
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-550 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to change a system program.
Input Data
Program Numbers
Item
No.
01
Item
Maintenance Level
Level 1 = MF Level
Level 2 = IN Level
Level 3 = SA Level
Level 4 = SB Level
Input Data
1001 ~ 9903
Default
Refer to the Level indication for each individual program (located in the upper left corner at the beginning of each program).
Program
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-551
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the user programming mode.
Input Data
Extension Numbers
Item
No.
01
Password
Item Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Fixed four digits
Default
1111
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-552 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic Information
Maintenance) access over the LAN, and to define the user name and password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level information.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Access Enabling
02
03
Username
Password
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
20 characters
(alphanumeric)
20 characters
(alphanumeric)
Input Data Default
0 (Disable)
SL1100
12345678
Program
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-553
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-33 : Preselected Data Setup
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use 90-33 : Preselected Data Setup to setup the system to preselected setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
China
Chile
Taiwan
Korea
Hong Kong
Brazil
Malaysia
Thailand
India
Item Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Default
China
Program No.
10-02-01
Country Code
14-02-09
14-02-18
Name
Busy Tone Detection
Busy Tone Detection on talking
15-03-15
20-01-09
20-02-12
20-17-01
20-31-02
20-31-07
20-31-08
20-31-19
Disconnect without dial after hooking hold
Camp-on cancel time
Mode setting for incoming call from extension
Operator’s Extension number
Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
Ring No Answer Alarm Time
DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer
2-554
Default
86
(For China)
1
(All trunks : On)
1
(All trunks : On)
1
(All stations = Disconnect)
30
1
(Signaling call)
101 (Operator 1 = 101)
30
30
30
180
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
25-03-01
25-04-01
25-07-07
30-02-01
80-04-06
80-04-07
80-04-08
80-04-09
80-04-12
80-04-14
80-05-01
80-07
81-01-09
82-04-08
15-03-09
15-03-14
40-07
47-02-16
47-06-14
47-07-03
47-10-03
Program No.
21-03-01
Name
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
22-01-03
22-01-04
22-01-08
22-08-01
Incoming ring no answer alarm start Timer
Normal DIL incoming no answer Timer
DID (DDI) Pilot Call No answer timer
Second IRG Setup for unanswered
DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at Wrong dialing
DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at No answer/
Busy
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer
DSS Console Extension Assignment
ON min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
ON max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
OFF min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
OFF max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
Frequency No 1 (Busy Tone for Trunk)
Twit Level-Rcv1/Rcv2/Rcv3
Date Format
Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
(Table2)
Time ringing signal stop detection time
Maximum hook flash time
Caller ID Function
Forwarded Caller ID display mode
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Voice Prompt Language (All Station Mailbox Number)
Voice Prompt Language (All Group Mailbox Number)
Prompt Language (All Routing Mailbox Number)
Voice Prompt Language (All Trunk port Number)
Chile
Program No.
10-01-01
10-01-02
10-01-03
10-01-04
10-01-05
10-01-06
10-01-07
- Year
- Month
- Day
- Week (1 : SUN)
- Hour
- Minute
- Second
Name
Default
1
(All trunks : All modes : Group1)
30
30
30
1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
180
101 (Console No.1 = 101)
9
12
9
12
2
1
1
(yy/mm/dd)
45
70
(4.5 s)
132
(660 ms)
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
SL1100
Program
90
Default
4
18
30
0
5
7
10
Programming Manual 2-555
Program
90
SL1100
Program No.
80-01-02
Basic Tone No
12-01-02
20-02-07
20-02-09
20-02-12
20-07-11
Name
Automatic night mode switch
Display mode of Date and Time
Disconnect Supervision
Mode setting for incoming call from extension
Force Trunk disconnection (Analog trunk only)
20-07-12
20-08-08
20-09-04
20-11-12
20-13-01
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-20
14-01-13
14-02-09
11-12-16
11-12-29
20-17-01
30-02-01
10-02-01
15-02-01
20-13-26
20-13-31
21-01-06
21-08-01
21-08-02
21-08-03
24-02-01
24-02-03
25-07-07
25-07-08
40-10-01
14-01-06
Trunk port disable
Dial Block
Notification for Incoming Call List existence
External Call Forward (Off-Premise)
Long conversation alarm
Break-In
Broken-in
Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert
Group listening service
Connected Line identification (COLP)
Dial pause at first digit
Time of Repeat Dial
Interval of Repeat Dial
Repeat Dial Calling Timer
Transfer to busy extension
No answer time for call forward
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time
DISA Conversation Disconnect Timer
VRS Fixed Message
SMDR print-out
Trunk to Trunk transfer
Busy Tone Detection
Trunk access via Networking
Direct extension call pickup
Operator’s Extension number
DSS Console Extension Assignment
Country Code
Display Language Selection
ISSUE 3.01
Default
1
(Svc Tone 2 Unit 1)
0
8
1
1
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
5
0
0
30
0
15
10
1
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
715
866
101 (Operator 1 = 101)
101 (DSS Console No.1 = 101)
56
12
Program 90 : Maintenance Program 2-556
21-05-08
Restriction table
21-06-06
Permit code table
21-06-07
Restriction table
31-02-01
31-02-02
14-02-10
22-04-01
11-09-01
11-01-01
10-20-01
35-01-01
35-01-04
35-02-09
35-02-14
20-02-07
15-03-03
21-01-06
Internal Paging Group Assignment
Internal Paging Group Assignment
Caller ID
Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Trunk Access Code
System Numbering
LAN Setup for External Equipment (SMDR)
SMDR-Output Port Type
SMDR-Omit Digits
SMDR-Extension Number or Name
SMDR-Date
Time and Date Display Mode
Terminal Type
Dial pause at first digit
Programming Manual
Default
7
7
7
7
7
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program No.
40-07-01
47-02-16
47-06-14
47-07-03
47-10-03
Name
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System based
Voice Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Taiwan
Program No.
15-01-01
Extension Name
20-02-12
21-04-01
Name
Forced Intercom Ringing
Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
21-05-07
Permit code table
Default
-
(Delete all station name)
1
1
(Class 1, EXT 200 ~ 295, mode 1 ~ 4)
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
PmitTBL 1 = None
PmitTBL 2 = None
PmitTBL 3 = 080, 081
PmitTBL 4 = 110, 119
TollRes 1 = 0204
TollRes 2 = 00, 01, 0204, 100, 108
TollRes 3 = 0, 100, 18, 108
TollRes 4 = @
1
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
Set to 101-108 (IRG1)
0
0 for Type 3 Trunk access code
9 for Type 5 operator
DEVICE 5 set to 1
1
(Port 1 only)
0
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
5
1
(All stations)
1
2-557
Program
90
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program
90
81-01-14
81-01-15
20-19-02
20-07-01
25-03-01
25-04-01
25-07-02
25-07-11
32-02-01
40-07-01
81-07-01
25-07-03
20-02-11
24-02-03
14-02-02
14-02-19
14-02-20
80-04-06
80-04-08
14-02-09
80-04-12
80-04-13
80-07-01
14-02-04
Program No.
20-13-01
Name
Long Conversation Alarm
20-13-22
20-09-04
14-02-18
Called Party Status
Notification for Incoming Call List existence
Busy tone detection on talking
20-07-11
20-03-04
25-02-01
Busy tone detection frequency
Busy tone detection interval
ON Minimum RCV2 time
OFF Minimum RCV2 time
Busy tone detection
TONE RCV 2 frequency 1
TONE RCV 2 frequency 2
Call progress TONE detector frequency
Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect
Flash (Hooking 1)
Flash (Hooking 2)
Caller ID Wait Timer
Manual Night Service Enabled
DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/
Busy
DID/DISA No Answer Time
DID/DISA Answer Delay Timer
Door Box Ring Assignment
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice
CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports
Disconnect after DID/DISA re-transfer to IRG
Default Setting of Microphone of Key Telephone
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Ring Detect Type This option to sets Extended
Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk
Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only) Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect
Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT
DID/DISA Talkie to assign the VRS message number
Default
0
(Class 1 only)
1
(Class 1 only)
0
(Class 1 only)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
3
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
10
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
7
7
1
1
(Table 1)
2
(Table 2)
TABLE 1 set to 48
TABLE 2 set to 62
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
20
30
2
1
(Class 1 only)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1)
16
3
Set to EXT.101-108; DOOR 1; Mode 1-2
9
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
180
0
16
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Class 1 only)
1
Trunks 1 ~ 27 Talkie = 1
Mode 1 data = 1 (Day Mode)
Mode 2 data = 2 (Night Mode)
2-558 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program No.
25-05-01
Name
VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
40-10-08
40-10-09
25-06-02
14-01-13
Call Attendant Message - when Busy
Call Attendant Message - when No Answer
DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Loop Disconnect Supervision
21-03-01
20-11-12
25-07-07
12-02-01
12-02-01
12-02-01
12-02-01
10-02-01
80-01-01
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Call Forwarding Off-Premise
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time
Automatic night service Patterns
Automatic night service Patterns
Automatic night service Patterns
Automatic night service Patterns
Country Code
Repeat count
Korea
Program No.
10-02-01
11-01-01
11-09-02
11-10-20
11-12-27
12-02-01
Name
Country Code
Dial * Digit
2nd TRK Access
Ope VRS Msg
Call Pickup
Automatic night service Patterns ( Start of time )
12-02-02
12-02-03
12-03-01
14-01-13
14-02-04
14-02-05
14-02-09
14-02-10
Automatic night service Patterns ( End of time )
Automatic night service Patterns ( Mode No. )
Night mode week setting
TRK-TRK Transfer
Flash for timed Flash or Disconnect
DTD-Manual Dl
Busy Tone Detection
Caller ID
Default
4
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2)
8
9
MSG (1, 2, 4, 8, 9) Recv. 9 data=101
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2)
1
(Class 1 only)
0
01 ~ 02 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
01 ~ 01 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
01 ~ 03 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
01 ~ 02 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
886
6
Default
82
1
6
#716
*
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 =
00:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 =
09:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 =
18:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 =
09:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 =
18:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 =
00:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 =
Mode3
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 =
Mode1
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 =
Mode2 sun = Pttrn 3, sat = Pttrn 2
Mode Group 1-4
0
1
1
0
1
Programming Manual 2-559
Program
90
Program
90
SL1100
Program No.
20-02-12
20-03-03
20-03-04
20-03-07
20-07-01
20-08-09
20-08-20
20-13-01
20-13-22
20-17-01
20-19-02
21-01-06
21-01-09
21-04-01
21-05-07
14-02-18
15-01-01
15-03-09
15-03-15
16-01-03
16-01-04
16-01-08
20-02-04
20-02-11
Name
Busy Tone Detection Talking
Extension Name
Extension Display
Hook disconnect mode
Auto Step Call
Hunting Mode
Max Queue No
Transfer Retrieve
Microphone of Key telephone
ICM Call Type
SLT DTMF Dial
Dial Start
Forced Dial
Manual night Service Enabled
Hotline
Hot key Pad
Long Conversation Alarm
Call Party Status
Attendant
Caller ID wait timer
1st Digit P
Hotline Start
T/R Class for Extension
Permit code table
21-06-06
21-05-08
Permit code table
Restriction Table
21-15-01
22-01-11
22-14-01
22-14-03
22-14-05
22-14-07
22-15-01
22-15-03
22-15-05
22-15-07
24-02-03
24-02-04
25-01-02
2nd TRK Ace Route TBL
Msg Interval
Message1 Start Time
MSG1 Count
MSG2 Count
Disconnect Time
Message1 Start Time
MSG1 Count
MSG2 Count
Disconnect Time
CFW not answer Time
TRF Recall time without Password
2-560
ISSUE 3.01
Default
101
0
1
3
0
1
1
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
PmitTBL 1 = None
PmitTBL 2 = 119, 112, 113, 080
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
2
10
15
15
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
32
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Program No.
25-07-01
25-07-02
25-07-03
31-02-01
31-02-02
32-01-02
35-01-04
35-02-09
35-02-14
80-04-06
80-04-08
80-04-12
80-04-13
80-07-01
81-01-09
81-01-14
81-01-15
81-07-01
Name
VRS Dial Time
DISA No Answer Time
DISA Disconnect Retransfer to IRG
Internal Paging Group
Internal all Paging Group
Door Box Lock Cancel
SMDR-Omit Digits
SMDR-Extension Number or Name
SMDR-Date
ON Minimum RCV2 Time
OFF Minimum RCV2 Time
TONE RCV 2 Frequency 1
TONE RCV 2 Frequency 2
Busy Tone Frequency
Signal Stop Dtct
Flash (Hooking 1)
Flash (Hooking 2)
CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Ports
82-04-04
82-04-07
82-04-08
Max. Break TM
Min. Flash TM
Max. Flash TM
Hong Kong
Program No.
14-01-13
Name
Loop Disconnect Supervision
14-02-02
14-02-04
Ring Detect Type
Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect
14-02-09
14-02-10
14-02-18
14-02-19
14-02-20
20-02-12
20-03-03
20-03-04
20-07-01
Busy Tone Detection
Caller-ID
Busy Tone Detection on Talking
Busy Tone Detention Frequency
Busy Tone Detention Interval
Forced Intercom Ringing
SLT DTMF Dial
Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT
Manual Night Service Enabled
Programming Manual
Default
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
3
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
10
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
1
1
1
(Class 1 only)
Default
0
1
1
1
1
5
60
30
1
2
3
7
7 table 2 ~ 48, table 3 ~ 62
80
20
30
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14
17
120
SL1100
Program
90
2-561
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program
90
31-02-02
32-01-02
80-01-02
80-01-02
80-01-02
80-01-03
80-01-03
80-04-12
80-04-13
80-07-01
80-07-01
81-01-14
81-07-01
10-02-01
Program No.
20-13-01
Name
Long Conversation Alarm
20-13-22
20-17-01
20-19-02
21-01-06
22-01-11
24-02-03
31-02-01
Called Party Status
Operator Extension Number
Caller ID Wait Timer
Dial pause at first digit of dialing
VRS Waiting Message Interval Time
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Internal Paging Group Number
Internal All Call Paging Receiving
Door Lock Cancel Time
Tone 14 Intercom Ring-Back Tone (Unit1Basic TN)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit1Basic TN)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit2Basic TN)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit1Duration)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit2Duration)
TONE RCV2 (Frequency 1)
TONE RCV2 (Frequency 2)
Table 2 (Frequency)
Table 3 (Frequency)
Flash (Hooking 1)
CODEC Filter Type for analog trunk port
Country Code
Brazil
Program No.
10-20-01
11-01-01
Name
TCP Port SMDR Ex - Dev 5
System Numbering - ACC Operator
11-01-01
11-09-01
12-02-01
12-02-01
System Numbering - ACC Trunk
Trunk Access Code for Type 3
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
12-02-01
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
Default
60000
Dial = 9 (1 = Digit)
Type (5 = Opr)
Dial = 0 (1 = Digit)
Type (3 = Trunk)
0
Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1700, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 05 = S 1700, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
Default
0
(Class 1 only)
1
(Class 1 only)
101
0
1
10
15
1
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
2
10
10
0
10
20
48
62
2
3
25
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
852
2-562 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Program No.
12-02-01
Name
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
12-02-01
12-02-01
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
14-01-01
14-01-13
14-01-14
14-01-15
14-01-17
14-01-18
14-02-04
12-02-01
12-02-01
12-03-01
12-07-01
14-02-09
14-02-12
15-01-01
15-02-12
15-02-33
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 3)
Weekly Night Service Switching
Text Data for Night Mode
Day / Night Mode 1
Day / Night Mode 2
Day / Night Mode 3
Day / Night Mode 4
Day / Night Mode 5
Day / Night Mode 6
Day / Night Mode 7
Day / Night Mode 8
Trunk Name
Loop Disconnect Supervision
Long Conversation Cut Off
Long Conversation Alarm before Cut Off
Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone For Long Conversation Alarm
Warning Beep Tone Signaling
Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect
Busy Tone Detection
Detect Network Disconnect Signal
Extension Name
Off Hook Signaling Type
Multi Language Calendar Display on LCD
SL1100
Default
Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0800, M2
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1600, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 05 = S 1600, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
01 = Sunday, 3
ModeGrp 1
Dia
(Mode Grp 1)
Noite
(Mode Grp 1)
Almoço
(Mode Grp 1)
-
(Mode Grp 1)
-
(Mode Grp 1)
-
(Mode Grp 1)
-
(Mode Grp 1)
-
(Mode Grp 1)
Linha 01 ~ 51
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
101: 101 ~ 184: 184
4
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-563
Program
90
SL1100
Program No.
15-02-34
Call Register Mode
Name
15-03-12
15-07-01
Fixed Cadence
Programmable Function Key
22-09-01
24-02-01
25-01-02
26-02-01
20-13-01
20-15-01
20-15-03
20-15-05
20-15-09
20-16-01
20-31-02
20-01-01
20-02-07
20-02-09
20-02-11
20-02-12
20-07-01
20-07-11
Operator Access Mode
Time and Date Display Mode
Disconnect Supervision
Default Setting Microphone of KTS
Forced Intercom Ringing
Manual Night Service Enabled
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Long Conversation Alarm
Normal Incoming Call of Trunk
Internal Incoming Call
DID
Call Back
Selectable Display Message
Message Number 1
Message Number 2
Message Number 3
Message Number 4
Message Number 5
Message Number 6
Message Number 7
Message Number 8
Message Number 9
Message Number 10
Callback / Trunk queuing cancel time
Expected Number of Digits
Busy Transfer
DISA User ID
Dial Data
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
2-564
ISSUE 3.01
Default
1
(All stations)
0
(All stations)
Key 21 : 00
Key 22 : 00
(All stations)
1
0
1
5
1
1
(Class 1 Only)
1
(Class 01 ~ 15)
0
(Class 01 ~ 15)
11
10
11
10
REUNIÃO_# # : # #
SERVIÇO_EXTERNO
RETORNA_ # # : # #
LIGAR _ # # # # # # # # # #
LIGAR_APÓS_ # # : # #
ALMOÇO
VIAGEM _ ATÉ # # / # #
FÉRIAS_ ATÉ # # / # #
FORA DE SERVIÇO
AUSENTE_ATÉ # # / # #
7200
(Class 01 ~ 15)
2
(TRK G.10 only)
1
0
(All Trunk)
00@@@@@@@@@@
01@@@@@@@@@@
02@@@@@@@@@@
03@@@@@@@@@@
04@@@@@@@@@@
05@@@@@@@@@@
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Name
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 159
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 169
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Dial Analysis Table number 179
Dial Analysis Table number 180
Dial Analysis Table number 181
Dial Analysis Table number 182
Dial Analysis Table number 183
Dial Analysis Table number 184
Dial Analysis Table number 185
Dial Analysis Table number 186
Dial Analysis Table number 187
Dial Analysis Table number 188
Dial Analysis Table number 189
Dial Analysis Table number 190
Dial Analysis Table number 191
Dial Analysis Table number 192
Dial Analysis Table number 193
Dial Analysis Table number 194
Dial Analysis Table number 195
Dial Analysis Table number 196
Service Type
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Program No.
26-02-02
Programming Manual
Default
06@@@@@@@@@@
07@@@@@@@@@@
080@@@@@@@
081@@@@@@@@@
082@@@@@@@@@
083@@@@@@@@@
084@@@@@@@@@
085@@@@@@@@@
086@@@@@@@@@
087@@@@@@@@@
088@@@@@@@@@
089@@@@@@@@@
090@@@@@@@
091@@@@@@@@@
092@@@@@@@@@
093@@@@@@@@@
094@@@@@@@@@
095@@@@@@@@@
096@@@@@@@@@
097@@@@@@@@@
098@@@@@@@@@
099@@@@@@@@@
1@@
2@@@@@@
3@@@@@@
4@@@@@@
5@@@@@@
6@@@@@@
7@@@@@@
8@@@@@@
90@@@@@@@@@@
91@@@@@
92@@@@@
93@@@@@
94@@@@@
95@@@@@
96@@@@@
97@@@@@
98@@@@@
99@@@@@
1
1
SL1100
Program
90
2-565
Program
90
SL1100
Name
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 159
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 169
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Dial Analysis Table number 179
Dial Analysis Table number 180
Dial Analysis Table number 181
Dial Analysis Table number 182
Dial Analysis Table number 183
Dial Analysis Table number 184
Dial Analysis Table number 185
Dial Analysis Table number 186
Dial Analysis Table number 187
Dial Analysis Table number 188
Dial Analysis Table number 189
Dial Analysis Table number 190
Dial Analysis Table number 191
Dial Analysis Table number 192
Dial Analysis Table number 193
Dial Analysis Table number 194
Dial Analysis Table number 195
Program No.
2-566
ISSUE 3.01
Default
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Name
Dial Analysis Table number 196
Additional Data
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 159
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 169
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Dial Analysis Table number 179
Dial Analysis Table number 180
Dial Analysis Table number 181
Dial Analysis Table number 182
Dial Analysis Table number 183
Dial Analysis Table number 184
Dial Analysis Table number 185
Dial Analysis Table number 186
Dial Analysis Table number 187
Dial Analysis Table number 188
Dial Analysis Table number 189
Dial Analysis Table number 190
Dial Analysis Table number 191
Program No.
26-02-03
Programming Manual
Default
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
SL1100
Program
90
2-567
Program
90
SL1100
Program No.
26-02-06
26-05-01
34-01-05
Name
Dial Analysis Table number 192
Dial Analysis Table number 193
Dial Analysis Table number 194
Dial Analysis Table number 195
Dial Analysis Table number 196
LCR Carrier Table
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Delete Digits
Carrie LCR Tabela 1
Carrie LCR Tabela 2
System Toll Restriction
35-01-01
35-01-04
35-02-09
35-02-14
Output Port Type
Omit Digits
Extension Number or Name
Date data
2-568
ISSUE 3.01
Default
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
10
10
10
10
10
2
2
2
4
3
1
(All Trunk)
1
(Port 1 only)
0
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program No.
35-02-16
Name
Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number
82-04-07
82-04-08
10-02-01
15-02-01
47-02-16
47-06-14
47-07-03
47-10-03
40-07-01
40-08-01
80-04-04
80-04-06
80-04-07
80-04-08
80-04-09
80-07-01
80-08-01
82-04-04
82-04-06
Voice Prompt Language Assignment
Voice Prompt Language Assignment
No Tone Time Type 2 BT
On Minimum Time Type 2 BT
On Maximum Time Type 2 BT
Off Minimum Time Type 2 BT
Off Maximum Time Type 2 BY
Frequency Table 1
Duration
Maximum Break Time
Maximum Make Time
Minimum Hook Flash Time
Maximum Hook Flash Time
Country Code
Display Language Selection
Voice Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Brazil - PRG80-01 Service Tone Setup -
Service Tone Setup
Internal Dial Tone TONE 2
Special Dial Tone TONE 3
Busy Tone TONE 6
Ring Back Tone TONE 14
External Ring Back Tone TONE 45
External Busy Tone TONE 46
Unit
4
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
Malaysia
Program No.
10-02-01
Country Code
Name
80-01-01
-
0
0
-
0
-
-
-
0
0
-
0
0
-
80-01-02
-
0
1
1
0
1
-
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
80-01-03
-
2
2
2
40
10
40
10
-
1
1
2
1
10
80-01-04
-
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
-
32
32
32
32
32
Default
60
Default
16
70
55
1
13
13
13
13
2
(Port 1 only)
9
9
7
6
8
42
8
6
200
14
14
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-569
SL1100
Thailand
Program No.
10-02-01
Country Code
India
Program No.
10-02-01
Country Code
Name
Name
Program
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Default
66
Default
91
ISSUE 3.01
2-570 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-34 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware units installed in the system.
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
01
Package Name
Item
02
03
Firmware Version Number
VOIPDB Software Version
04
05
06
DSP Project Number
Vocallo Firmware Version
OCT1010ID Version
00 ~ 12 (V1.5 Changed)
Input Data
Read Only:
PKG Name
Read Only:
00.00 ~ 15.15
Read Only:
DEV/PR/REL - 00.00.00.00.00.00
DEV/PR/REL - FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF
Read Only:
00000000 - FFFFFFFF
Read Only:
00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF
Read Only:
00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF
Default
-
-
-
-
-
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-571
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard
Programming.
Input Data
Wizard Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Maintenance Level
1 ~ 250
Input Data
0 = All (Display Data)
3 = SB (System Administrator B) (Display Data)
4 = SA (System Administrator A) (Display Data)
5 = IN (Installer Level) (Display Data)
6 = MF (Manufacture Level) (Display Data)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-572 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the firmware update feature. This data is available to set from the PC Programming FW update feature.
The following firmware is available to update with this feature:
• main.bin
• Dspdbu.bin
• dsp.bin
• intradbu.bin is not supported
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Firmware Update Schedule Time
Update mode
Read Only:
Year : 0 ~ 99
Month : 0 ~ 12
Day : 00 ~ 31
Hour : 00 ~ 23
Minute : 00 ~ 59
Read Only:
0 = Non Active
1 = Activated
03
Update Report
Read Only:
Maximum 256 characters
Default
0
Description
Set the time to update the firmware using a compact flash card.
Time registration fails if an expired time is registered.
0
-
Activate the Firmware Update feature.
If this setting is 1, new firmware on the compact flash card updates according to the setting at 90-36-01.
Output a report when the update is executed and saves one copy on the system. If a new update occurs, the new report overwrites the old report.
Refer to the
Sample Report on page 2-573 shown.
Program
90
Sample Report
Result
Update Success
Update Fail
Update Fail
Update Fail
Report Display
Update Success
Update is fail. Since ‘A’ drive is not available.
Update is fail. Since main up is not exist on A drive.
Update is fail. Since Time is expired.
Programming Manual 2-573
Program
90
SL1100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-574 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on/off each
User Programming Feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Item
Time setting
Holiday Night Service
Switching
DISA User ID Setup
Mail Box Setup
Text Messages Setup
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Change of music on hold tone
Automatic Night Service Pattern
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Weekly Night Service Switching
Text Data for Night Mode
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Incoming Ring Group Setup
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Abbreviated Dial Number and Name
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Night-mode switching Other
Group
DSS Key Assignment
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Doorphone Ringing Assignment
Extension Numbering
Extension Name
Night-mode switching Own
Group
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Input Data Default
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
Related
Program
10-01
(11-10-03)
10-04
(11-10-02)
12-02
1 = Turn On 12-03
1 = Turn On 12-07
1 = Turn On 12-04
1 = Turn On 25-08
1 = Turn On 40-02
1 = Turn On 20-16
1 = Turn On 22-04
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
11-10-04
13-04
11-10-12
1 = Turn On 30-03
1 = Turn On 32-02
1 = Turn On 11-02
1 = Turn On 15-01-01
1 = Turn On 11-10-01
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-575
Program
90
SL1100
22
23
20
21
26
27
24
25
30
31
28
29
32
33
34
Item
No.
18
Item
Call Forward-Immediate/No
Answer /Both Ring
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
19
Call Forward-Busy
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Trunk Incoming Ring Tone
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Internal Incoming Ring Tone
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Display Language Selection
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Toll Restriction Override
Password
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
User Programming Password
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Programmable Function Key
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
One Touch Key Assignment
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Trunk Name
Automatic Transfer per
Trunk
SPD Area No.
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Telephone Data Copy
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Dial in Name
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
IntraMail Station Mailbox Options
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Input Data
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• Maintenance
ISSUE 3.01
Default
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
Related
Program
11-11-01
11-11-03
11-11-05
11-11-02
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
11-11-20
15-02-02
11-11-20
15-02-03
15-02-01
1 = Turn On 21-07
1 = Turn On 90-28
1 = Turn On 15-07
1 = Turn On 15-09
1 = Turn On 15-14
1 = Turn On 14-01-01
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
24-04
92-01
1 = Turn On 22-11-03
1 = Turn On 15-20
1 = Turn On 47-02
2-576 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Virtual Loop Back Reset
Input Data
[Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• PC Programming
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-577
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS
Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roaming Server address.
Input Data
Server Information
Item
No.
01
Item
Server Address Type
02
03
Server Address
Port Number
Input Data
0 = IPv4
1 = IPv6
IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx)
0 ~ 65535
1 ~ 13
Default
0
None
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-578 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
Level:
IN
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Description
Use Program 90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version and firmware version of the DR700 MLT Terminal.
Input Data
Terminal Type
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Software Version
Hardware Version
1 ~ 3 = Not used
4 = IP4WW-24TIXH
Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF
Default
00.00.00.00
00.00.00.00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-579
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700 to delete the terminal license information delivered to the DR700 terminal.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Terminal License
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Up to eight digits
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-580 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.
Input Data
License Delete Code 000-000-000
~
999-999-999
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Terminal License
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-581
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline
Telephone
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC
Programming.
Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to change the
Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Temporary Password Change Request
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF
Change? (Yes = 1)
Default
00.00.00.00
Conditions
• This Program is activated when the Program 10-46-07 set to “1”.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-582 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display.
Input Data
Index Number
Item
No.
01
Item
System Alarm Display Telephone
Up to eight digits
Input Data
01 ~ 50
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-583
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance exchange of parts that need regular maintenance.
Input Data
Index
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Display Name
Year
Month
Day
Item
Index
01
02
03
04 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
Input Data
Up to 16 characters
00 ~ 99
01 ~ 12
01 ~ 31
Default
--- No setting ---
Backup battery
--- No setting ---
--- No setting ---
Default
Refer below
00
00
00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-584 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Save All Alarm Reports
Save New Alarm Reports
Print All? (1 = Yes)
Print All? (1 = Yes)
Input Data Default
-
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-585
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Clear All Alarm Reports
Input Data
All Clear? ( 1 = Yes)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-586 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-54 : PC/Web Programming
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Web Pro TCP port number
Input Data
1 ~ 65535
02
PC Pro TCP port
Number
1 ~ 65535
Description
The port number of TCP of the Web programming is set. The port number of new
TCP is not reflected from the Web Pro to the logout of all users of the Web Pro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting.
The port number of TCP of the PC programming is set. The port number of new
TCP is not reflected from the PCPro to the logout of all users of the PCPro who is logging in the system after data is changed in the setting.
Default
80
8000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
• PC Programming
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-587
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-55 : Free License Select
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Start Free License
Input Data
0 = Stop
1 = Start
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-588 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-56 : NTP Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
NTP Synchronize
02
Server Address
Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
IPv4 form : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IPv6 form : xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Default
0
No Setting
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-589
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level:
SA
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the Compact Flash memory on the CPU and to make the recovery data.
Input Data
Data ID
Item
No.
01
Item
Backup Recovery Data
Input Data
[Backup?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
1 ~ 5
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-590 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level:
SA
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the Compact
Flash memory of the CPU. After this command is executed, the system restarts automatically.
Input Data
Data ID
Item
No.
01
Item
Restore Recovery Data
Input Data
[Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
1 ~ 5
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-591
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level:
SA
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data stored in the
Compact Flash memory of the CPU.
Input Data
Data ID
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Recovery Data
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
1 ~ 5
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-592 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1 packages.
Input Data
Slot No.
Item
No.
01
Link Status
Item Input Data
Read Only:
- = No Link
0 = Link
N/A = No card seen in slot
00 ~ 12 (V1.5 Changed)
Default
None
Conditions
This program can be viewed in WebPro or PC Pro. (V3.0 or higher)
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-593
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-62 : Security ID Information
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-62 : Security ID Information to view the information for Security ID.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Security ID
Item Input Data
Read Only:
0 ~ 9, A ~ F (Maximum 32 characters)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-594 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-63 : DR700 Control
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-63 : DR700 Control to adjust settings of the DR700.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Priority Timer
Item
0 ~ 255
Input Data
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Default
80
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-595
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup
Level:
SA
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication password.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Password
Input Data
Up to 16 characters
Description
Sets the authentication password when the 1st Party CTI application is connected to the system via a NAT router. If a password is not set, the system does not certify it.
Default
nec-i
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-596 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup to setup the Login info to connect to the FTP
Server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
User Name
Password
FTP Server Host
Name
04
05
06
Input Data
Up to 32 characters
Up to 32 characters
Up to 255 characters
FTP Server TCP Port
0 ~ 65535
DNS Primary Address 0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
DNS Secondly Address
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Description
Input URL or IP Address of FTP Server.
Use xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format in case of IP
Address.
Default
SLSYSTEM
Dra#0ftp ftp.necii.com
21
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
90
Programming Manual 2-597
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set
Level:
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set to set time interval D-RAM data that is saved in F-ROM memory.
D-RAM memory : Configuration information such as call transfer and Do Not Disturb.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Interval time
Item Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 = Do not Auto-save
1 = 30 min
:
2 = 60 min
3 = 90 min
255 = 30 min (127 hr)
Default
48 (24 hr)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-598 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup to setup the volume level of Side Tone for each Analog
Trunk Port.
This program will change the setting of "PRG 81-07 CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Port" If the
Analog Port is in used or if it is other than a Analog Trunk Port then it will give out the error message.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item Input Data
Adjustment Start Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 084
02
1 digit data
Dial (1 dight)
Description
This will start the Adjustment of Side
Tone for each Analog Trunk Port. If it is successful it will change the
PRG 81-07. If it is successful it will ask to change it for all Analog Trunk
Port.. If you select to change the
Setting All Analog Trunk Port it will change all the Port in 81-07.
This setting will ask to use the digit after Line is retrieved.
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
81-07-01
21-01-05
21-01-06
14-01-07
21-06-06
21-05-07
0 -
Program
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-599
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Level:
IN
Program
92
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal, port, group, or other number. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied.
Input Data
Program Number XX ~ XX
Item No.
01
Item
Source Number
Destination Number (From)
Destination Number (To)
Input Data
• For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 084
• For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group
Number 01 ~ 25
• For Extension Base : Extension Number Maximum eight digits
• For Department Group Base : Department Group Number 01 ~ 32
• For DSS : DSS Console Number 01
~ 12
• For Door Phone: Door phone number : 1 ~ 6
Description
Enter the extension, trunk, group or other number from which the data is to be copied.
Enter the first extension, trunk, group or other number to which the information is to be copied.
Enter the last extension, trunk, group or other number to which the information is to be copied. If the information is being copied only to one extension, trunk, group or other number, enter the information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry.
The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs :
Trunk Port Base
Program No.
14-01
Program Name
Trunk Basic Data Setup
Copy all data except Trunk Name (Item 01).
14-02
14-04
14-08
14-09
20-30
21-03
21-12
21-21
21-22
Analog Trunk Data Setup
Behind PBX Setup
Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk
Timer Class for Trunk
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Toll Restriction for Trunks
CO Message Waiting Indication
2-600 Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 3.01
21-02
21-04
21-11
23-02
23-03
23-04
24-03
31-02
82-14
15-02
15-03
15-06
15-07
15-08
15-09
15-10
15-11
15-12
15-17
15-18
20-06
20-29
Program No.
22-02
22-03
22-05
22-08
31-05
81–07
Program Name
Incoming Service Type Setup
Trunk Ring Tone Setup
IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk
Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG
Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker
Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Trunk Group Base
Program No.
35-03
Program Name
SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Extension Base
Program No.
15-01
Program Name
Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Extension)
Copy all data except extension name (item 01).
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Trunk Access Map for Extension
Programmable Function Key
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
CO Message Waiting Indication
Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options
Class of Service for Extension
Timer Class for Extension
Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Hotline Assignment
Call Pickup Groups
Ringing Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Park Group Assignment
Internal Paging Group Assignment
Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone
SL1100
Program
92
Programming Manual 2-601
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program
92
Department Base
Program No.
16-01
35-04
Program Name
Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup
Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01).
SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group
DSS Console Base
Program No.
30-01
30-03
DSS Console Operation Mode
DSS Key Assignment
Door Box Base
Program No.
32-02
Door Box Ring Assignment
Program Name
Program Name
Conditions
• Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all keys whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the terminal (displays as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer numbers of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-602 Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers <Program
11-02>, <Program 11-04>. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Delete Yes : 1
Description
[Dial 1] + Hold key (Only press Hold key is canceled.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
92
Programming Manual 2-603
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level:
IN
Program
92
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each outside line.
Input Data
Program Number XX-XX
Item No.
01
02
03
Item
Source Number
Destination Number (From)
Destination Number (To)
Input Data
• For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 084
• For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group
Number 01 ~ 25
• For Extension Number : 001 ~ 100
(V2.0 Changed)
Including Virtual Extension : 01 ~ 50
• For Department Group Base : Department Group Number 01 ~ 32
• For DSS : (DSS Console Number 01
~ 12
Description
Enter the port number from where the data is to be copied.
Enter the first port number to where the information is to be copied
Enter the last port number to where the information is to be copied. If the information is to be copied only to one port, enter the information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry.
Refer to Program
92-01 Copy Program on page 2-600 for program that can be copied.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-604 Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level:
IN
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
1st Extension Number
2nd Extension Number
The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.
Program Number
15-10
15-11
15-12
15-14
15-17
15-18
16-02
20-06
20-29
21-02
21-04
21-07
21-10
11-02
12-05
13-03
13-06
15-01
15-02
15-03
15-06
15-07
15-08
15-09
Program Name
Extension Numbering
Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions
Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name
Extension Basic Data Setup
Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Trunk Access Map for Extension
Programmable Function Key
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
Programming One-Touch Keys
CO-Message Waiting Indication
Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Class of Service for Extension
Timer Class for Extensions
Trunk Group Routing for Extension
Toll Restriction Class for Extension
Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions
Input Data
Up to eight digits.
Programming Manual 2-605
Program
92
Program
92
SL1100
Program Number
23-03
23-04
24-03
24-09
26-04
31-02
41-02
42-02
82-14
90-28
92-05
21-11
21-13
21-15
21-18
21-19
21-20
22-04
22-06
23-02
Program Name
Hotline Assignment
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
Incoming Ring Group Setup
Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Call Pickup Group
Ringing Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension
Park Hold Group Assignment
Call Forward Split Settings
ARS Class of Service
Internal Paging Group Assignment
ACD Agent Extension Assignment for ACD Group (V1.5 Added)
Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup
Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone
User Programming Password Setup
Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
ISSUE 3.01
2-606 Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit password for each extension to allow Extension Data Swap.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Password
Input Data
Fixed four digits (No setting at default)
Up to eight digits.
Description
Password required on a per station basis when utilizing the station swap feature.
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
11-15-12
Program
92
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-607
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-06 : Fill Command
Level:
IN
Program
92
Description
Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table.
Input Data
Program Number XX - XX
Item No.
01
Item
Source Number
Destination Number (From)
Destination Number (To)
Input Data
Each extension port = 001 ~ 100 (V2.0 Changed) (Program 11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04)
Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)
Each ACD Group = 1 ~ 2 (V1.5 Added)
The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.
Program Number
11-02
11-04
11-07
11-17
Program Name
Extension Numbering
Virtual Extension Numbering
Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
ACD Group Pilot Number (V1.5 Added)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-608 Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-07 : Delete Command
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each extension group or each table.
Input Data
Program Number XX-XX
Item No.
01
Item
Destination Number (From)
Destination Number (To)
Input Data
Each extension port = 001 ~ 100 (V2.0 Changed) (Program
11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04)
Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)
Each ACD Group = 1 ~ 2 (V1.5 Added)
The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.
Program Number
11-02
11-04
11-07
11-17
Program Name
Extension Numbering
Virtual Extension Numbering
Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
ACD Group Pilot Number (V1.5 Added)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
92
Programming Manual 2-609
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 93 : System Information
93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)
Program
93
Description
Use Program 93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information to display day/night mode for night mode service group.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group No.
Item
No.
01
Item
Day/Night mode
Input Data
1 = Mode 1
2 = Mode 2
3 = Mode 3
4 = Mode 4
5 = Mode 5
6 = Mode 6
7 = Mode 7
8 = Mode 8
1 ~ 4
Description
Read Only:
Indicates current day/night mode per night mode service group.
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-610 Program 93 : System Information
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 93 : System Information
93-02 : Trunk Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)
Description
Use Program 93-02 : Trunk Information to display the setting of each trunk.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item Input Data
Set Automatic
Transfer to
Transfer
Trunk Port Disable by Service code
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1 ~ 84
Description
Read Only:
Indicates Automatic Trunk Trasfer setting status.
Read Only:
Indicates Trunk Port Disable (Busy out) status.
Default
None
Related
Program
11-10-06
None 11-10-27
Program
93
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-611
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 93 : System Information
93-03 : Extension Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)
Program
93
Description
Use Program 93-03 : Extension Information to display the settings of each extension.
Input Data
Extension
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item Input Data Description
Call Forward-
All/No Answer/
BothRing
0 = Call Forwarding off
1 = Call Forwarding with Both Ringing
2 = Call Forwarding when No Answer
3 = Call Forwarding All
Call
0 ~ 9, * , #, P, R, @
(Up to 36 digits)
Call Forwarding
Destination for
Both Ring, All
Call, No Answer
Call Forward-
Busy
Call Forwarding
Busy destination
0 = Call Forward-Off
1 = Call Forward-Busy or No answer
2 = Call Forward-Busy
0 ~ 9, * , #, P, R, @
(Up to 36 digits)
Read Only:
Indicates Call Forward-All/No Answer/BothRing setting statsus per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Call Forward-All/No Answer/BothRing destination number set per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Call Forward-Busy setting status per extension.
Call Forwarding
– Follow-Me
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Call Forwarding
Follow-Me destination
Do Not Disturb
Extension Number (Up to 8 digits)
Message Waiting
(Set)
0 = No Setting
1 = DND External
2 = DND intercom
3 = DND Transfer
4 = DND All
Extension Number (Up to 8 digits)
Read Only:
Indicates Call Forward-Busy destination number set per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Call Forward-Follow-Me setting status per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Call forwarding follow-me extension number set per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates DND setting status per extension.
Message Waiting
(Rec)
Extension Number (Up to 8 digits)
Read Only:
Indicates extension number which you set Message Waiting.
Read Only:
Indicates extension number when left Message Waiting.
Up to 8 digits
Default
None
Related
Program
11-11-01
11-11-03
11-11-04
11-11-05
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
11-11-01
11-11-03
11-11-04
11-11-05
11-11-02
11-11-04
11-11-02
11-11-04
11-11-07
11-11-07
11-11-08
11-11-09
11-11-10
11-11-11
11-11-09
11-11-10
11-11-11
2-612 Program 93 : System Information
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Item
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Item Input Data Description
Alarm Clock 1
Preset time at
Alarm 1
Alarm Clock 2
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Time set in Alarm
Clock 1.
When
PRG93-03-11 is
"0", 「00：00」
is indicated.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Read Only:
Indicates Alarm Clock 1 setting status.
Read Only:
Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock
1.
Read Only:
Indicates Alarm Clock 2 setting status.
Read Only:
Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock
2.
Preset Time at
Alarm 2
Forced Intercom
Ring (ICM Call
Type)
BGM
Time set in Alarm
Clock 2.
When
PRG93-03-11 is
"0", 「00：00」
is indicated.
0 = Disable(Voice1)
1 = Enable(Signal)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Key Touch Tone
Dial Block
Repeat Dial
Headset Mode
Switching
Headset Ringing
Mode Switching
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Read Only:
Indicates ICM Call Type per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates BGM setting status per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Key Touch Tone setting status per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Dial Block setting status per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Repeat Dial setting status per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Headset Mode Switching setting status per extension.
Read Only:
Indicates Headset Ringing Mode
Switching setting status per extension.
Default
None
Related
Program
11-11-12
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
11-11-12
11-11-12
11-11-12
11-11-15
11-11-16
11-11-18
11-11-19
11-11-33
11-11-65
11-11-43
Program
93
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-613
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
Program 93 : System Information
93-04 : Redial List
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)
Program
93
Description
Use Program 93-04 : Redial List to display the redial list of each extension.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Redial Data
02
Name
Extension Number
Redial Last Number
Input Data Description
Up to 8 digits
10
Dial Data
1 ~ 9, 0, * , #, P, R, @
(Up to 36 digits)
Up to 12 characters
Read Only:
Indicates the number stored in Outgoing call history.
Read Only:
Indicates the name stored in Outgoing call hitory.
Default
None
None
Related
Program
15-02-13
15-02-39
15-01-01
13-04-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-614 Program 93 : System Information
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
Program 93 : System Information
93-05 : Department Group Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)
Description
Use Program 93-05 : Department Group Information to display the settings of each department group.
Input Data
Department Group Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item Input Data
Set Automatic transfer at Department Group call
Set Delayed transfer at Department Group call
Set DND at Department Group call
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Read Only:
Indicates Automatic transfer setting status per Department Group.
Read Only:
Indicates Delayed transfer setting status per Department Group.
Read Only:
Indicates DND setting status per
Department Group.
1 ~ 32
Default
None
Related
Program
11-11-25
None
None
11-11-28
11-11-30
Program
93
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual 2-615
Program
93
SL1100 ISSUE 3.01
MEMO
2-616 Program 93 : System Information
ISSUE 3.01
SL1100
MEMO
Programming Manual 2-617
Programming Manual
NEC Corporation
ISSUE 3.01
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement